EN PHYWE Catalogue Physics by PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co KG

ti on a

i at rn te In

School and University

Ou wi so yo sci sch rig

sics

istry

Fu n n n n n

Physics

tics Modern Physics · Thermodynamics · Mechanics · Optics

Chemistry

Electrochemistry · Spectroscopy · Pysical Chemistry

ogy

Biology

Sciences

Applied Sciences

Ecology and Environment · Senses and Nerves · Microbiology

X-ray · Renewable Energy · Material Sciences · Medicine

excellence in science

110610_umschlag_export.indd 3

10.06.11 16:34

Service

Service from A to Z – our service, your satisfaction

Customer service before, during and after your purchase The PHYWE service does not end with the delivery of the equipment. With our after sales service, we offer you comprehensive support:

Individual Service for individual needs By choosing a PHYWE product you decide for a comprehensive service at the same time. We support you with our multi-level service concept. From planning through to installation and up to our extensive after sales service. Rely on our strengths: rugged and long-lasting products made in Germany, customized for your needs.

Customized information

Installation and setting-up

Stockage service / instruction

Training courses at PHYWE or on-site

Technical service

Repair service

1st response within 24 hours with tracking number P. +49 (0) 551 604-126 F. +49 (0) 551 604-106 service@phywe.de

excellence in science

110610_umschlag_export.indd 8

10.06.11 16:34

2 Physics

Physics 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2

Mechanics Statics, material properties Dynamics Mechanics of liquids Mechanics of gases Oscillations and waves Mechanics on the adhesive table Acoustics Ultrasound Mechanical sound sources Electrical sound sources Propagation of sound Thermodynamics Thermal expansion Transport of heat

29 30 40 68 77 80 88 89 90 110 111 112 123 124 126

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 27

2 Physics

2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6

Calorimetry Solar technology Conversion of thermal energy Behaviour of gases States of aggregation Thermodynamics on the magnetic board Electricity Electricity/electronics teaching system Switching unit system Electricity Electrical conduction Electrostatics, electric field Magnetostatics, magnetic field Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force Electric motor/generator teaching systems Electromagnetic oscillations and waves Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity Optics Geometrical optics Speed of light Science of colours Wave optics Advanced optics and laser systems Optical components Modern Physics X-ray Physics Quantum Physics Particle Physics Molecule and Solid State Physics Atomic and nuclear Physics Radioactivity

excellence in science 28

130 133 135 138 145 151 153 154 164 170 183 193 204 226 229 237 243 244 248 250 253 286 295 299 300 309 323 325 333 343

2 Physics 2.1 Mechanics

Mechanics 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6

Statics, material properties Dynamics Mechanics of liquids Mechanics of gases Oscillations and waves Mechanics on the adhesive table

30 40 68 77 80 88

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 29

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Measurement of basic constants: length, weight and time

Principle Caliper gauges, micrometers and spherometers are used for the accurate measurement of lengths, thicknesses, diameters and curvatures. A mechanical balance is used for weight determinations, a decade counter is used for accurate time measurements. Measuring procedures, accuracy of measurement and reading accuracy are demonstrated. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the volume of tubes with the caliper gauge. Determination of the thickness of wires, cubes and plates with the micrometer. Determination of the thickness of plates and the radius of curvature of watch glasses with the spherometer.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Length Diameter Inside diameter thickness Curvature Vernier Weight resolution Time measurement

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2110100

excellence in science 30

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Moments

Principle: Coplanar forces (weight, spring balance) act on the moments disc on either side of the pivot. In equilibrium, the moments are determined as a function of the magnitude and direction of the forces and of the reference point. Tasks: 1. 2. 3.

Moment as a function of the distance between the origin of the coordinates and the point of action of the force Moment as a function of the angle between the force and the position vector to the point of action of the force Moment as a function of the force.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Moments Couple Equilibrium Statics Lever Coplanar forces

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2120100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 31

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Modulus of elasticity

Principle: A flat bar is supported at two points. It is bent by the action of a force acting at its centre. The modulus of elasticity is determined from the bending and the geometric data of the bar. Tasks: 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the characteristic curve of the dial gauge. Determination the bending of flatbars as a function of the force; at constant force: of the thickness, of the width and of the distance between the support points. Determination the modulus of elasticity of steel, aluminium and brass.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Young's modulus Modulus of elasticity Stress Deformation Poisson's ratio Hooke's law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2120200

excellence in science 32

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Mechanical hysteresis

Principle: The relationship between torque and angle of rotation is determined when metal bars are twisted. The hysteresis curve is recorded. Tasks: 1. 2.

Record the hysteresis curve of steel and copper rods. Record the stress-relaxation curve with various relaxation times of different materials.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Mechanical hysteresis Elasticity Plasticity Relaxation Torsion modulus Plastic flow Torque Hooke's law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2120300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 33

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Hooke's law with Cobra3

Principle The validity of Hooke's Law is proven using various helical springs with different spring constants. In comparison, the behaviour of a stretched rubber band is examined, for which there is no proportionality between acting force and resulting extension. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Calibration of the system (movement sensor and force sensor). Measurement of the tensile force as a function of the path for three different helical springs and a rubber band. Determination of the spring constant and evaluation of a hysteresis curve. Verification of Hooke's law.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Spring constant Limit of elasticity Extension and compression

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130111

Hooke's law P2130101

excellence in science 34

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Surface tension with the ring method (Du Nouy method)

Principle The force is measured on a ring shortly before a liquid film tears using a torsion meter. The surface tension is calculated from the diameter of the ring and the tear-off force. Tasks 1. 2.

Determine the surface tension of olive oil as a function of temperature. Determine the surface tension of water/methanol mixtures as functions of the mixture ratio.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Surface energy Interface Surface tension Adhesion Critical point Eötvös equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140500

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 35

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Resolution of forces on an inclined plane

Software interTESS Physics, Mechanics, DVD 01051-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Mechanik 1-5 01158-01 German TESS Physics manual Mechanics 1 to 5 01158-02 English TESS Physique manual Mechanique 1-5 01158-03 French TESS Física manual Mecanica 1-5 01158-04 Spanish P1003300

In order to lift a certain weight by a specific height h, it is much easier to push it up a ramp than to lift it directly. Students can read the amount of force directly from a dynamometer attached to a carriage. The forces arising at various inclination angles of the plane can be compared directly. Literature for this experiment as follows:

Restoring force on a displaced pendulum

Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Mechanics, DVD 01051-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Mechanik 1-5 01158-01 German TESS Physics manual Mechanics 1 to 5 01158-02 English TESS Physique manual Mechanique 1-5 01158-03 French TESS Física manual Mecanica 1-5 01158-04 Spanish Principle

P0999600

Reversible pendulum (physical pendulum)

When a pendulum bob suspended on a string is displaced and released, it seeks its equilibrium position and starts to swing. In the experiment depicted here, the torsion dynamometer holds the bob at its maximum displacement. The value of the force displayed directly corresponds to the restoring force of the pendulum. The experiment can be used to determine whether that force is dependent on the displacement of the pendulum. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 1 01152-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 1 01152-02 English

A reversible pendulum has two marked points from which it can be suspended and for which the periods of oscillation are identical. The distance between the two points, called the reduced pendulum length, is greater than the distance between the points of suspension and the centre of gravity. In this experiment, students will measure the period of oscillation of a reversible pendulum and determine the reduced pendulum length. In addition, a comparison will be made between the periods of oscillation of the reversible pendulum itself and a normal string pendulum with a string length equal to the reduced length of the reversible pendulum.

Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00

excellence in science 36

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1252700

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Fixed pulley

Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English

Mechanics,

Acoustics,

P1420700

TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME3 with Timer 2-1

Function and Applications Principle When raising a weight with a fixed pulley, does the pulley affect the amount of force that has to be applied? Using materials such as rulers, arrows and labels, the magnetic demonstration board can be used to clearly examine this question in detail. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 1 01152-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 1 01152-02 English P1253800

Expansion device set for sets mechanic ME1 and ME2. Timer 2-1 includes the digital counter. In combination with set ME1 and ME2, the student experiments on the subject "Linear movement" can be carried out in a modern way and extremely accurately. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Density determination of air

Complete device set: Simple implementation of the experiments High measurement accuracy through utilization of forked photoelectric barriers and digital time-measuring device Stable retention: Long-life, easy to store (stackable), rapid control-check for completeness (foamed-material insert) Experimentation literature available for students and teachers: Minimum preparation time Includes the digital counter timer 2-1, two forked photoelectric barriers and all necessary accessories Stable, stackable safekeeping box, with device-shaped, foamedmaterial insert

TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME3 with Timer 2-1 13283-88 TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME1 13271-88 TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME2 13272-88 TESS Physics manual Mechanics 1 to 5 01158-02 TESS Physics manual Mechanics 6 01159-02

Principle Density is known as a characteristic material property of solid and liquid matter. A gas such as air, which, from the perspective of physics, is matter too, also has this property of course. In the experiment, a sphere of known volume is filled with air and then weighed. The result is used to calculate the density of air. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 37

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

PHYGATE, USB adapter for forked photoelectric barrier compact, including measurement software

▪ ▪

Before the measurement starts it can be manually adjusted to a maximum of 6 decades defined range, eg to suppress is not physically meaningful digits on the display. A special jack for direct connection of a GM counter tube is available for radioactivity experiments. The required voltage can be changed manually to determine the characteristics of a counter tubes to. The stopwatch function can be entered by means of electrical contacts, sensors, or manually in the various types of triggers for the precise starting and stopping for time measurement. The measured values are represented by six red 20mm highcontrast 7-segment displays. An additional three-digit display is used to display the unit (ms, s, Hz, kHz, MHz, I / s, RPM, Imp, V, m / s). The various operating states are indicated by LEDs. Range switching in all modes manually (before measurement) and automatically when an overflow.

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications With PHYGATE, the forked photoelectric barrier can be connected "compactly" to the USB interface of the PC. Benefits ▪ ▪

Measuring data from up to 5 forked photoelectric barriers can be recorded directly on the computer with the PHYCON software, and immediately represented graphically PHYGATE can be employed in a great number of experiments, for example relating to translation, rotation and movement

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Supply: 5 V / 50 mA over USB interface Min. shading time: 20 µs Max. shading time: 22 s Delivery including software

PHYGATE USB interface for light barriers + software 11207-25 Light barrier, compact 11207-20

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Operating temperature range 5th .. 40 ° C Relative humidity <80% Digital display: Measurement reading LED 6-digit, 7-segment, 20 mm Units LED 3-digit, 5x7 dot matrix Units ms, s, Hz, kHz, MHz, I / s, RPM, Imp, V, m / s Signal Input: Signal bandwidth 0.1 Hz .. 10 MHz Counter Tube Input voltage 150 V. .. 660 V (factory setting: 500V) with manual adjustment Photoelectric output for power supply of 5 V sat. max 1 A Stopwatch 0.000 ... 99,999.9 s, resolution 1 ms Timer 0.000 ms ... 3999.99 s, resolution1µs Velocity 0.000 m/s...9999.9 m / s, resolution 0.001 m / s Period measurement 0.000 ms ... 99.9999 s, resolution 1µs Frequency measurement 0.00 Hz .. 9.99999 MHz, resolution 10 mHz Speed measurement 6. .. 99,999 RPM, 1 RPM resolution Pulse counting 0. .. 999,999 Imp Pulse rate measurement 0.0 ... 99,999.9 I / s Mains supply: Mains voltage 110 .. 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA Housing dimensions (W, H, D) 370 x 168 x 236 (mm) Mass of 2.9 kilograms

Universal Counter 13601-99 Light barrier, compact 11207-20 Incremental wheel 11207-21 Adapter plate for Light barrier compact 11207-22

Universal Counter

Light barrier with counter Function and Applications The universal counter is used for measuring time, frequency, pulse rates, pulse counting, periodic times, speeds and velocities. Benefits ▪

▪

excellence in science 38

Function and Applications With the function of an electronic time measuring and counting device.

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.1 Statics, material properties

Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra3 newton sensor +/- 50 N

4 figureluminous display, selection switch for 4 operating modes RESET key BNC jack for exterior starting and/ or stopping of time measurement TTL output to control peripheral devices power supply connector (4 mm jacks)

Equipment and technical Data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fork width: 70 mm Usable barrier depth: 65 mm Sensitivity adjustable Max. working frequency: 25 kHz External dimensions (mm): 160 x 25 x 105M6 Threaded holes in casing: 7 Stem included: 100 mm, M6 thread

11207-30

Inclined plane, with roller

Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring forces in conjunction with the Newton sensor (no.12110.01). Benefits: Especially suitable for experiments dealing with extremely small forces, e.g. surface tension experiments, Coulomb's law, current balance etc. Equipment and technical data:

Function and Applications: Practical compact device to demonstrate the investigation of the forces which keep a body in equilibrium on an inclined plane. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fast installation, no adjustment. Angle of inclination of the track can be freely selected between 15°...45°. Rolling body as measuring object. Advantage: all force application lines intersect at the centre of gravity. Dynamometers can be attached parallel or perpendicularly to the track, or horizontally, without tedious adjustments. Clear demonstration of the decomposition of a force according to the "force parallelogram".

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring ±4 mN, ±40 mN, ranges ±400 mN, ±4 N Resolution 0.0035 mN,0.035 mN, 0.35 mN, 3.5 mN Compensation± 4 N in every measuring range. Dimensions: (100x50x40) mm

Measuring module Newton 12110-00 Newton sensor 12110-01 Cobra3 newton sensor +/- 50N 12125-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software Cobra3-Force/ Tesla 14515-61

2 demonstration rules and an angular scale to determine geometry. 3 holders for dynamometers. Height (mm): 440 Dimensions base plate (mm): 600 x 136

Assesories: ▪

2 spring balances 2.5 N (03060-02) are required

Inclined plane, with roller 11301-88 Inclined plane 11301-00 Roller for inclined plane 11301-01 Spring balance 2,5 N 03060-02

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 39

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Newton's 2nd law/ air track

Principle The distance-time law, the velocity time law, and the relationship between mass, acceleration and force are determined with the aid of the air track rail for uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line. Tasks Determination of: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Distance travelled as a function of time Velocity as a function of time Acceleration as a function of the accelerated mass Acceleration as a function of force.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Velocity Acceleration Force Acceleration of gravity

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130301

Newton's 2nd law/ demonstration track P2130305 Newton's 2nd law/ air track with Cobra3 P2130311 Newton's 2nd law/ demonstration track with Cobra3 P2130315

excellence in science 40

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Laws of collision/ air track

Principle The velocities of two gliders, moving without friction on an air-cushiontrack, are measured before and after collision, for both elastic and inelastic collision. Tasks 1. Elastic collision 1.1 The impulses of the two gliders as well as their sum after the collision.For comparison the mean value of the impulses of the first glider is entered as a horizontal line in the graph. 1.2 Their energies, in a manner analogous to Task 1.1 1.3 In accordance with the mean value of the measured impulse of the first glider before the collision, the theoretical values of the impulses for the two gliders are entered for a range of mass ratios from 0 to 3. For purposes of comparison the measuring points (see 1.1) are plotted in the graph. 1.4 In accordance with the mean value of the measured energy of the first glider before the collision, the theoretical values of the energy after the collision are plotted analogously to Task 1.3. In the process, the measured values are compared with the theoretical curves. 2. Inelastic collision 2.1 The impulse values are plotted as inTask 1.1. 2.2 The energy values are plotted as inTask 1.2. 2.3 The theoretical and measured impulse values are compared as in Task 1.3. 2.4 As in Task 1.4, the theoretical and measured energy values are compared. In order to clearly illustrate the energyloss and its dependence on the mass ratios, the theoretical functions of the total energy of both gliders and the energy loss after the collision are plotted. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Conservation of momentum Conservation of energy Linear motion Velocity Elastic loss Elastic collision

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130501

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 41

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Laws of collision/ demonstration track with a 4-4 timer

1.1 The impulses of the two gliders as well as their sum after the collision. For comparison the mean value of the impulses of the first glider is entered as a horizontal line in the graph. 1.2 Their energies, in a manner analogous to Task 1.1 1.3 In accordance with the mean value of the measured impulse of the first glider before the collision, the theoretical values of the impulses for the two gliders are entered for a range of mass ratios from 0 to 3. For purposes of comparison the measuring points (see 1.1) are plotted in the graph. 1.4 In accordance with the mean value of the measured energy of the first glider before the collision, the theoretical values of the energy after the collision are plotted analogously to Task 1.3. In the process, the measured values are compared with the theoretical curves.

2. Inelastic collision ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2.1 The impulse values are plotted as in Task 1.1. 2.2 The energy values are plotted as in Task 1.2. 2.3 The theoretical and measured impulse values are compared as in Task 1.3. 2.4 As in Task 1.4, the theoretical and measured energy values are compared. In order to clearly illustrate the energy loss and its dependence on the mass ratios, the theoretical functions of the total energy of both gliders and the energy loss after the collision are plotted.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Conservation of momentum Conservation of energy Linear motion Velocity Elastic loss Elastic collision

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130505

Laws of collision/ air track with Cobra3 P2130511 Laws of collision/ demonstration track with Cobra3 P2130515

excellence in science 42

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Free fall, complete set (interface version with Cobra3)

Principle: The fall times t are measured for different heights of fall h. h is represented as the function of t or t2, so the distance-time law of the free fall results as h = 1/2 路 g 路 t2. Then the measured values are taken to determine the acceleration due to gravity g. Tasks: Determination of 1. 2. 3.

Distance time law for the free fall. Velocity-time law for the free fall. Precise measurement of the acceleration due to gravity for the free fall.

What you can learn about: Linear motion due to constant acceleration, Laws governing falling bodies, Acceleration due to gravity Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130711

Free fall P2130701

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 43

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Determination of the gravitational constant/ computerised Cavendish balance

Principle Two small lead spheres are positioned on a beam, which is freely suspended on a thin metal wire. At the beginning the large lead spheres are positioned symmetrically opposite to the small spheres in that way that the attractive forces are eliminated. There after, the large spheres are swung so that they are close to the small spheres. As a consequence of the gravitational attracting force the beam with the small spheres now moves in a new equilibrium position, where the attractive forces are equivalent to the force of the torsion of the wire. The gravitational constant can be determined from the new equilibrium position. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Calibration of an angular detector. Determination of the oscillation time of a free and damped oscillating torsion pendulum. Determination of the gravitational constant.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Law of gravitation Free, damped, forced and torsional oscillations Moment of inertia of spheres and rods Steiner's theorem Shear modulus

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2130901

excellence in science 44

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Projectile motion

Principle A steel ball is fired by a spring at different velocities and at different angles to the horizontal. The relationships between the range, the height of projection, the angle of inclination,and the firing velocity are determined. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To determine the range as a function of the angle of inclination. To determine the maximum height of projection as a function of the angle of inclination. To determine the (maximum) range as a function of the initial velocity.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Trajectory parabola Motion involving uniform acceleration Ballistics

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131100

Ballistic pendulum P2131200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 45

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration

Principle A moment acts on a body which can be rotated about a bearing without friction.The moment of inertia is determined from the angular acceleration. Tasks 1.

From the angular acceleration, the moment of inertia are determined as a function of the mass and of the distance from the axis of rotation: of a disc, of a bar, of a mass point.

What you can learn about Angular velocity, Rotary motion, Moment, Moment of inertia of a disc, Moment of inertia of a bar, Moment of inertia of a mass point Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131301

Moment of inertia and angular acceleration with a precision pivot bearing P2131305 Moment of inertia and angular acceleration with Cobra3 P2131311 Moment of inertia and angular acceleration with Cobra3 and a precision pivot bearing P2131315

excellence in science 46

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Moment and angular momentum

Principle The angle of rotation and angular velocity are measured as a function of time on a body which is pivoted so as to rotate without friction and which is acted on by a moment. The angular acceleration is determined as a function of the moment. Tasks With uniformly accelerated rotary motion, the following will be determined: 1. 2. 3. 4.

the the the the

angle of rotation as a function of time, angular velocity as a function of time. angular acceleration as a function of time, angular acceleration as a function of the lever arm.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Circular motion Angular velocity Angular acceleration Moment of inertia Newton's laws Rotation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131500

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 47

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Centrifugal force, complete set (interface version)

Principle A body with variable mass moves on a circular path with adjustable radius and variable angular velocity. The centrifugal force of the body will be measured as a function of these parameters. Tasks Determination of the centrifugal force as a function 1. of the mass, 2. of the angular velocity, 3. of the distance from the axis of rotation to the centre of gravity of the car. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Centrifugal force Centripetal force Rotary motion Angular velocity Apparent force

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131611

Centrifugal force P2131601

excellence in science 48

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Mechanical conservation of energy/ Maxwell's wheel

Principle A disc, which can unroll with its axis on two cords, moves in the gravitational field. Potential energy, energy of translation and energy of rotation are converted into one another and are determined as a function of time. Tasks The moment of inertia of the Maxwell disc is determined. Using the Maxwell disc, 1. the potential energy, 2. the energy of translation, 3. the energy of rotation, are determined as a function of time. What you can learn about Maxwell disc, Energy of translation, Energy of rotation, Potential energy, Moment of inertia, Angular velocity, Angular acceleration, Instantaneous velocity, Gyroscope Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131800

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 49

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Laws of gyroscopes/ 3-axis gyroscope

Principle The momentum of inertia of the gyroscope is investigated by measuring the angular acceleration caused by torques of different known values. In this experiment, two of the axes of the gyroscope are fixed. The relationship between the precession frequency and the gyro-frequency of the gyroscope with 3 free axes is examined for torques of different values applied to the axis of rotation. If the axis of rotation of the force free gyroscope is slightly displaced, a nutation is induced. The nutation frequency will be investigated as a function of gyro frequency. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determination of the momentum of inertia of the gyroscope by measurement of the angular acceleration. Determination of the momentum of inertia by measurement of the gyro-frequency and precession frequency. Investigation of the relationship between precession and gyro-frequency and its dependence from torque. Investigation of the relationship between nutation frequency and gyro-frequency.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Momentum of inertia Torque Angular momentum Precession Nutation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2131900

excellence in science 50

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Laws of gyroscopes/ cardanic gyroscope

Principle If the axis of rotation of the force-free gyroscope is displaced slightly, a nutation is produced. The relationship between precession frequency or nutation frequency and gyro-frequency is examined for different moments of inertia. Additional weights are applied to a gyroscope mounted on gimbals, so causing a precession. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the precession frequency as a function of the torque and the angular velocity of the gyroscope. To determine the nutational frequency as a function of the angular velocity and the moment of inertia.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Moment of inertia Torque Angular momentum Nutation Precession

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 51

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Mathematical pendulum

Principle A mass, considered as of point form, suspended on a thread and subjected to the force of gravity, is deflected from its position of rest. The period of the oscillation thus produced is measured as a function of the thread length and the angle of deflection. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

For small deflections, the oscillation period is determined as a function of the cord length. The acceleration due to gravity is determined. The oscillation period is determined as a function of the deflection.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Duration of oscillation Period Amplitude Harmonic oscillation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132100

excellence in science 52

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Reversible pendulum

Principle By means of a reversible pendulum, terrestrial gravitational acceleration g may be determined from the period of oscillation of a physical pendulum, knowing neither the mass nor the moment of inertia of the latter. Tasks 1. 2.

Measurement of the period for different axes of rotation. Determination of terrestrial gravitational acceleration g.

What you can learn about Physical pendulum, Moment of inertia, Steiner's law, Reduced length of pendulum, Reversible pendulum, Terrestrial gravitational acceleration Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 53

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Variable g pendulum

Principle Investigate the oscillation behaviour of a pendulum (rod pendulum) by varying the magnitude of the components of the acceleration of gravity which are decisive for the oscillation period. The pendulum that is to be used is constructed in such a manner that its oscillation plane can be progressively rotated from a vertical orientation to a horizontal one. The angle F, by which the oscillation plane deviates from its normal vertical position, can be read from a scale. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Measurement of the oscillation period of the pendulum as a function of the angle of inclination; of the oscillation plane for two different pendulum lengths. Graphical analysis of the measured correlations and a comparison with the theoretical curves, which have been standardised with the measured value at 0. Calculation of the effective pendulum length l for the acceleration of gravity, which is assumed to be known. Comparison of this value with the distance between the pivot point of the pendulum and the centre of gravity of the mobile pendulum weight. On the moon's surface the "lunar acceleration of gravity" gm is only 16.6 % of the earth's acceleration of gravity g. Calculate the angle; and set it on the device such that the pendulum in the laboratory oscillates with the same oscillation period with which it would oscillate on the moon in a perpendicular position. Compare the measured oscillation period with the calculated one.

What you can learn about Oscillation period, Harmonic oscillation, Mathematical pendulum, Physical pendulum, Decomposition of force, Moment of inertia Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132301

Variable g pendulum with Cobra3, complete set (interface version) P2132311

excellence in science 54

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Harmonic oscillations of spiral springs - springs linked in parallel and in series

Principle The spring constant D is determined for different experimental setups from the oscillation period and the suspended mass. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the spring constant D for different springs. Determination of the spring constant for springs linked in parallel. Determination of the spring constant for springs linked in series.

What you can learn about Spring constant, Hooke's law oscillations, Limit of elasticity, Parallel springs, Serial springs, Use of an interface Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132611

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 55

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Forced oscillations - Pohl's pendulum

Principle If an oscillating system is allowed to swing freely it is observed that the decrease of successive maximum amplitudes is highly dependent on the damping. If the oscillating system is stimulated to swing by an external periodic torque, we observe that in the steady state the amplitude is a function of the frequency and the amplitude of the external periodic torque and of the damping. The characteristic frequencies of the free oscillation as well as the resonance curves of the forced oscillation for different damping values are to be determined Tasks A. Free oscillation 1. To determine the oscillating period and the characteristic frequency of the undamped case. 2. To determine the oscillating periods and the corresponding characteristic frequencies for different damping values. Successive, unidirectional maximum amplitudes are to be plotted as a function of time. The corresponding ratios of attenuation, the damping constants and the logarithmic decrements are to be calculated. 3. To realise the a periodic case and the creeping. B. Forced oscillation 1. The resonance curves are to be determined and to be represented graphically using the damping values of A. 2. The resonance frequencies are to be determined and are to be compared with the resonance frequency values found before hand. 3. The phase shifting between the torsion pendulum and the stimulating external torque is to be observed for a small damping value assuming that in one case the stimulating frequency is far below the resonance frequency and in the other case it is far above it. What you can learn about Angular frequency, Characteristic frequency, Resonance frequency, Torsion pendulum, Torsional vibration, Torque and Restoring torque, Damped/ undamped free oscillation, Forced oscillation, Ratio of attenuation/ decrement, Damping constant, Logarithmic decrement, Aperiodic case, Creeping Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132701

Forced oscillations - Pohl's pendulum with Cobra3, complete set (interface version) P2132711

excellence in science 56

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Moments of inertia of different bodies/ Steiner's theorem with Cobra3

Principle The moment of inertia of a solid body depends on its mass distribution and the axis of rotation. Steiner's theorem elucidates this relationship. Tasks 1. 2.

The moments of inertia of different bodies are determined by oscillation measurements. Steiner's theorem is verified.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Rigid body Moment of inertia Centre of gravity Axis of rotation Torsional vibration Spring constant Angular restoring force

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132811

Moment of inertia/ Steiner's theorem P2132801

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 57

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Torsional vibrations and torsion modulus

Principle Bars of various materials will be exciting into torsional vibration. The relationship between the vibration period and the geometrical dimensions of the bars will be derived and the specific shear modulus for the material determined. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Static determination of the torsion modulus of a bar. Determination of the moment of inertia of the rod and weights fixed to the bar, from the vibration period. Determination of the dependence of the vibration period on the length and thickness of the bars. Determination of the shear modulus of steel, copper, aluminium and brass.

What you can learn about Shear modulus, Angular velocity, Torque, Moment of inertia, Angular restoring torque, G-modulus, Modulus of elasticity Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133000

excellence in science 58

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Moments of inertia and torsional vibrations

Principle Various bodies perform torsional vibrations about axes through their centres of gravity. The vibration period is measured and the moment of inertia determined from this. Tasks The following will be determined: 1. The angular restoring moment of the spiral spring. 2. The moment of inertia a) of a disc, two cylinder, a sphere and a bar, b) of two point masses, as a function of the perpendicular distance to the axis of rotation. The centre of gravity lies in the axis of rotation. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Rigid body Moment of inertia Axis of rotation Torsional vibration Spring constant Angular restoring moment Moment of inertia of a sphere Moment of inertia of a disc Moment of inertia of a cylinder Moment of inertia of a long bar Moment of inertia of 2 point masses

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 59

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Propagation of a periodically excited continuous transverse wave

Principle The periodicity of connected stationary oscillators is demonstrated on the example of a continuous, harmonic transverse wave generated by a wave machine. The number of oscillations carried out by different oscillators within a certain time is determined and the velocity of propagation is measured. A relation between frequency, wavelength and phase velocity is established. The formation of standing waves is demonstrated and studied. Tasks 1. The frequency of the oscillators 1, 10, 20, 30 and 40 is to be determined with the electronic counter of the lightbarrier and the stopwatch for a particular frequency of excitation. 2. By means of a path-time measurement the phase velocity of a transverse wave is to be determined. 3. For three different frequencies the corresponding wavelengths are to be measured and it is to be shown that the product of frequency and wavelength is a constant. 4. The four lowest natural frequencies with two ends of the oscillator system fixed are to be detected. 5. The four lowest natural frequencies with one end of the oscillator system fixed and the other one free are to be detected. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Periodic motion Frequency Wavelength Phase velocity Standing waves Natural frequency Free and fixed end Damping of waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133200

excellence in science 60

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Phase velocity of rope waves/ waves of wires

Principle A quadrangular rubber rope is inserted through the demonstration motor and a linear polarised fixed wave is generated. With the help of a stroboscope, the frequency and the wave length are determined. Then the phase velocity of ropewaves with a fixed tensile stress is ascertained. Subsequently, the mathematical relationship between the phase velocity of the rope and the tensile on the rope is examined. Tasks 1. 2.

With constant tensile stress, the frequency f, which depends on the wavelength λ of the wave that propagates itself along the rope. The frequency is plotted as a function of 1/λ. From this graph, the phase velocity c is determined. The phase velocity c of the rope waves, which depends on the tensile stress on the rope is to be measured. The quadrant of the phase velocity is plotted as a function of tensile stress.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Phase velocity Group velocity Wave equation Harmonic wave

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 61

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Uniform linear motion with the 2-1 timer

Free fall

Principle Motion implies that a body changes its position in space. In order to change location, the body needs a certain amount of time. A position is determined in terms of distances and lengths. Measure the time that a carriage needs to move along a certain length of track when moving uniformly. Measure the distance and time again when the carriage is moving faster. Draw a graph depicting the laws that apply. The speed is thus measured by determining the two quantities, distance and time, which are the two factors that combine to describe a motion. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Mechanics, DVD 01051-00 TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Mechanik 6 01159-11 German P1003505

Principle Determine the laws relating distance and time as well as speed and time in the case of free fall by using a time plotter. A marker strip is attached to a falling body. As it falls the body pulls the strip past the time plotter with virtually no friction. The plotter then marks times on the strip. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Mechanics, DVD 01051-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Mechanik 6, mit dem Zeitmarkengeber 01159-01 German TESS Physics manual Mechanics 6 01159-02 English TESS Physique manual Mechanique 6 01159-03 French TESS advanced FĂsica manual MecĂĄnica 6 01159-04 Spanish P1004100

excellence in science 62

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Free fall with the 2-1 timer

release mechanism between a pin and a plunger, thereby closing an electrical circuit. When the sphere is released by means of a cable trigger, the electrical contact is interrupted and that starts the electronic counter. The sphere falls onto the receiving tray of the receiver switch, which then stops the counter. Bodies of different mass and surface area fall through air-filled space at different speeds, whereas they fall at the same speed if the air resistance and the buoyancy in air is negligible (free fall). Literature for this experiment as follows: Ver.-Einheit Lineare Bewegungen 16001-01 German Demo advanced Physics Manual Linear Motion (LMT) 16001-02 English P1199000

Principle

Uniformly accelerated linear motion

Determine the laws relating distance and time as well as speed and time in the case of free fall by using a 2-1 timer. A ball is connected to a stand by means of a ball release clamp. As soon as the clamp is opened, the timer is started and the ball starts falling. When it passes a light barrier, the timer is stopped again. This allows the acceleration due to gravity g to be determined impressively accurately from the measured time and the distance between the clamp and the light barrier. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Mechanics, DVD 01051-00 TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Mechanik 6 01159-11 German P1004105

Principle A measurement carriage is uniformly accelerated by a falling mass. The experiment shows the relationships between the following: - Distance travelled and the elapsed time - Instantaneous velocity attained by the carriage after a certain time.

Free fall

Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 2 01153-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 2 01153-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W盲rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1296100

Principle For determining the gravitational acceleration of the Earth (g) using the familiar distance-time relationship for accelerated movement with a falling sphere apparatus. A steel sphere is held in the

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 63

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Horizontal and oblique projectile motion

▪ ▪ ▪

Easy data transfer of all measured values to MS Excel®, PHYWE measure, and other applications Video processing inclusive of cutting, compression, etc. Software-guided modeling for didactical transfers (including homework)

Possible Classroom Applications ▪ ▪

Principle No demonstration method shows horizontal and inclined projectile motions better than a continuous water jet. The overflow vessel contains about 1 litre of water and gives those doing the experiment enough time to discuss all of the aspects of projectile motion while carrying the experiment out.

Demonstration experiments in the classroom, for example, all types of one-dimensional and two-dimensional movements "Field studies", for example, display of motion sequences in shot-putting, basket-shooting in basketball, trampoline jumping, high-jump, and much more.

Software "Measure Dynamics", single user license 14440-61 Software "Measure Dynamics", school licence 14440-62 Measure Dynamics complete set: Maxwell wheel 02425-88

Demonstration Track complete bundle

It is particularly impressive if the angle of the projectile motion is varied slowly while the water is flowing. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 2 01153-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 2 01153-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Function and Applications

P1296200

Complete set includes all necessary articles for performance of experiments regarding motion including time measurement with timer 4-4.

Software "Measure Dynamics"

Equipment and technical data The set includes the following items: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Demonstration dynamics and motion track Aluminium track for demonstration experiments with scale, levelling with adjustable feet, with quicklock system for accessories. Usable on small desks due to free positioning of feet. Carts for track (2) weights for carts (2) diaphragms for cart (2) starter system-timer 4-4-fork light barrier (4) with holders-accessories, connecting cables, etc.

11305-88 Function and Applications Automatic video analysis of movements. The new measurement software "Measure Dynamics" provides an inexpensive way to analyse movements and displays them as diagrams. All you need is a digital video camera, whereby modern webcams, camcorders or common digital cameras with film mode function are completely sufficient. The school licence permits the installation of the software on every PC at school and on all personal PCs of students and teachers.

Timer 2-1

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Automatic object recognition and tracing, including several filmed objects simultaneously, e.g. coupled pendulum Dialogue-supported creation of trajectories as well as movement, velocity and acceleration diagrams Stroboscopic effect for motion sequences (visualization of the entire path of movement)

excellence in science 64

Function and Applications

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

The chronometer Timer 2-1 has a 4-digit digital display and has been specially designed for use in student experiments and demonstrative teacher experiments. Benefits ▪ ▪

The starting and stopping of the built-in timer piece, as well as counting, is effected by the opening and closing of electrical circuits, across light barriers or other TTL signal sources. Many and various experimental requirements can be fullfilled with the 4 different operating modes that the Timer 2-1 makes available for track experiments, for the measurement of the time, of revolution, of a turning movement, for the direct measurement of the period of a full swing, of a mechanical pendulum and for the counting of events

Timer 4-4 with USB-interface 13604-99 Software Timer 4-4 14413-61 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration, ± 2 g, ± 6 g 12650-00

Universal Counter

Equipment and technical data (typical for 25°C) ▪ ▪

Operating temperature range: 5...40°C Relative humidity: < 80%

▪

Control: (Start/ Stop) by electrical circuits (contact closure/ contact opening or level ACC to TTL-Norm) Digital display: 4-Digit LED display, digit height 19 mm Time measurement: Measuring range 0.000...9.999 s resolution 1 ms Pulse counting: Measurement range 0...9999 pulses Limiting frequency 1 kHz, shading period > 500 µs Operating voltage: (Stabilized) 5 V ± 5 %, (suitable power supply 5 VDC/ 2.4 A, 13900-99, standardly supplied) Power consumption: 1.8 VA Supply connector: connecting socket for hollow plug, diam. 2.1 mm at the back of the instrument, 5 VDC/ 350 mA Overvoltage and reverse polarity protection: up to max. 12 V Housing dimensions (mm): 190 × 130 × 140 (W, H, D) Weight: approx. 920 g

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13607-99

Function and Applications The universal counter is used for measuring time, frequency, pulse rates, pulse counting, periodic times, speeds and velocities. Benefits ▪

▪ ▪

Timer 4-4 with USB-interface

▪

▪ ▪

The device has all the qualities that are expected of a modern universal counter and is also equipped with a number of technical specifics of how it specifically arise from the requirements of science teaching practice. For the scientifically correct representation of each measurement is shown in principle with the associated unit. With the overflow of the display is automatically switched into the next area. Before the measurement starts it can be manually adjusted to a maximum of 6 decades defined range, eg to suppress is not physically meaningful digits on the display. A special jack for direct connection of a GM counter tube is available for radioactivity experiments. The required voltage can be changed manually to determine the characteristics of a counter tubes to. The stopwatch function can be entered by means of electrical contacts, sensors, or manually in the various types of triggers for the precise starting and stopping for time measurement. The measured values are represented by six red 20mm highcontrast 7-segment displays. An additional three-digit display is used to display the unit (ms, s, Hz, kHz, MHz, I / s, RPM, Imp, V, m / s). The various operating states are indicated by LEDs. Range switching in all modes manually (before measurement) and automatically when an overflow.

Equipment and technical data

Multiple time measuring instrument for avariety of applications in practicals and teaching. The timer unit has four 4digit displays. The starting and stopping of the four built-in independent timers is actuated by the opening or closing of electrical circuits, by means of light barriers or other TTL signal sources (e.g. amicrophone).

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 65

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency measurement 0.00 Hz .. 9.99999 MHz, resolution 10 mHz Speed measurement 6. .. 99,999 RPM, 1 RPM resolution Pulse counting 0. .. 999,999 Imp Pulse rate measurement 0.0 ... 99,999.9 I / s Mains supply: Mains voltage 110 .. 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA Housing dimensions (W, H, D) 370 x 168 x 236 (mm) Mass of 2.9 kilograms

13601-99

Ballistic Unit

sten wire, No more optical lever jitters due to SDC-(Symmetric Differential CapacitiveControl) sensor technology, The Cavendish balance is essentially a torsion pendulum in which two 15 g ledballs on the end of a light weight aluminium "boom" is suspended in the centre by a 25 µm diameter adjustable length tungsten wire. , The typical oscillation period is 2-4 minutes. , The boom is mounted inside an aluminium draft proofcase that allows two approx. 1 kg leadballs as acting masses to be swivelled. , Additionally, the boom is suspended between the capacitor plates of the SDC-transducer, which is mounted in the aluminium case and connects to the Symmetric Differential Capacitive ControlUnit., The transducer output is proportional to the angular movement and has a resolution of <100 micro radians. , A bubble level affixed to the top aids in levelling the unit. , period of oscillation: approx. 4 s " Equipment and technical data The complete unit consists of , four lead balls, a built-in bubble level, a calibration pin,, the control unit with power supply, an approx. 1.70 m extra 25 µm tungsten wire , large lead spheres mass: approx. 1.0385kg, diameter 56 mm , small spheres mass:approx. 0.01456 kg, diameter: 13.4 mm, tungsten wire, diameter: 25 µm, Manual 02540-00

Gyroscope with 3 axes Function and Applications For demonstrating projectile motion and for quantitative investigation of the laws of projection, in particular for determining the range of a projectile as a function of the projectile angle and the initial velocity of the projectile. Equipment and techical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The catapult included in the extent of delivery can be used to: achieve reproducible projectile ranges up to 3 m (scatter of the projectile ranges approx. 1%) set a continuously variable projection angle between 0° and 90°to select three projection speeds use two balls with different masses but with the same diameter With catapult and fixed storage for two balls d = 19 mm (wooden ball with iron core and steel ball 02502.01), dimensions 60 cm×38 cm

Function and Applications Demonstration and practical set for working up the gyroscope laws. Benefits ▪

11229-10

Cavendish balance/computerized

▪ ▪

Gyroscope disc with double ball bearings, balanced and freely movable about 3 axes, which is wound up by hand with the aid of a thread. Mounted on a metal stand. Sliding counterweight for calibrating the gyro disc.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Disc diameter: 245 mm Disc thickness: 28 mm Disc weight: approx. 1317 g Counter weight: approx. 925 g

Gyroscope with 3 axes 02555-00 Additional gyro-disk w. c-weight 02556-00 Function and Applications For the demonstration of the mass attraction of two bodies and for the determination of the gravitational constant. Benefits Complete and compact system with control unit, only a recording system (e.g. aninterface-system ) or a multimeter is to be used to get 2% , Accurate results in a single lab period, Short oscillation periods of 2-4 minutes using a 25 µm diameter adjustable length tung-

excellence in science 66

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.2 Dynamics

Gyro, Magnus type

Function and Applications: Gyro, Magnus type, universal gyro for demonstration and quantitative evaluation of gyro laws and their application. Benefits: Rich accessories to demonstrate the following topics: ▪ ▪ ▪

Symmetrical and asymmetrical elonged and flattened gyro Force-free, driven and captive gyro Navigational gyro compass

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Steel gyro disc with reinforced edge suspended in gimbols with bolt bearings Variation of moments of inertia by supplementary steelweights Springs and clamps for restriction Disc diameter: 128 mm Storage box (mm): 355 x 380 x 385 Including manual of 124 pages.

Gyro,Magnus type, incl. Handb. 02550-00 The Gyroscope 01793-02

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 67

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Wave phenomena in a ripple tank

Principle In the ripple tank water waves are generated by a vibration generator. Circular waves are then used to investigate the dependency of the vibration frequency on the wavelength. With the aid of plane waves the dependency of the velocity of the waves' propagation on the depth of the water can be determined. Moreover, the reflection of waves as well as the refraction of waves at a plate, a prism, a concave lens and at a convex lens can be clearly demonstrated. It is shown, that water waves are a proved method to demonstrate the behaviour of waves in general. Tasks 1.

Use the single dipper to generate circular waves. By using a ruler the wave length can be determined. The measurement is made for different frequencies. The external wave generator is connected to the water ripple tank and circular waves are generated. By moving the external wave generator the Doppler Effect is investigated. Plane waves are generated with the integrated wave generator. By using two barriers show the reflection of waves. Use a plate to simulate a zone of lower water depth and measure the wave length before and above the plate. Observe the refraction of water waves at several objects (plate, prism, concave and convex lens).

2. 3. 4. 5.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Generation of surface waves Propagation of surface waves Dependency of wave velocity Reflection of waves Refraction of waves Concave, convex lenses, mirrors

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133400

Interference and diffraction of water waves with the ripple tank P2133500

excellence in science 68

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Density of liquids

Principle The density of water and glycerol is determined as a function of temperature using the Mohr balance. Tasks The density of water and glycerol is measured in 1 to 2° steps over a temperature range from 0 to 20°C, then in larger steps up to 50°C. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Hydrogen bond Water anomaly Volume expansion Melting Evaporation Mohr balance

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 69

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Surface of rotating liquids

Principle A vessel containing liquid is rotated about an axis. The liquid surface forms a paraboloid of rotation, the parameters of which will be determined as a function of the angular velocity. Tasks On the rotating liquid surface, the following are determined: 1. 2. 3.

the shape, the location of the lowest point as a function of the angular velocity, the curvature.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Angular velocity Centrifugal force Rotary motion Paraboloid of rotation Equilibrium

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140200

Viscosity of Newtonian and non-Newtonian liquids (rotary viscometer) P2140300

excellence in science 70

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Viscosity measurement with the falling ball viscometer

Principle Due to internal friction among their particles, liquids and gases have different viscosities. The viscosity, a function of the substance's structure and its temperature, can be experimentally determined, for example, by measuring the rate of fall of a ball in a tube filled with the liquid to be investigated. Tasks Measure the viscosity 1. 2. 3.

of methanol-water mixtures of various composition at a constant temperature, of water as a function of the temperature and of methanol as a function of temperature.

From the temperature dependence of the viscosity, calculate the energy barriers for the displace ability of water and methanol. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Liquid Newtonian liquid Stokes law Fluidity Dynamic and kinematic viscosity Viscosity measurements

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 71

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Surface tension with the ring method (Du Nouy method)

Principle The force is measured on a ring shortly before a liquid film tears using a torsion meter. The surface tension is calculated from the diameter of the ring and the tear-off force. Tasks 1. 2.

Determine the surface tension of olive oil as a function of temperature. Determine the surface tension of water/methanol mixtures as functions of the mixture ratio.

What you can learn about Surface energy, Interface, Surface tension, Adhesion, Critical point, Eรถtvรถs equation Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140500

excellence in science 72

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Surface tension with the pull-out method with Cobra3, complete set (interface version)

Principle The force exerted on a measuring ring shortly before the liquid film is torn away is determined with a force meter. The surface tension is calculated from the diameter of the ring and the tearing force. Tasks Determination of the surface tension of water and other liquids. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Surface energy Surface tension Surface adhesion Bounding surface

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140611

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 73

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Archimedes' principle (on the board)

Soil pressure measurement

Principle Hydrostatic pressure in a fluid depends only on the height and not on the shape of the container. Different containers can be placed on the Pascal's vase apparatus. In each case, the pressure on the bottom is transferred to a pointer. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W채rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Principle Solid bodies immersed in a liquid experience buoyancy. The force of buoyancy (or the updraught) can be easily calculated according to Archimedes' principle when the weight of the displaced fluid is determined. The "Archimedes' cylinder" clearly demonstrates this principle. Literature for this experiment as follows: Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 2 01153-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W채rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1424601

excellence in science 74

Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English P1423200

Mechanics,

Acoustics,

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

The Pelton wheel is connected to a water hose and driven by a jet of water. The wheel is connected to a generator by a drive belt and an incandescent lamp is connected to the generator.

Swimming, floating, sinking

In the experiment, observers can note that the output of the generator (i.e. how bright the lamp is lit) is higher when the flow rate of the jet of water striking the buckets of the turbine is greater. For quantitative measurements, the work and power meter (13715-93) can be inserted between the generator and the lamp. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English

Mechanics,

Acoustics,

P1431300

TESS Physics Sets Mechanics

Principle A Cartesian diver is immersed in an ungraduated cylinder filled with water and closed with a rubber stopper. Different forces of compression are applied to the rubber stopper by hand and the behaviour of the diver is observed. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English

Mechanics,

Acoustics,

P1424700

Generation of electricity with the Pelton wheel

Function and Applications The basic set ME1 enables the performance of 30 student experiments. The supplementary set ME2 (in connection with ME1) enables the performance of another 24 student experiments. Topics ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Physical quantities and characteristics (5 +2 exp.) Forces (10 + 7 exp.) Elementary machines (7 + 5 exp.) Liquids and gases (2 + 8 exp.) Oscillations (6 + 2 exp.)

TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME1 13271-88 TESS Physics Set Mechanics ME2 13272-88 TESS Physics manual Mechanics 1 to 5 01158-02

Principle Model of a hydroelectric power station

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 75

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.3 Mechanics of liquids

Ripple Tank with LED-light source

Function and Applications Just remove from the storage cupboard, fill with water and start! The Ripple tank provides a demonstration of the general properties of waves and wave propagation phenomena like reflection, dispersion, diffraction, interference, and Doppler-effect. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

very easy to operate compact unit for demonstration of wave characteristics such as reflection, dispersion, breakage, interference, diffraction and Doppler effect Reflection-free basin on adjustable feet 3-point adjustment Amplitude and frequency variable excitation dipper system Stroboscope for synchronous and "slow-motion" projection of waves Simultaneous LED display of: frequency, amplitude, phase shift and type of illumination Control of all parameters takes place via the keypad found on the surface Projection on transparent worktable for distortion-free image of the wave pattern A simple display of the wave pattern is easily possible by placement of a sheet of paper The evaluation on this sheet is directly and comfortably possible

Accessories and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Complete set for experiments with the ripple tank Incl. excitation dippers: single, double and plane wave dippers, exciter system with up to 12 dabbers Incl. acrylic glass bodies: Single and double slit, concave and convex lenses, prism/coplanar plate Incl. water tray, drawing table and power supply Projection screen: highly transparent plexiglass Projection area (mm): 300 x 200 Basin dimensions (mm): 300 × 350 Stroboscope LED: intensity of illumination 160 Lumen Wave length 530 nm (+/- 20 nm) Power input: 5 W

Accessories (optional) ▪ ▪ ▪

External vibration generator 11260-10 Demonstration set w. webcam for ripple tank 11260-20 Demonstration mirror 11260-30

Ripple Tank with LED-light source, complete 11260-99 External vibration generator for ripple tank incl. stand 11260-10 Demo set for ripple tank (USB camera, fixing unit) 11260-20 Web-Cam CCD USB VGA PC Philips 88040-01

excellence in science 76

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.4 Mechanics of gases

Barometric height formula

Principle Glass or steel balls are accelerated by means of a vibrating plate, and thereby attain different velocities (temperature model). The particle density of the balls is measured as a function of the height and the vibrational frequency of the plate. Tasks Measurement of the particle density as a function of: 1. 2.

the height, at fixed frequency the vibrational frequency of the exciting plate, at fixed height

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Kinetic gas theory Pressure Equation of state Temperature Gas constant

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2140700

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 77

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.4 Mechanics of gases

Boyle-Mariotte law

Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English

Mechanics,

Acoustics,

P1420700

Set Gas laws with glass jacket system and Cobra4 Principle The general gas equation describes the relationship between pressure, volume and temperature of an enclosed gas volume. A gas syringe is used for measuring the relationship between the volume and the pressure, which is sealed with the help of motor oil. In addition to this, the gas syringe is also tempered with the help of a water bath. This waterbath helps to avoid the temperature fluctuations during compression and expansion and also enables one to record isotherms at different temperatures. Volume, (number of the measurement value), pressure and temperature are recorded as points upon a key press. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra3 (C3PT) 01310-01 German

Function and Applications

Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 English

Complete device compilation for a comfortable way to derive the ideal gas laws experimentally with help of the Cobra4 Senor-Unit Thermodynamics and the glass jacket system.

Demo advanced Chemie / Biologie Handbuch Cobra3 (C3BT) 01320-01 German

Equipment and technical data

Demo advanced Chemistry / Biology Manual Cobra3 (C3BT) 01320-02 English P1350200

Density determination of air

The set consists of: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1 Cobra4 Wireless Manager. 1 Cobra4 Wireless-Link. 1 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics, pressure absolute 2 bar and 2 x temperature. 1 Software measure Cobra4, single user and school licence. 1 Glass jacket. 1 Gas syringe 100 ml. 1 Heater for Glass jacket. 1 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, -50...1000°C. All necessary support materials and all the other small hardware items to be able to carry out the measurements for the gas laws.

43020-00

excellence in science 78

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.4 Mechanics of gases

Set gas laws with glass jacket, 230 V

Function and Applications With this set, experiments on the following topics can be carried out: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Gas law of Boyle-Mariotte Gas law of Gay-Lussac Gas law of Amonton (Charles) Determination of molar masses according to the vapor density method

Benefits This set allows to execute the measurements in a didactical clear and easy understandable way: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

clear set-up easy to understand completely mercury-free quickly to execute short preparation time

Equipment and technical data It will be delivered complete with tripod material and all necessary small hardware items: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Glass jacket Gas syringe Heater Tripod material Small hardware items CD with literature

Not included are measuring instruments as thermometers or manometers. Accessories Data acquisition set with Cobra3 Basic unit for recording the measured data by means of a PC. 43003-88

Cobra3 Data acquisition set for set gas laws 43003-30 Measuring module, pressure 12103-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 79

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Reversible pendulum

Measurement of the period for different axes of rotation. Determination of terrestrial gravitational acceleration g.

excellence in science 80

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Coupled pendula with Cobra3, complete set (interface version)

Principle Two equal gravity pendula with a particular characteristic frequency are coupled by a "soft" spiral spring. The amplitudes of both pendula are recorded as a function of time for various vibrational modes and different coupling factors using a y/t recorder. The coupling factors are determined by different methods. Tasks 1. To determine the spring constant ofthe coupling spring. 2. To determine and to adjust the characteristic frequencies of the uncoupled pendula. 3. To determine the coupling factors for various coupling-lengths using a) the apparatus constant, b) the angular frequencies for "inphase"and "in opposite phase" vibration, c) the angular frequencies of the beatmode. 4. To check the linear relation between the square of the coupling lengths and a) the particular frequencies of the beat mode, b) the square of the frequency for "inopposite phase" vibration. 5. To determine the pendulum's characteristic frequency from the vibrational modes with coupling and to compare this with the characteristic frequency of the uncoupled pendula. What you can learn about Spiral spring, Gravity pendulum, Spring constant, Torsional vibration, Torque, Beat, Angular velocity, Angular acceleration, Characteristic frequency Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2132511

Coupled pendula P2132501

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 81

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Forced oscillations - Pohl's pendulum

excellence in science 82

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Phase velocity of rope waves/ waves of wires

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Phase velocity Group velocity Wave equation Harmonic wave

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 83

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Wave phenomena in a ripple tank

What you can learn about Generation of surface waves, Propagation of surface waves, Dependency of wave velocity, Reflection of waves, Refraction of waves, Concave, convex lenses, mirrors Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133400

excellence in science 84

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Interference and diffraction of water waves with the ripple tank

Principle A set of circular water waves is generated simultaneously and the resulting interference is observed. By increasing the number of interfering circular waves, Huygens' Principle can be verified. With the aid of plane water waves, diffraction phenomena of waves at different obstacles (slit, edge, double-slit etc.) are investigated. In a further experiment, the principle of "phased array antennas" can be demonstrated. To do so, two circular waves are generated to interfere and the resulting interference pattern on varying the phase of one of the circular waves with respect to the other one is observed. Tasks 1. Use the comb to generate two circular waves and observe the resulting interference. Increase the number of interfering circular waves up to ten by using all teeth of the comb to demonstrate Huygens' Principle. 2. Generate plane water waves and use a barrier to demonstrate diffraction at an edge. Then, form a slit and observe diffraction behind the slit. Repeat this experiment for a double-slit. 3. By using the integrated wave generator as well as the external wave generator, generate two circular waves and observe the interference. Vary the phase of the external wave generator and observe the resulting interference pattern to understand the principle of "phased array antennas". Related topics Diffraction of water waves, interference of waves, Huygens' Principle, principle of "phased arrays antennas". Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2133500

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 85

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Restoring force on a displaced pendulum

Principle The acceleration of gravity g is determined from the oscillation period fordifferent pendulum lengths. If the pendulum's oscillation plane is not parallel to the earth's field of gravity,only one component of the gravitationalforce acts on the movement of the pendulum. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra3 (C3PT) 01310-01 German Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 English P1337700

Acceleration of a spring pendulum with an acceleration sensor

Principle When a pendulum bob suspended on a string is displaced and released, it seeks its equilibrium position and starts to swing. In the experiment depicted here, the torsion dynamometer holds the bob at its maximum displacement. The value of the force displayed directly corresponds to the restoring force of the pendulum. The experiment can be used to determine whether that force is dependent on the displacement of the pendulum. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 1 01152-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 1 01152-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W채rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1252700

Pendulum oscillations - variable g pendulum

Principle The oscillation of a spring pendulum isrecorded by an acceleration sensor. Forthis, essentially only the sensor, aspring and a rubber ring are required,no further equipment is necessary. Theprinciple of harmonic oscillation can beso qualitatively explained in a verysimple way. From the measured values,the characteristic frequency and thespring constant can be determined, orthe amplitude behaviour of forcedoscillations be observed. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsph채nomene 01330-01 German TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English P1500560

excellence in science 86

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.5 Oscillations and waves

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration , ± 2 g, ± 6 g

Function and Applications: Depending on application type, theCobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration, ± 2g, ± 6 g can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Benefits: ▪ ▪

Specifically with this sensor, the use of Cobra4 Wireless enables completely new experimentation possibilities. As such, it is possible to investigate e.g.the acceleration of the sensor in freefall or the acceleration of a schoolchild on a bicycle etc.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring ranges: -2g...+2g or -6g...+6g Resolution: 1 mg or 5 mg Presentable channels: x, y and z Max. data rate: 160 Hz per channel Weight: 80 g

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration, ± 2 g, ± 6 g 12650-00 Cobra4 Wireless Manager 12600-00 Cobra4 Wireless-Link 12601-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 87

2.1 Mechanics 2.1.6 Mechanics on the adhesive table

Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 2 01153-02 English

Fixed pulley

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1296400

Demo Physics mechanics 1w/o board

Principle When raising a weight with a fixed pulley, does the pulley affect the amount of force that has to be applied? Using materials such as rulers, arrows and labels, the magnetic demonstration board can be used to clearly examine this question in detail. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 1 01152-01 German Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 1 01152-02 English P1253800

Function and Applications Demo Physics mechanics 1 for performance of 31 demonstration experiments in the subjects: forces, simple machines, oscillation. Equipment and technical data magnetic components as:

Energy conversion of a roller coaster

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

clamp rod hook axles scale pointers torsion dynamometers optical disc

and the following components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Principle One of the truly exceptional features of the PHYWE magnetic demonstration board for mechanics is the flexible track with which it can be equipped to create track shapes that were previously totally unconventional. The experiment depicted here shows a "roller coaster" which demonstrates the conversion of potential energy into kinetic energy and back. Moreover, the flexible track can also be adapted to entirely different shapes. The outer edge of the track has a continuous rim which keeps measurement carriages and balls on the track while they are in motion. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers. Haftmechanik, 2 01153-01 German

excellence in science 88

helical springs leaf spring weight holders and weights movable pulleys rod-block and tackle with 4 pulleys friction block-gear wheel centre of gravity plate Lever-roller for inclined plane fish line and rubber bands Incl. storage box with foam and cover

Demo Physics mechanics 1w/o board and literature 02150-55 Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00 Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 1 01152-02 Mech. set, magn-held, basic set 02150-77 Mech. set, magn.-held components 02150-66 Mech.set II, magn.-held component 02160-88 Physics, Manual Magnet Board Mechanics, 2 01153-02

2 Physics 2.2 Acoustics

Acoustics 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4

Ultrasound Mechanical sound sources Electrical sound sources Propagation of sound

90 110 111 112

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 89

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Optical determination of the velocity of sound in liquids

Principle A stationary ultrasonic wave in a glass cell full of liquid is traversed by a divergent beam of light. The sound wave length can be determined from the central projection of the sound field on the basis of the refractive index which changes with the sound pressure. Tasks To determine the wavelength of sound in liquids, and from this calculate the sound velocity, from the structure of the centrally projected image. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ultrasonics Sound velocity Frequency Wavelength Sound pressure Stationary waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151000

excellence in science 90

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Phase and group velocity of ultrasound in liquids

Principle The sound waves transmitted to a liquid by the ultrasonic generator are picked up by a piezoelectric ultrasonic pick-up and the signal from transmitter and receiver compared on an oscilloscope. The wavelength is determined and the phase velocity calculated from the relative phase position of the signals. The group velocity is determined from measurements of the sound pulse delay time. Tasks The signals from the ultrasonic generator and the ultrasonic pick-up are recorded on the oscilloscope. 1. 2. 3.

To measure the relative phase position of the signal from the ultrasonic pick-up as a function of its distance from the ultrasonic generator (which is in the sine mode), and to determine the ultrasonic wavelength and the phase velocity when the frequency is known. To determine the oscilloscope's coefficient of sweep with the aid of the ultrasonic frequency. With the generator in the pulsed mode, to record the delay time of the sound pulses as a function of the distance between a generator and the pick-up, and to determine the group velocity.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Velocity of sound in liquids Wavelength Frequency Piezoelectric effect Piezoelectric ultrasonics transformer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 91

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Temperature dependence of the velocity of ultrasound in liquids

Principle Sound waves are radiated into a liquid by an ultrasonic transmitter and detected with a piezoelectric transducer. The wavelength of the sound is found by comparing the phase of the detector signal for different sound paths and, when the frequency is known, the velocity of sound as a function of the temperature of the liquid is determined. Tasks The wavelength is found from the phase position of the sound pickup signal relative to the generator signal as a function of the sound path and the velocity of the sound is determined when the ultrasonic frequency is known. The measurement is made for water and glycerol as the temperatures of the liquids are changed step-by-step. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Frequency Velocity of sound in liquids Compressibility Density Ultrasonics Piezoelectric effect Piezoelectric ultrasonic transducer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151200

excellence in science 92

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Stationary ultrasonic waves - determination of wavelength

Principle An ultrasonic wave is subjected to hard surface reflection from a metal plate.The reflected wave superimposes on the incident wave, coincident in phase and amplitude, to form a standing wave. The intensity of this wave along the direction of propagation is measured using amovable ultrasonic receiver. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determine the intensity of a standing ultrasonic wave by moving an ultrasonic receiver along the direction of propagation. Plot a graph of the measured values against the distance. Determine the wavelength of the ultrasonic wave.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Superposition of waves Reflection of longitudinal waves Stationary longitudinal waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 93

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Absorption of ultrasound in air

Principle Sound needs a material medium with which it can enter into reciprocal action for its propagation, whereby a loss of energy occurs. The amplitude, and so also the intensity, decreases along the propagation path. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Move an ultrasonic receiver along the direction of propagation of a sound wave to measure the sound intensity as a function of the distance from the source of the sound. Plot linear and logarithmic graphs of the values for amplitude against the distance. Confirm the law of absorption and determine the absorption coefficient.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Propagation of sound waves Absorption coefficient of ultrasonic waves Law of absorption

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151400

excellence in science 94

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic diffraction at different single and double slit systems

Principle A plane ultrasonic wave is subjected to diffraction at single slits of various widths and at various double slits. The intensity of the diffracted and interfering partial waves are automatically recorded using a motordriven, swivel ultrasound detector and a PC. Tasks 1. 2.

Record the intensity of an ultrasonicwave diffracted by various single slits and double slits as a function of the diffraction angle. Determine the angular positions of the maximum and minimum values and compare them with the theoretical values.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Longitudinal waves Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151515

Ultrasonic diffraction at different multiple slit systems P2151615

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 95

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Diffraction of ultrasonic waves at a pin hole and a circular obstacle

Principle A plane ultrasonic wave is subjected to diffraction by a pin-hole obstacle and a complementary circular obstacle. The intensity distribution of the diffracted and interfering partial waves are automatically recorded using a motor-driven, swivel detector and a PC. Tasks 1. 2.

Determine the angular distribution of an ultrasonic wave diffracted by a pinhole and circular obstacle. Compare the angular positions of the minimum intensities with the theoretical values.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Longitudinal waves Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Fresnel's zone construction Poisson's spot Babinet's theorem Bessel function

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151715

excellence in science 96

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic diffraction at a Fresnel zone plate / structure of a Fresnel zone

Principle A plane ultrasonic wave strikes a Fresnel zone plate. The sound intensity is determined as a function of the distance, using an ultrasonic detector that can be moved in the direction of the zone plate axis. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determine and plot a graph of the intensity of the ultrasound behind Fresnel zone plates as a function of the distance from the plate. Carry out the same measurement series without plates. Determine the focal points of the zone plates and compare the values found with those theoretically expected.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Longitudinal waves Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Fresnel's zone construction Zone plates

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151800

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 97

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Interference by two identical ultrasonic transmitters

Principle Ultrasonic waves of the same frequency, amplitude and direction of propagation are generated by two sources of sound positioned parallel to each other. The sources can vibrate both in-phase and out-of phase. The angular distribution of the intensity of the waves, which interfere with each other, is automatically recorded using a motor-driven, swivel ultrasound detector and a PC. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determine the angular distribution of two sources of ultrasound vibrating in phase. Determine the angular positions of the interference minima and compare the values found with those theoretically expected. Repeat the measurements with the two sources of ultrasound vibrating out of-phase.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Longitudinal waves Interference

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151915

excellence in science 98

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Interference of ultrasonic waves by a Lloyd mirror

Principle A partial packet of radiation passes directly from a fixed ultrasonic transmitter to a fixed ultrasonic receiver. A further partial packet hits against a metal screen that is positioned parallel to the connecting line between the transmitter and receiver, and is reflected in the direction of the receiver. The two packets of radiation interfere with each other at the receiver. When the reflector is moved parallel to itself, the difference in the path lengths of the two packets changes. According to this difference, either constructive or destructive interference occurs. Tasks The sliding device is to be used to move the reflector screen positioned parallel to the connecting line between the transmitter and receiver parallel to itself in steps of d = (0.5 -1) mm. The reflector voltage U is to be recorded at each step. The d values of the various maxima and minima are to be determined from the U = U(d) graph and compared with the theoretically expected values. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Superposition of waves Reflection of longitudinal waves Interference

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2152000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 99

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Determination of the ultrasonic velocity (sonar principle)

Principle An ultrasonic transmitter emits sound pulses onto a reflector, from which recording of them by a receiver shows a time delay. The velocity of sound is calculated from the path length and transmission time of the sound pulses. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determine transmission times for different distances apart of the transmitter and the receiver. Plot a graph of the path lengths of the sound pulses against their transmission time. Determine the velocity of sound from the graph.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Sound pressure Phase- and group velocity Sonar principle

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2152115

excellence in science 100

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic diffraction by a straight edge

Principle An ultrasonic wave hits a straight edge which limits the wave field to one side. According to Huygens' principle, the edge is a point source for secondary waves, and these penetrate also into the shaded area of the edge. In the permeable area, secondary waves interfere with the primary waves, so that a succession of maxima and minima of the alternating sound pressure are created transverse to the edge. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determine the intensity distribution of an ultrasonic wave diffracted at a straight edge as a function of the transverse distance from the edge. Compare the positions of the maxima and minima found in the experiment to those theoretically expected. Repeat the measurement of the intensity distribution of the ultrasonic wave without the straight edge.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Superposition of waves Huygens' principle Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Fresnel zones Fresnel integrals Cornu's spiral

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2152300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 101

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic Doppler effect

Principle If a source of sound is in motion relative to its medium of propagation, the frequency of the waves that are emitted is displaced due to the Doppler effect. Tasks 1.

The frequency changes are measured and analysed for different relative velocities of source and observer.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Propagation of sound waves Superimposition of sound waves Doppler shift of frequency Longitudinal waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2152415

excellence in science 102

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Velocity of ultrasound in solid state material

Principle The velocity of sound in acrylics shall be determined by time of flight reflection technique with an ultrasonic echoscope. The measurements are done, by reflection method, on three cylinders of different length. Two measurement series are carried out with ultrasonic probes of different frequencies. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measure the length of the three cylinders with the calliper. Determine the time of flight of the ultrasonic reflection pulses for the three cylinders and the two ultrasonic probes. Calculate the sound velocities, probe delays and use the two mean values obtained to calculate the cylinder length.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Sound velocity Propagation of ultrasonic waves Time of flight Ultrasonic echography Thickness measurement Probe delay

Literature for this experiment as follows: Laboratory Experiments Physics, Chemistry, Biology andApplied Sciences, CD-ROM, incl. operating manuals 16502-42 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P5160100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 103

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic Time Motion Mode

Principle Using a simple heart model, the wall motion is recorded with the ultrasonic time motion method (M-mode or also TM-mode). The heart rate and the cardiac output (CO) are determined from the recorded TM-mode curve. Tasks 1. Simulate with heart model, the cardiac wall motion and record a time motion-image 2. On basis of the time-motion image, determine the cardiac output and heart rate parameters. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Pulse duration (DT) Heart rate End systolic diameter ESD End systolic volume ESV Cardiac output (CO) Heart wall motion Echocardiography Time-Motion-Mode Representation of motion sequences Ultrasonic echography

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P5950200

excellence in science 104

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Doppler sonography

Principle This set-up shows how blood flow studies are performed using Doppler ultrasound (Doppler sonograph). On a realistic arm dummy, the differences between continuous (venous) and pulsating (arterial) flow are shown as well as the difference in flow through a normal blood vessel and a stenosis. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Analyse blood flow and search positive and negative flow components. Explain the differences Locate the built-in stenosis and compare the spectral distribution upstream and downstream of the stenosis Examine and compare the three pulse modes of the pump.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Venous Flow Arterial flow Stenosis Blood flow velocity tracings Frequency shift Doppler effect Doppler angle Doppler sonography Colour Doppler Continuity equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P5950100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 105

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic wave phenomena, Basic-Set

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications

Frequency (quartzstabilised):40 kHz Range: 39...41 kHz Step width: 300 Hz Transmitter output: 2 x DIN-socket and 1 synchronised BNC-socket Phase shift: 0° or 180° Receiver input: BNC-socket Receiver output: AC-signal BNC XY-recorder (± 10 V) 4 mm-sockets Supply: 100...260 V AC/5 V AC Frequency: 50...60 Hz

Dimensions H × W × D (mm):138 × 205 × 160 Mass: 980 g

For analysis of basic properties of waves with ultrasound Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Didactic set-up by central positioning of the pattern of diffraction on the goniometer and movement of detector through diffracted field. Measurements can be performed classical or via integrated interface. Excellent reproducibility for demonstration or in practica.

Subjects ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diffraction at a pin hole and a circular obstacle Diffraction at single and double slit system with various widths Diffraction at multiple slit system Interference of two ultrasonic transmitters

Ultra-Sound Operation Unit, complete 13900-77 Ultrasound operation unit 13900-00 Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A withDC-socket 2.1 mm 13900-99 Software Goniometer 14523-61

Goniometer Operation Unit

Ultrasonic wave phenomena, Basic-Set 13903-88 Ultrasonic wave phenomena, Extension Set 13903-77 TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32

Ultra-Sound Operation unit Function and Applications Microprocessor controlled operation unit for goniometer in failsafe housing to control the goniometer angle and recording of detector signals, with RS232 PC interface. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Microprocessor controlled quartzstabilised operation unit for ultrasonic transmitter and receiver. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Adjustable output amplitude, 2 DIN sockets, one with 180° phaseshift, continuous and burst mode operation. 1 synchronous BNC output for delay time measurement. Input signal amplifier with 3 main amplifications and fine adjustment with one BNC-socket for oscilloscope and 4 mm sockets for XY-recorder. Overload warning LED allows adaption of ultrasound intensity to the experiment. Ideally suited for ultrasound experiments with large distances between transmitter and receiver, e.g. Doppler-effect with ultrasound. Fail-safe housing.

excellence in science 106

▪ ▪ ▪

For manual, programmable and PC-operation. Red 7-segment LED to display goniometer angle, start/stop angle, angle velocity and angle stepwidth. Two up/down buttons, auto modestart button, quick-calbration button, step motor interface DIN socket, cable included. BNC-socket for input signal. 4 mm sockets for xy-recorder connection. Reproduction of measurements just by pressing one button.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Detector input signal: 0...4 V Recorder output: ± 0...10 V Data transfer rate: 15200 baud Power: 100...260 V AC/5 V DC50...60 Hz Dimensions ÄmmÜ: 210 x 160 x 135 Weight: 1.82 kg

13903-99

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Ultrasonic generator

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The supplied software enables an extensive signal processing (RFsignal, amplitude signal, B-scan, M-mode, spectral analysis). The ultrasonic probes are connected by robust snap-in plugs. The probe frequency is recognised automatically by the measuring device. By adjusting the power transmission and gain the ultrasonic signal can be tuned to nearly every arbitrary object of investigation. The loss of intensity of the ultrasonic signal from deeper layers of investigation is balanced by a time-dependent amplification (TGC time-gain control). Threshold, start and end point or slope can be chosen freely. Important signals (trigger, TGC , RF signal and amplitude signal) are available at BNC outlets.

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications Ultrasonic generator for sine- and pulse operation for experimentation with wave phenomena and run time measurements, for exemplatory technical applications e.g. ultrasonic welding. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

With 3-digit LED for frequency and adjustable frequency for optimisation experiments and exactly determination of wave length under different experimental conditions. Monitor- and trigger-outputs with BNC sockets for phase determination with an oscilloscope. Robust plastic housing Including: sealed sound head Frequency range (Sinus): 780...820 kHz Maximum sound output power: 16 W Puls repetition frequency: 500 Hz Puls duration: 3 µs Supply voltage: 110...240 V AC Dimensions, H × W × D (mm): 170 × 232 × 260 Mass: 3.67 kg

13920-99

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ultrasonic echoscope Ultrasonic probe 1 MHz Ultrasonic probe 2 MHz Ultrasonic test block Ultrasonic cylinder set Ultrasonic test plates Ultrasonic gel Size: 220 x 300 x 400 mm Frequency: 1 - 5 MHz PC connection: USB Measuring operations: reflection and transmission Transmitter signal: 10 - 300 V Transmitter power: 0 - 30 dB Gain: 0 - 35 dB TGC: 0 - 30 dB, threshold, slope, width Outlets: trigger, TGC, RF, LF Main voltage: 115.230 V, 50.60 Hz Power of electricity: 20 VA

13921-99

Basic set: Ultrasonic Doppler technique

Basic Set Ultrasonic echoscope

Function and Applications

With the ultrasonic echoscope the basics of ultrasound and its wave characteristics can be demonstrated. Terms like amplitude, frequency, sound velocity or Time Gain Control TGC will be explained. The cylinder set can be used to vividly demonstrate reflection as well as sound velocity and frequency depending on attenuation in solid state materials. The knowledge e.g. regarding sound velocity will be used to measure the test block. The principles of image formation from A-scan to B-scan can be explained. With the different probes the frequency depending resolution can be evaluated.

Kit containing instrument and accessories for general ultrasonic sonography experiences. The software displays the measured data from the ultrasonic doppler apparatus, basic instrument of this kit, in realtime on the computer screen. Modular and extendable with accessory kits for experimentations in the fields of hydraulics and medical diagnostics.

Benefits ▪

The Ultrasonic echoscope is a highly sensitive ultrasonic measuring device designed to connect to a personal computer or simply to an oscilloscope

Benefits ▪

▪

This kit forms a very didactic experimentation system beginning from the basics of sonography and can with accessory kits be extended for the use in specific applications as hydraulics and medical diagnostics (only for training purposes!) an experimentation manual is included

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

1 x ultrasonic pulse Doppler apparatus 1 x centrifugal pump 1 x ultrasonic gel

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 107

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1 1 1 1

x x x x

liquid for sonography (1l) ultrasonic probe 2 MHz Doppler prisma 3/8 Set of flexible tubes

Ultrasonic pulse Doppler apparatus ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency: 2 MHz Amplification: 10 - 40 dB Visualisation: LED-bar, acoustical signal volume controlled PC connection: USB Dimensions: 256 x 185 x 160 mm Main voltage: 90-230 V, 50/ 60 Hz Power of electricity: 100 VA

▪ ▪ ▪

Flaw detection Angle beam inspection Time of flight diffraction (TOFD)

Particular suitable for NDT training Benefits Different NDT techniques can be demonstrated with the same equipment. No special unit for TOFD required Accessories ( required but not included) ▪ ▪

Basic Set Ultrasonic echoscope: 13921-99 Ultrasonic probe 2 MHz : 13921-05

13921-01

13923-99

Extension set: Shear waves

Extension Set: CT Scanner

Function and Applications Function and Applications When an ultrasonic wave hits a solid state material in a certain angle, shear waves will be generated with increasing angle. Shear waves have a sound velocity differing to that of longitudinal waves. With this experimental equipment the transition from longitudinal to shear waves can be measured angle-dependently. Benefits Basics of ultrasounds which can not been demonstrated with industrial equipment are shown in an very didactical manner Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x

Ultrasonic probe 1 MHz Shear wave set (incl. 2 probe holders) Aluminium sample for shear waves Hydrophone for sound field measurement Hydrophone plate Hydrophone holder Holder block

13921-03

Extension set: Non destructive testing

This set is an extension to the ultrasonic pulse echo methods, including automated imaging methods like CT and B mode. With this set the development of a CT image can be demonstrated step by step. Automated B-scan images can be made with this set as well. The scanned objects can be measured and evaluated in axial and lateral direction. The results of the automated measurements with scanner have a much better quality, especially with the imaging methods. Benefits For a rather low invest, compared to real life systems, the advantages of mechanical scanning can be demonstrated in a very comprehensible way. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1x 1x 1x 1x

CT scanner CT control unit with tomography software Water tank CT sample

CT Scanner ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Linear movement: ca. 400 mm, resolution <10 µm Maximal speed: 18 cm/min Rotation: 360°, resolution 0.225° Maximal speed: 1 rotation/s Size: 500 x 400 x 200 mm

CT Control unit ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Output: 3 x stepper motor control, bipolar, 5 V, max. 2 A, 6 x limit switches Interface PC: USB Size: 250 x 180 x 170 mm Main voltage: 90-230 V, 50/60 Hz Power of electricity: < 50 VA

13922-99

Function and Application Studies of Ultrasound techniques Used in NDT applications:

excellence in science 108

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.1 Ultrasound

Extension Set: Mechanics of flow

With this dummies real applications of ultrasonic diagnostics can be simulated in a very didactical manner. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

1 x simplified heart dummy for echocardiography 1 x breast dummy 1 x eye dummy

13921-04

Extension Set: medical Doppler Sonography

Function and Applications

Function and Applications With this set the Doppler effect as well as basic flow phenomena can be demonstrated. A flow circuit can be built up, containing various tube diameters and therefor with different flow velocities. With the Doppler prisms, the relationship between Doppler frequency shifts, the angle of incidence, the transmission frequency and flow velocity can be determined. Within the flow profile, laminar or turbulent flow can be measured. The stand pipes indicate the pressure measured at different points in the circuit. With data of pressure, tube diameter and flow velocity fundamental laws of laminar flow, like the Bernoulli equation and the Hagen-Poiseuille law, can be studied Benefits Due to the closed loop cycle, the experiment can be mounted in a normal class/ lab room, no water tap is required

A realistic arm model is used to simulate the application of the Doppler effect in medicine. With a Doppler sonography the influence of a stenosis on the flow profile can be investigated. A pump generates different flow types (continuous and pulsatile) and can simulate the human blood circulation. The measured Doppler signals can be presented acoustically as well as in a colour-coded Doppler spectrum, whereas the results and images are similar to measurements of those on patients. Benefits Due to the pump induced flow, different flow conditions can be simulated as well as some pathologies, which not be simulated with real patients. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

1x Arm dummy 1x Doppler probe 2 MHz

13923-02

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

1x Set prisms and pipes incl. tubes 1x Standpipe

13923-01

Extension set: medical ultrasonic diagnostics

Function and Applications Kit containing medical models for experimentations in the field of medical diagnostics (echo-cardiography, breast tumour diagnostics and ophthalmology (thickness measurements in the eye). Benefits

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 109

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.2 Mechanical sound sources

TESS advances Physics Set Acoustics

Analysis of sound

Principle Investigate the spectra of different musical instruments. Show that the acoustic spectrum can be influenced by thetype of excitation. Different musicalinstruments supply different spectra:even when the same note is played. Literature for this experiment as follows:

Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 English P1362100

Musical intervals

Principle The monochord can be used to link together knowledge of music and physics. In music, notes are named with letters. The intervals between the notes also have certain names. The monochord is a musical instrument and a "measurement instrument" at the same time. If the length of the string is changed, the string ratio can then be read off and matched to a note. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W채rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German Mechanics,

P1426500

excellence in science 110

For 20 experiments in acoustics. 13289-88

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra3 (C3PT) 01310-01 German

Demo advanced Physics Manual, Heat,Renewable Energy, Electrics, Optics 01500-02 English

Function and Applications

Acoustics,

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.3 Electrical sound sources

Digital Function Generator, USB

Sine wave generator, 10 Hz - 20 KHz

Function and Applications Digital signal generator for use as a programmable voltage source in practical or demonstration experiments, particularly in the disciplines of acoustics, electrical engineering and electronics Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Can be used as universal stand-alone device or controlled via a USB interface (with a software package available as of 2011) Universally applicable thanks to broad, continually adjustable frequency range Usable as programmable voltage source via amplifier output Intuitive, menu-driven operation using control knob and function buttons, with help capability Illuminated monochrome graphic display for maximum visibility and readability Simple setting of voltage and frequency ramps in stand-alone mode Features V = f(f) output for easy reading of frequency in the form of a voltage - ideal for measuring circuit response to frequency ramps using an oscilloscope Low distortion and signal-to-noise ratio for brilliantly clear signals - ideal for acoustics/audio experiments

Function and Applications For generation of sine wave signals for audiometry und acoustics. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Connection for head phone (jacksocket) and loud speaker (4 mm output sockets) 4-digit digital display Cut-off switch for the headphone

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

3 Frequency ranges: 10...200 Hz100...2000 Hz1...20 kHz Max. output voltage:0...6 V for 4 Ohm0...10 V for > 20 Ohm Output power: 1 W for 4 Ohm Distortion factor (typical):< 1% for 1 kHz Supply voltage:230 V AC/50...60 Hz

65960-93

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency range: 0.1Hz…1Mhz Steps: 0.1Hz Distortion factor: <0.5% Signal forms: Sine, triangle, square, frequency ramp, voltage ramp Amplifier output, short-circuit-proof, via BNC and 4-mm connectors: Output voltage : 0 … 20 Vpp for Rout > 40 Ω DC offset: ±10V (steps 5 mV) Power output: 5W (for up to 1A) where Rout = 20 Ω Headphone output via 3.5-mm jack socket: Switch for selecting standard headphones or speakers Output voltage: 0 … 1 Vpp for Rout = 400 Ω Sync (trigger) output via BNC: Output resistance: 50 Ω Logic level: CMOS (5V) V=f(f) output via BNC, short-circuit-proof: For outputting frequency in the form of a proportional voltage 0 ... 10V (0...1MHz) Sweep function for frequency ramp Monochrome graphic display with continuous setting for background illumination: 128 x 64 pixels USB 2.0 port Settings via buttons and knob or software-assisted via USB Power supply 100V~ - 240V~ at 50/60Hz Impact-resistant plastic case with carrying handle Dimensions (mm): 194 x 140 x 130

13654-99

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 111

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Vibration of strings

Principle A tensioned metal string is made to vibrate. The vibrations of the string are optically scanned, the vibration process observed on the oscilloscope and the dependence of the frequency on the string tension and string length and the density of the material are investigated. Tasks 1. 2.

To measure the frequency of a string (e.g. constantan, 0.4 mm dia.) as afunction of the tensioning force and the length of the string. To measure the frequency for various types and cross-sections of string, at a fixed tension and string length.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Natural vibration Mass-spring system Harmonic sound intervals

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150100

excellence in science 112

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Velocity of sound in air with Cobra3

Principle The speed of sound in air is determined by measurements of sound travel times. Tasks Determination of the velocity of sound in air. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Linear relationship between the propagation time of sound and its respective path Longitudinal waves Velocity of sound

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150311

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 113

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Acoustic Doppler effect with Cobra3

Principle If a source of sound is in motion relative to its medium of propagation, the frequency of the waves that are emitted is displaced due to the Doppler effect. Tasks The frequency changes are measured and analysed for different relative velocities of source and observer. What you can learn about â&#x2013;Ş â&#x2013;Ş

Propagation of sound waves Doppler shift of frequency

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150411

excellence in science 114

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Chladni figures with the FG module and Cobra3

Principle To show the two-dimensional standing waves on the surface of a square or circular plate. Tasks A frequency generator is connected to a sound head. The sound head drives a Chaldni plate. White sand is sprinkled randomly to cover the entire black surface of the plate. Drive the plate at a predetermined harmonic frequency and the sand will migrate into the nodal regions. A well defined standing wave pattern can be clearly seen in the first photo. The circular and square Chladni plates will create characteristic patterns. Adjust the oscillator slowly in the 0.2 to 2 kHz frequency range and watch for the pattern to emerge when a harmonic is tuned. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Stationary waves Natural vibrations Two-dimensional standing waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150515

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 115

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Chladni figures

Principle: Square and round metal plates are brought to vibrate through acoustic stimulations by a loudspeaker. When the driving frequency corresponds to a given eigen-frequency (natural vibration mode) of the plate, the nodal lines are made visible with sand. The sand is expelled from the vibrating regions of the plate and gathers in the lines because these are the only places where the amplitude of vibrations is close to zero. Tasks: 1.

Determine the frequencies at which resonance occurs and drive the plate specifically at these frequencies.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wave length Stationary waves Acoustic vibrations Two-dimensional standing waves Eigen-modes

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150501

excellence in science 116

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Velocity of sound using Kundt's tube

Principle A metal rod is made to vibrate longitudinally by rubbing it with a cloth. The gas column in a glass tube is caused to vibrate naturally as a result of resonance, through the radiation of sound from a disc attached to the end of the rod. The ratio of the velocities of sound in the gas and in the vibration generator is determined by measuring the wavelength. Tasks 1.

To measure the wavelength of stationary waves using a steel or a brass rod as the vibration generator. The longitudinal velocity of sound in the material of the vibration generator is determined, given the velocity of sound in air. To measure the wavelength for CO2, and to determine the sound velocity in CO2 from the ratios of the wavelengths in air determined in 1. above.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Longitudinal waves Sound velocity in gases and solids Frequency Wavelength Stationary waves Natural vibrations

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150601

Velocity of sound using Kundt's tube with Cobra3 P2150615

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 117

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Wavelengths and frequencies with a Quincke tube with a multimeter

Principle: When a sound wave of a particular frequency is divided into two coherent components (like, for example, light waves in an interferometer experiment), and if the path of one of the component waves is altered, it is possible to calculate the wavelength of the sound wave and its frequency from the interference phenomena recorded with a microphone. Tasks: 1. 2.

Record the extension of a Quincke tube for given frequencies in the range 2000 Hz to 6000 Hz. Calculate the frequencies from the wavelengths determined and compare them with the given

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Transverse and longitudinal waves Wavelength Amplitude Frequency Phase shift Interference Velocity of sound in air Loudness Weber-Fechner law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150702

Wavelengths and frequencies with a Quincke tube with the FG module and Cobra3 P2150715

excellence in science 118

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Resonance frequencies of Helmholtz resonators with Cobra3

Principle Acoustic cavity resonators posses a characteristic frequency which is determined by their geometrical form. In this case the resonator is excited to vibrations in its resonance frequency by background noise. Tasks Determination of different resonance frequencies of a resonator depending on the volume. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Cavity resonator Resonance frequency Acoustic resonant circuit

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150811

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 119

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Interference of acoustic waves - stationary waves and diffraction at a slot with Cobra3

Principle Two acoustic sources emit waves of the same frequency and if their distance is a multiple of the wavelength, an interference structure becomes apparent in the space where the waves are superimposed. An acoustic wave impinges perpendicularly onto a reflector, the incident and the reflected wave are superimposed to a stationary wave. In case of reflection, a pressure antinode will always occur at the point of reflection. An acoustic wave impinges on a sufficiently narrow slot, it is diffracted into the geometrical shadow spaces. The diffraction and the interference pattern occurring behind the slot can be explained by means of the Huygens Fresnel principle and confirm the wave characteristics of sound. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To measure the interference of acoustic waves. To analyze the reflection of acoustic waves - stationary waves. To measure the diffraction at a slot of acoustic waves.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Reflection Diffraction Acoustic waves Stationary waves Huygens-Fresnel principle Use of an interface

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2150911

excellence in science 120

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Optical determination of the velocity of sound in liquids

Ultrasonics Sound velocity Frequency Wavelength Sound pressure Stationary waves

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2151000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 121

2.2 Acoustics 2.2.4 Propagation of sound

Acoustic Doppler effect

Function and Applications To determine sound wave lengths and frequencies through interference of sound waves in air. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference tube with three mounting clamps. Length: 300 mm. Scale with cm-division. Frequencies: 2...5 kHz.

Accessories ▪ ▪

Principle It should be verified, how the frequency measured from the stationary microphone changes, when a constant frequency fed loudspeaker is moved slowly towards or away from the microphone. Here, the frequency should be represented as a function of the speed of the sound source. For the quantitative examination of the results, the speed of sound is measured from the slope of the line and compared to the theoretical value.

Sound head (03524-00). Measuring microphone (03542-00).

03482-00

Power frequency generator, 10 Hz - 1 MHz

P1336500

Sinus and rectangular signal generator with signal and power output for optimal adaptation to different experimental circuits.

Oscillations in metal plates

Benfits ▪ ▪ ▪

Large frequency range, frequencies can be continuously adjusted to five decade areas Output for sinus and regtangular signals Power output for sinus

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Demonstative frequency display with 4 digit LED display Supplementary headphone and loudspeaker connector jack

Signal output: Principle After a round or square metal plate is struck, a complex natural frequency spectrum is generated. Fourier analysis can be used to quickly determine the suitable frequencies for generating Chladni patterns. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra3 (C3PT) 01310-01 German Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 English P1362200

Interference tube, Quincke type

excellence in science 122

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 6 V Power: 1 W Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.2%)

Power output: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 18 V Power: 10 W Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.3%)

Input: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Input voltage range: Up = 0...1V Electric strength: Up < 30V Input resistance: 50 kOhm Required power: max. 70 VA Dimensions (mm): 370 x 236 x 168

13650-93

2 Physics 2.3 Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8

Thermal expansion Transport of heat Calorimetry Solar technology Conversion of thermal energy Behaviour of gases States of aggregation Thermodynamics on the magnetic board

124 126 130 133 135 138 145 151

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 123

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.1 Thermal expansion

Thermal expansion in solids and liquids

Principle The volume expansion of liquids and the linear expansion various materials is determined as a function of temperature. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the volume expansion of ethyl acetate (C4H8O2), methylated spirit, olive oil, glycerol and water as a function of temperature, using the pycnometer. To determine the linear expansion of brass, iron, copper, aluminium, duran glass and quartz glass as a function of temperature using a dilatometer. To investigate the relationship between change in length and overall length in the case of aluminium.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Linear expansion volume expansion of liquids thermal capacity lattice potential equilibrium spacing Grüneisen equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2310100

excellence in science 124

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.1 Thermal expansion

Linear expansion of metals

Volume expansion of gases at constant pressure

Principle To measure linear expansion, a metal tube is fixed in place at one end, while the other end lies on top of a rolling pointer. When steam is allowed to pass through the tube, it expands and the pointer on the roller moves by an amount dependent on the linear expansion coefficient of the material. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Heat, DVD 01052-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Wärme 01160-01 German TESS Physics manual Heat 01160-02 English

Principle A U-tube manometer with movable branches can be used to measure the expansion of gases at constant pressure. As the heated volume of air expands, the user slides the right branch until the water in the two branches reaches the same height again (p = const.). The increase in the volume can be measured with the scale. It can also be illustrated with arrows. To measure the linear expansion of solid bodies, one end of a metal pipe is securely clamped and the other end rests on a rotating shaft. When steam flows through the pipe, it expands. The displacement of the pointer on the rotating shaft can also be marked with magnetic arrows. Literature for this experiment as follows:

TESS Physique manual Chaleur 01160-03 French

Phys.Demovers.-Wärme/Hafttafel 01154-01 German

TESS Física manual Calor 01160-04 Spanish

Phys.Exp.Magnet Board Heat 01154-02 English

P1042900

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1291600

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 125

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.2 Transport of heat

Stefan-Boltzmann's law of radiation with Cobra3

Principle According of Stefan-Boltzmann's law, the energy emitted by a black body per unit area and unit time is proportional to the power "four" of the absolute temperature of the body. Stefan-Boltzmann's law is also valid for a so-called "grey" body whose surface shows a wavelength independent absorption-coefficient of less than one. In the experiment, the"grey" body is represented by the filament of an incandescent lamp whose energy emission is investigated as a function of the temperature. Tasks 1.

To measure the resistance of the filament of the incandescent lamp at room temperature and to ascertain the filament's resistance R0 at zero degrees centrigrade. To measure the energy flux density of the lamp at different heating voltages. The corresponding heating currents read off for each heating voltage and the corresponding filament resistance calculated. Anticipating a temperature-dependency of the second order of the filament-resistance, the temperature can be calculated from the measured resistances.

What you can learn about â&#x2013;Ş â&#x2013;Ş â&#x2013;Ş

Black body radiation Thermoelectric e. m. f. Temperature dependence of resistances

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2350115

Stefan-Boltzmann's law of radiation with an amplifier P2350101

excellence in science 126

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.2 Transport of heat

Thermal and electrical conductivity of metals

Principle The thermal conductivity of copper and aluminium is determined in a constant temperature gradient from the calorimetrically measured heat flow. The electrical conductivity of copper and aluminium is determined, and the Wiedmann-Franz law is tested. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determine the heat capacity of the calorimeter in a mixture experiment as a preliminary test. Measure the calefaction of water at a temperature of 0掳C in a calorimeter due to the action of the ambient temperature as a function of time. To begin with, establish a constant temperature gradient in a metal rod with the use of two heat reservoirs (boiling water and ice water) After removing the pieces of ice, measure the calefaction of the cold water as a function of time and determine the thermal conductivity of the metal rod. Determine the electrical conductivity of copper and aluminium by recording a current-voltage characteristic line. Test of the Wiedmann-Franz law.

What you can learn about Electrical conductivity, Wiedmann-Franz law, Lorenz number, Diffusion, Temperature gradient, Heat transport, Specific heat, Four-point measurement Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2350200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 127

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.2 Transport of heat

Heat insulation / heat conduction

Principle A model house with replaceable side walls is used for determining the heat transition coefficients (k values) of various walls and windows and for establishing the heat conductivities of different materials. For this purpose the temperatures on the inside and outside of the walls are measured at a constant interior and outer air temperature (in the steady state). With a multilayer wall structure the temperature difference over a layer is proportional to the particular thermal transmission resistance. The thermal capacity of the wall material affects the wall temperatures during heating up and temporary exposure to solar radiation. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measurement and interpretation of water temperatures during the heating up and during temporary external illumination of the walls. Determination of the heat conductivities of wood and Styropor. Determination of the k values of ordinary glass and insulating glass windows and of wooden walls of different thicknesses, and of walls with wood, Styropor or cavity layers.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Heat transition Heat transfer Heat conductivity Thermal radiation Hothouse effect Thermal capacity Temperature amplitude attenuation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2360300

excellence in science 128

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.2 Transport of heat

Thermal conduction coefficient of metals

Thermopile, Moll type

Function and Applications Termopile for detection of heat radiation and for measurement of radiant fluxes. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ Principle Curved metal rods are placed such that one end is in boiling water and the other is in cold water. The flow of heat through the rod can be determined by observing how the cold water heats up. The degree of heat flow depends on the material composition as well as the cross-sectional area and the length of the rod. One way of demonstrating this is to use copper rods of different sizes. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Heat, DVD 01052-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Wärme 01160-01 German TESS Physics manual Heat 01160-02 English TESS Physique manual Chaleur 01160-03 French

Metal cylinder with polished conical reflector, with non-selective blackcarbon coating and 16 series connected thermocouples and 4 mm sockets. With removable stem. Including protective window for fluxloss reduction and calibration certificate with confirmed sensitivity.

Spectral range ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

without window: 200...50000 nm with window: 300...3000 nm Response time (95%): max. 30 s Diameter absorber surface: 12 mm Field of view: 10° Maximum radiation intensity: 2000 W/m² Sensitivity: 20...40 µV/W/m²

Diameter housing: 34 mm, Length housing: 80 mm, Length stem: 170 mm, Diameter stem: 10 mm, Mass: 600 g Thermopile, Moll type 08479-00 Shielding tube, for 08479-00 08479-01 Slit, attachable, for 08479-00 08479-02

TESS Física manual Calor 01160-04 Spanish P1043200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 129

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.3 Calorimetry

Heat capacity of metals with Cobra3

Principle Heated specimens are placed in a calorimeter filled with water at low temperature. The heat capacity of the specimen is determined from the rise in the temperature of the water. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the specific heat capacity of aluminium, iron and brass. To verify Dulong Petit's law with the results of these experiments.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Mixture temperature Boiling point Dulong Petit's law Lattice vibration Internal energy Debye temperature

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2330111

excellence in science 130

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.3 Calorimetry

Heat capacity of metals

Principle Heated specimens are placed in a calorimeter filled with water at low temperature. The heat capacity of the specimen is determined from the rise in the temperature of the water. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To determine the heat capacity of the calorimeter by filling it with hot water and determining the rise in temperature. To determine the specific heat capacity of aluminium, iron and brass. To verify Dulong Petit's law with the results of these experiments.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Mixture temperature Boiling point Dulong Petit's law Lattice vibration Internal energy Debye temperature

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2330101

Mechanical equivalent of heat P2330200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 131

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.3 Calorimetry

Specific heat capacity of water

▪ ▪

the transparent calorimetric vessel allows at every time a free insight into the system the heat capacity of the calorimetric system itself is determined especially conveniently by supplying an exactly known amount of electric heating energy to the system

Equipment and Technical Data It will be delivered complete with tripod material and all necessary small hardware items. ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Principle A calorimeter made of two beakers and heat-insulating felt plates will be used by students to conduct their own experiments. ▪ ▪ ▪

Only small amounts of water are required Transparent calorimeter Separate heating coil Literature for this experiment as follows:

Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Heat, DVD 01052-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Wärme 01160-01 German TESS Physics manual Heat 01160-02 English TESS Physique manual Chaleur 01160-03 French TESS Física manual Calor 01160-04 Spanish P1043900

Set calorimetry, 230 V

Function and Applications With this setup a great number of measurements to heat capacities, reaction enthalpies, solution enthalpies, neutralisation enthalpies, melting enthalpies and enthalpies of mixtures can be carried out. Advantages This set allows to execute the measurements in a didactical clear and easy way:

excellence in science 132

Calorimeter, transparent Heating coil with sockets Magnetic stirrer Work and power meter Universal power supply Small hardware items- CD with literature

Not included are temperature measuring instruments. Accessory data acquisition set with Cobra3 Basic Unit for recording the temperature by means of a PC. 43030-88

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.4 Solar technology

Solar ray collector

Principle The solar ray collector is illuminated with a halogen lamp of known light intensity. The heat energy absorbed by the collector can be calculated from the volume flow and the difference in the water temperatures at the inlet and outlet of the absorber, if the inlet temperature stays almost constant by releasing energy to a reservoir. The efficiency of the collector is determined from this. The measurement is made with various collector arrangements and at various absorber temperatures. Tasks To determine the efficiency of the solar ray collector under various experimental conditions. Absorption of energy from the environment (20°C) without illumination by sun or halogen lamp, water temperature at the absorber inlet Te ; 5°C. 1.1 Absorber with insulation and glassplate (complete collector) 1.2 Absorber alone (energy ceiling) Illumination with halogen lamp. Water temperature Te; 20°C. 2.1 Complete collector 2.2 Collector without glass plate Illumination with halogen lamp. Water temperature Te; 50°C. 3.1 Complete collector 3.2 Complete collector, cold jet of air impinges 3.3 Collector without glass plate 3.4 Collector without glass plate, cold jet of air impinges. What you can learn about Absorption, Heat radiation, Greenhouse effect, Convection, Conduction of heat, Collector equations, Efficiency, Energy ceiling Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2360100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 133

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.4 Solar technology

Absorption of thermal radiation with a solar collector

▪

focuses the students doing the experiment and understand the natural science background

Equipment and technical data Selected parts: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Principle Clamp-on holder 02164-00 is fixed to the aluminium frame of the demonstration board as a holder for a reflector lamp. The absorber plates of solar collector 02165-00 can be used to study how the colour of the absorber affects its function, for example. Magnetic symbols indicating temperature and time can be arranged on the demonstration board. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers.-Wärme/Hafttafel 01154-01 German Phys.Exp.Magnet Board Heat 01154-02 English P1292100

optical bench halogen light source (20 W) fan (204m^3/h) wind generator (0.4 to 5.9 volts) solar collector water wheel thermal generator electric building blocks 2 solar cells-solar battery 5-V-motor (starting current 25mA) Ni-MH high power storage battery (2700mAh) other light sources (LED, bulbs) e-learning software interTESS

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪

power supply 0-12V, 6V~, 12V~ 2 multimeter light source instead of sun: 120 W

TESS Renewable Energy EN1 13287-77 TESS Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy EN1 13287-88 TESS Applied Science Set Renewable Energy EN2 13288-88

Solar ray collector

TESS Applied Sciences Sets Renewable Energy

Function and Applications Compact unit for study of all collector functions. Function and Application Set to perform more than 30 student experiments in the field of energy and sustainable energy sources: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

energy conversion enrgy storage solar energy (voltaic, thermal) wind energy water energy geothermal energy topics as the greenhouse effect and thermal insulation

Benefits Comprehensive solution to cover the field of energy, conversion and storage of energy and sustainable energy sources. ▪ ▪

Easy teaching and efficient learning by using the interactive Software interTESS The PC based experimentation with interTESS minimises the preparation time and facilitates efficient step by step setup, operation, analysis and evaluation

excellence in science 134

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Flat collector to heat water through absorption of radiation energy or thermal energy from environment. Black stainless steel absorbers with 2 temperature measurement points at inlet and outlet. Metal mirrored back wall and front glass cover removable. Collector frame with angular scale and fastening screw to adjust illuminating angle. Absorber dimensions (mm): 300 x 400. Absorber volume: approx. 50 ml. Insulation: 20 mm polyurethane foam. Dimensions (mm): 480 x 520 x 60.

Accessories ▪

Stand for solar collector (06757-00).

Solar ray collector 06753-00 Solar collector stand, teaching aid 06757-00

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.5 Conversion of thermal energy

Electric compression heat pump

Principle Pressures and temperatures in the circulation of the heat electrical compression heat pump are measured as a function of time when it is operated as a water-water heat pump. The energy taken up and released is calculated from the heating and cooling of the two water baths. When it is operated as an air-water heat pump, the coefficient of performance at different vaporiser temperatures is determined. Tasks 1.

Water heat pump: To measure pressure and temperature in the circuit and in the water reservoirs on the condenser side and the vaporiser side alternately. To calculate energy taken up and released, also the volume concentration in the circuit and the volumetric efficiency of the compressor. 2. Air-water heat pump: To measure vaporiser temperature and water bath temperature on the condenser side under different operating conditions on the vaporiser side,

▪ ▪ ▪

with stream of cold air with stream of hot air without blower.

If a power meter is available, the electric power consumed by the compressor can be determined with it and the coefficient of performance calculated. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Refrigerator Compressor Restrictor valve Cycle Vaporization Condensation Vapour pressure Vaporisation enthalpy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2360200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 135

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.5 Conversion of thermal energy

Stirling engine with an oscilloscope

Principle The Stirling engine is submitted to a load by means of an adjustable torquemeter, or by a coupled generator. Rotation frequency and temperature changes of the Stirling engine are observed. Effective mechanical energy and power, as well as effective electrical power, are assessed as a function of rotation frequency. The amount of energy converted to work per cycle can be determined with the assistance of the pV diagram. The efficiency of the Stirling engine can be estimated. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the burner's thermal efficiency Calibration of the sensor unit. Calculation of the total energy produced by the engine through determination of the cycle area on the oscilloscope screen, using transparent paper and coordinate paper. Assessment of the mechanical work per revolution, and calculation of the mechanical power output as a function of the rotation frequency, with the assistance of the torque meter. Assessment of the electric power output as a function of the rotation frequency. Efficiency assessment.

4. 5. 6.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

First and second law of thermodynamics Reversible cycles Isochoric and isothermal changes Gas jaws Efficiency Stirling engine Conversion of heat Thermal pump

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2360401

Stirling engine with Cobra3 P2360415

excellence in science 136

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.5 Conversion of thermal energy

TESS Applied Sciences Sets Renewable Energy

TESS Renewable Energy EN1 13287-77 TESS Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy EN1 13287-88 Utilisation of radiant energy with a solar collector P1292200

Concentrated solar power unit

Meter for Stirling engine, pVnT

Function and Applications To display temperature and number of revolutions per minute and for the output of analogue voltages for Stirling motor pressure and volume. Equipment and technical data Revolutions per: Minute: ▪ ▪

4 digit display range: 0...1999 min-1

Pressure: ▪ ▪

analogue voltage value range: 0...5V

Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4 digit display T1: range: -10..+500 °C resolution: 1°C T2: -10...+190 °C resolution: 0.2 °C

Pressure: Function and applications Model to investigate the principle and operation of concentratedsolar-power technology, one of the most promising candidates for solar power plants in deserts. To perform student experiments as well as demonstration experiments in the field of renewable energy/ solar power. Benefits Easy and efficient experimentation due to compact and realistic design, mounts for supporting material and compatibility to other components in the field of renewable energy Equipment and technical data ▪

high reflecting linear concave mirror with mount: L x W x D: 110 mm x 90 mm x 55 mm, Focal point: 2.5 cm

▪

black coated glass tube with screw cap (type GL 18/8): 160 mm x 16 mm glass tube: length 250 mm, diameter 8 mm

▪ ▪ ▪

analogue voltage value range: 0...5 V approx. Po±1000 hPa

Volume: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

analogue voltage value range: 0...5 V Vmin...Vmax Mains voltage: 230 V / 50...60 Hz

04371-97

Heat pump, compressor principle 04370-88

Accessories ▪

clamp , diameter 16mm, with mounting rod for supporting material (05764-00)

05765-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 137

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Equation of state for ideal gases

Principle The state of a gas is determined by its temperature, its pressure and the amount of substance. For the limiting case of an ideal gas these state variables are linked by the general equation of state, from which special correlations can be derived for specific changes of state. Tasks For a constant amount of gas (air) investigate the correlation of

▪ 1. 2. 3. ▪

Volume and pressure at constant temperature (Boyle and Mariotte's law) Volume and temperature at constant pressure (Gay-Lussac's law) Pressue and temperature at constant volume (Charles' (Amontons' law)) From the relationships obtained calculate the universal gas constant as well as the coefficient of thermal expansion, the coefficient of thermal tension, and the coefficient of cubic compressibility.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Pressure and temperature Volume Coefficient of thermal expansion Coefficient of thermal tension Coefficient of cubic compressibility General equation of state for ideal gases Universal gas constant Boyle and Mariotte's law Gay-Lussac's law Charles' (Amontons') law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320101

Equation of state for ideal gases with Cobra3 P2320115

excellence in science 138

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Heat capacity of gases

Principle Heat is added to a gas in a glass vessel by an electric heater which is switched on briefly. The temperature increase results in a pressure increase, which is measured with a manometer. Under isobaric conditions a temperature increase results in a volume dilatation, which can be read from a gas syringe. The molar heat capacities CV and Cp are calculated from the pressure or volume change. Tasks 1.

Determine the molar heat capacities of air at constant volume Cv and at constant pressure Cp.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equation of state for ideal gases 1st law of thermodynamics Universal gas constant Degree of freedom Mole volumes Isobars Isotherms Isochors and adiabatic changes of slate

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320201

Heat capacity of gases with Cobra3 P2320211

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 139

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Maxwellian velocity distribution

Principle By means of the model apparatus for kinetic theory of gases the motion of gas molecules is simulated and the velocityis determined by registration of the throw distance of the glass balls. This velocity distribution is compared to the theoretical MAXWELL- BOLTZMANN equation. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measure the velocity distribution of the "model gas". Compare the result to theoretical behaviour as described by the MAXWELL-BOLTZMANN distribution. Discuss the results.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Kinetic theory of gases Temperature Gas- Molecules Model kinetic energy Average velocity Velocity distribution

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320300

excellence in science 140

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Adiabatic coefficient of gases - Flammersfeld oscillator

Principle A mass oscillates on a volume of gas in a precision glass tube. The oscillationis maintained by leading escaping gas back into the system. The adiabatic coefficient of various gases is determined from the periodic time of the oscillation. Tasks 1.

Determine the adiabatic coefficient of air nitrogen and carbon dioxide (and also of argon, if available) from the periodic time of the oscillation T of the mass m on the volume V of gas.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equation of adiabatic change of slate Polytropic equation Rüchardt's experiment Thermal capacity of gases

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320500

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 141

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Joule-Thomson effect

Principle A stream of gas is fed to a throttling point, where the gas (CO2 or N2) undergoes adiabatic expansion. The differences in temperature established between the two sides of the throttle point are measured at various pressures and the Joule-Thomson coefficients of the gases in question are calculated. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the Joule-Thomson coefficient of CO2. Determination of the Joule-Thomson coefficient of N2.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Real gas Intrinsic energy Gay-Lussac theory Throttling Van der Waals equation Van der Waals force Inverse Joule-Thomson effect Inversion temperature

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320600

excellence in science 142

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Boyle-Mariotte law

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

43020-00

Principle The general gas equation describes the relationship between pressure, volume and temperature of an enclosed gas volume. A gas syringe is used for measuring the relationship between the volume and the pressure, which is sealed with the help of motor oil. In addition to this, the gas syringe is also tempered with the help of a water bath. This waterbath helps to avoid the temperature fluctuations during compression and expansion and also enables one to record isotherms at different temperatures. Volume, (number of the measurement value), pressure and temperature are recorded as points upon a key press.

Set gas laws with glass jacket, 230 V 43003-88

Cobra3 Data acquisition set for set gas laws with glass jacket

Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra3 (C3PT) 01310-01 German Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 English Demo advanced Chemie / Biologie Handbuch Cobra3 (C3BT) 01320-01 German Demo advanced Chemistry / Biology Manual Cobra3 (C3BT) 01320-02 English P1350200

Set Gas laws with glass jacket system and Cobra4

Function and Applications This set allows the computer-assisted measuring and evaluation of temperatureand pressure in a comfortable way for experiments with the "Set gas laws with glass jacket". Benefits Because the measuring data are recorded with a PC it is very easy to analyse and represent the results fast and graphically. Equipment and technical data The set is completely supplied with all small hardware items which are necessary to connect the measuring moduls onto the glass devices of the "Set gas laws with glass jacket": ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications Complete device compilation for a comfortable way to derive the ideal gas laws experimentally with help of the Cobra4 Senor-Unit Thermodynamics and the glass jacket system.

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT USB- Power supply unit 12VDC/2 A Software Cobra3 gas laws Measuring modul pressure Modulconverter COBRA3 Cobra3 temperature sensor -20...+110°C Small parts

Cobra3 Data acquisition set for set gas laws 43003-30 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Measuring module, pressure 12103-00 Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02

Equipment and technical data The set consists of:

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 143

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.6 Behaviour of gases

Kinetic gas theory apparatus

Joule-Thomson apparatus

Function and Applications Joule-Thompson apparatus. Benefits ▪ ▪

Frame with pressure gauge and a spiral of coppercapillary tube. Plastic-coated glass tube with a throttle body and 2 measurement points for Pt-100-temperature sensor.

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications Kinetic gastheory apparatus with vertical chamber and built in motor. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

chamber (mm) 60 x 20 x 180 motor supply 12 VDC /20 W

Receiver with recording chamber

Function und Applications To determine velocity distribution of the model gas in the kinetic gas theory apparatus. Benefits

▪ ▪

Sector shaped receiver with 23 annular chambers to trap model gas beads coming from the filter chamber. These are gathered in the transparent recording chamber. Box level on the receiver casing to allow horizontal adjustment.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Recording chamber with rod Dimensions of recording chamber (mm):240×5×120

09061-00

excellence in science 144

Pressure range 0 .. 0.1 MPa Division 5 kPa Tube length / diameter. (Mm): 250/46 Copper coil 37.5 m / 132 coils 1 m pressure hose Hose clamps

04361-00

09060-00

▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Thermal equation of state and critical point

Principle A substance which is gaseous under normal conditions is enclosed in a variable volume and the variation of pressure with the volume is recorded at different temperatures. The critical point is determined graphically from a plot of the isotherms. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measure a number of p-V isotherms of ethane. Determine the critical point and the critical quantities of ethane. Calculate the constants of the Van der Waals equation, the Boyle temperature, the radius of the molecules and the parameters of the interaction potential.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ideal gases Real gases Equations of state Van der Waals equation Boyle temperature Critical point Interaction potential Molecule radius

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2320400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 145

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Vapour pressure of water at high temperature

Principle The high-pressure steam apparatus makes it possible to measure steam pressure in a temperature range of 100-250째C. This allows for investigations to be performed on real gases and vapours. Typical equilibrium states between gas and liquid phases can be set up. For this purpose, water is heated in a closed pressure chamber at constant volume. The heat of vaporisation is determined at various temperatures from the measurement of vapour pressure as a function of temperature. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measure the vapour pressure of water as a function of temperature. Calculate the heat of vaporisation at various temperatures from the values measured. Determine boiling point at normal pressure by extrapolation.

What you can learn about Boiling point, Heat of vaporisation, Clausius-Clapeyron equation, Van't Hoff law, Carnot cycle Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2340100

excellence in science 146

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Vapour pressure of water below 100°C - molar heat of vaporisation

Principle The vapour pressure of water in the range of 40°C to 85°C is investigated. It is shown that the Clausius-Clapeyron equation describes the relation between temperature and pressure in an adequate manner. An average value for the heat of vaporization of water is determined. Tasks 1. 2.

About 250 ml of de-mineralized water are allowed to boil for about 10 minutes to eliminate all traces of dissolved gas. The water is then cooled down to room temperature. The 3-neck round flask is filled about three-quarters full with gas-free water and heated. At 35°C the space above the water within the round flask is evacuated. Further heating causes an increase in pressure p and temperature t of water within the round flask. p and t are read in steps of 5°C up to a maximum of t = 85°C.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Pressure Temperature Volume Vaporization Vapour pressure Clausius-Clapeyron equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2340200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 147

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Boiling point elevation

Principle The boiling point of a solution is always higher than that of the pure solvent. The dependence of the temperature difference (elevated boiling point) on the concentration of the solute can be determined using a suitable apparatus. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measure the increase in boiling point of water as a function of the concentration of table salt, urea and hydroquinone. Investigate the relationship between the increase in boiling point and the number of particles. Determine the molar mass of the solute from the relationship between the increase in boiling point and the concentration.

What you can learn about Raoult's law, Henry's law, Ebullioscopic constants, Chemical potential, Gibbs-Helmholtz equation, Concentration ratio, Degree of dissociation Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2340300

excellence in science 148

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Freezing point depression

Principle The freezing point of a solution is lower than that of the pure solvent. The depression of the freezing point can be determined experimentally using a suitable apparatus (cryoscopy). If the cryoscopic constants of the solvent are known, the molecular mass of the dissolved substances can be determined. Tasks 1. 2.

Determine the degree of freezing point depression after dissolving a strong electrolyte (NaCl) in water. By comparing the experimental value with the theoretical one predicted for this concentration, determine the number of ions into which the electrolyte dissociates. Determine the apparent molar mass of a non-electrolyte (hydroquinone) from the value of freezing point depression.

What you can learn about Raoult's law, Cryoscopic constants, Chemical potential, Gibbs-Helmholtz equation, Concentration ratio, Degree of dissociation, Van't Hoff factor, Cryoscopy Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2340400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 149

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.7 States of aggregation

Critical point apparatus

Function and Applications Critical point apparatus with transparent compression chamber on three legged base, pressure measurement-, generation- and cooling system, two gas valves. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Temperature range: 0...55 °C Pressure range: 0...50 bar, 0.5 bar division Volume range: 0...4 ml, 0.05 ml division Dimensions (mm): 335 x 340 x 670

Critical point apparatus 04364-10 Meas. capillary f.crit.point app. 04364-11 Compressed gas, ethane, 14 g 41772-09

excellence in science 150

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.8 Thermodynamics on the magnetic board

Linear expansion of solid bodies

Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00 Phys.Exp.Magnet Board Heat 01154-02 Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00

Demo Renewable Energy

Principle Metal pipes made of different materials are heated by passing steam through them. While each pipe is being tested, one end is securely fixed and the other rests on a rotating shaft, the motion of which is indicated with a pointer. The linear expansion of the different metals is compared qualitatively and the coefficient of linear thermal expansion is calculated. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers.-Wärme/Hafttafel 01154-01 German Phys.Exp.Magnet Board Heat 01154-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1291500

Demo Physics Thermodynamics, magn.-held components

Function and Applications 2 Equipment sets to perform more than 40 demo board experiments in the field of energy and sustainable energy sources: sonversion, storage, solar (voltaic, thermal), wind, water, geothermal energy, topics as the greenhouse effect and thermal insulation, hydrogen and fuel cell technology, concentrated solar power technology (CSP). Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Comprehensive solution to cover the field of energy, conversion and storage of energy and sustainable energy sources with more than 40 experiments. 100% Reliable contact due to magnetic adhesive, puzzle-like connectable building blocks with corrosion-free, gold-plated contacts even under humid climate conditions Circuit diagram demonstratively visible on the connected building blocks. 100 percent reliable contact due to interlocking building blocks . Higher power devices (f.e. thermogenerator, solarcell, electrolyzer, fuel cell) to drive everyday devices like mp3 players, portable CD-players, toys, etc.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data Equipment set consisting of the following magneto-adhesive components: 2 clamps, 4 clamping holders, rod, support plate, overflow vessel, holder for hand-held instruments, holder for burners, wire gauze holder, all on fixing magnet. And the following components: solar collector, scale, pointers and marker points, incl. storage box with cover and moulded foam insert. Demo Physics Thermodynamics, magn.-held components 02170-88

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Buildingblocks with gold contacts,magnetically adhesive, labeling Solar Cell, Solar Battery, Light Source Solar Collector, Concave Mirror for CSP Thermogenerator Blower, Wind Generator Water Turbine Motor Quattro PEM Fuell Cell, Douple PEM Electrolyzer, Direct Methanol Fue Cell, Gas storages Magnetic adhesive holders. loads, consumables Including two wodden storage boxes with foam inserts. Size of building blocks (mm):60 × 60 × 46 Dimensions H × W × D (mm):150 × 410 × 545 Mass: 15 kg

Recommended accessories ▪

Experimental literature and Demo board, Demomultimeter / PCInterface, Power Supply

Demo Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy ENT1 09492-88 Demo Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy ENT2 09493-88

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 151

2.3 Thermodynamics 2.3.8 Thermodynamics on the magnetic board

excellence in science 152

2 Physics 2.4 Electricity

Electricity 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9

Electricity/electronics teaching system Switching unit system Electricity Electrical conduction Electrostatics, electric field Magnetostatics, magnetic field Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force Electric motor/generator teaching systems Electromagnetic oscillations and waves Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

154 164 170 183 193 204 226 229 237

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 153

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Current and resistance in a parallel connection

TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02 English P1373360

Charging and discharging a capacitor

Principle In households, electrical devices areoften connected in parallel to differentsockets of the same electric circuit.The total current and the totalresistance of the circuit can bepredicted from the partial resistances. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsphänomene 01330-01 German TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English

Principle Capacitors are devices that can storecharge. Here the details of how thecharge gets in and out of the capacitoris looked at. Literature for this experiment as follows:

TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra4 Mechanik, Wärme, Elektrik / Elektronik 01332-01 German

TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsphänomene 01330-01 German

TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02 English

TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra4 Mechanik, Wärme, Elektrik / Elektronik 01332-01 German

P1372860

Electrical power and work

TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02 English P1373560

The transistor as a switch

Principle A greater number of lamps means more power than a smaller number of lamps. How much voltage and current do you need for the many lamps? Which conclusions on electrical power and work can you drawn from this? Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsphänomene 01330-01 German TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra4 Mechanik, Wärme, Elektrik / Elektronik 01332-01 German

excellence in science 154

Principle This experiment illustrates to the students the basic operating principle of using a transistor as an electronic switch. An experiment using the corresponding elements for this can be shown on the demonstration board.

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik, Elektrik/Elektronik-Baustein-System 1 und 2 01006-01 German

Series and parallel connection of solar cells - opencircuit voltage and short-circuit current

TESS Physics Electric/Electronic Building Block System, Part 1 and 2 01006-02 English TESS advanced Física manual Electricidad/Electrónicacon el Sistema de Módulo 01006-04 Spanish Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Electrics / Electronics, DVD 01054-00 P1374500

The shunt motor Principle Series or parallel connection of solar cells can be used to change voltage and current and to adjust them to the consumer's needs. The short-circuit current of solar cells is proportional to the irradiance, while their voltage output is nearly independent of it. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English Principle In a shunt-wound motor, the armature and field windings are connected in parallel. A U-shaped core with two coils fits exactly on the motor model for student experiments. The coils are connected electrically by leads.

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, Wärme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German P1382800

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik, Elektrik/Elektronik-Baustein-System 1 und 2 01006-01 German TESS Physics Electric/Electronic Building Block System, Part 1 and 2 01006-02 English TESS advanced Física manual Electricidad/Electrónicacon el Sistema de Módulo 01006-04 Spanish Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Electrics / Electronics, DVD 01054-00 P1376400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 155

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

The transistor as a switch

Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English P1397600

The shunt motor

Principle The demonstration experiment shows that a transistor can be used as a non-contact electronic switch. The students set up the same experiment with the corresponding elements. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Sekundarstufe 1,Mechanik, Akustik, W채rme, Elektrik, regenerative Energie,Optik 01500-01 German

Principle In a shunt-wound motor the armature and field windings are connected in parallel. The field coils are permanently mounted to components, the motor is screwed to the wall bracket and placed under the field coils. Electrical connection is made via connecting leads. Literature for this experiment as follows:

P1383400

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German

The PEM solar hydrogen model

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English P1398700

Wind hydrogen system

excellence in science 156

Principle Model of a wind-hydrogen system, built with equipment from the Renewable Energy school sets EN1 and EN2.

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Wind-hydrogen technology is one interesting possibility for using wind energy independently of the weather. The wind energy is converted to electrical energy, which can either be used directly or stored in the form of hydrogen with the help of an electrolyser. Using an air fuel cell allows electrical energy to be gained from the hydrogen and atmospheric oxygen.

TESS Physics Electric/ Electronics modules set 2

Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS, DVD 01000-00 Software interTESS Applied Science, Renewable Energy, DVD 01081-00 P9516400 Function and Applications

TESS Physics Electric/ Electronics modules Set 1

Function and Applications Student building block system Set 1of 53 items for the performance of 31 experiments in the following subjects: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric circuits (8 exp.) Electrical resistance (9exp.) Electric power and work (1 exp.) Capacitors (3 exp.) Diodes (Part 1) (1exp.) Transistors (Part 1) (10 exp.)

TESS Physics Electric/Electrononics modules set 2 consisting of 41 items. Supplementary equipment set for set 1; allows the performance of 74 student experiments (combined with set 1) in the following subjects: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric circuits (8 exp.) Electrical resistance (9 exp.) Electric power and work (1 exp.) Capacitors (3 exp.) Transformation of energy (2 exp.) Electrochemistry (6 exp.) Electromagnetism (7 exp.) Electric motors (3 exp.) Induction (3 exp.) Transformers (2 exp.) Self-induction (3 exp.) Safe working with electrical energy (3 exp.) Sensors (3 exp.) Diodes (11 exp.) Transistors (10 exp.)

TESS Physics Electric/Electronics modules set 2 05601-88 TESS Physics Set Electrics/Electronics modules Set 1 and 2 05602-88

Software interTESS, DVD

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

The student electrics/ electronics system consists of building blocks that can be put together on any flat surface and which supplement each other. Reliable contact due to interlocking building blocks Gold contacts (no corrosion)

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Student building block system Set 1 Including storage box with foam

TESS Physics Electric/Electronics modules set 1 05600-88 TESS Physics Electric/Electronics modules set 1 with interTESS 05600-77 TESS Physics Electric/Electronic Building Block System, Part 1 and 2 01006-02 01000-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 157

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

PEM fuel cell for hydrogen/ oxygen operation and hydrogen/ air operation, SB

▪ ▪ ▪

Solar energy (15 exp.) Wind energy (6 exp.) Geothermal energy (5 exp.)

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Comprehensive solution to cover the field of energy, conversion and storage of energy and sustainable energy sources Easy teaching and efficient learning by using the interactive software interTESS The PC based experimentation with interTESS minimizes the preparation time and facilitates efficient step by step setup, operate, analyse and evaluation Focuses the students doing the experiment and understand the natural science background

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications Students Electronic Building Block with PEM fuel cell for H2/O2 operation and H2/air operation. To perform student experiments in the field of hydrogen technology, for example conversion of hydrogen to electrical energy and its use. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Easy and comprehensive experimentation due to compatibility to other devices in the field of renewable energy. With air/H2 operation for a more realistic application of h-technology, for example in cars or power supplies. 100% reliable contacts due to interlocking building blocks and gold contacts even under humid climate conditions Integrated electrical devices are visible from the rear.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The device set contains all items required to conduct the experiments. Incl. storage box. Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

interTESS software with the descriptions of the experiments Power supply 0...12V, 6V~,12V~ 2 multimeter Light source instead of sun: 120 W

TESS Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy EN1 13287-88 TESS Renewable Energy EN1 13287-77

TESS Applied Science Set Renewable Energy EN2

PEM fuel cell H2/O2: 500 mW PEM fuel cell H2/air: 150 mW H x W x D: 50 mm x 40 mm x 50 mm Imprinted polarity indication Gold coated side contacts

Accessories ▪ ▪

Gas storage, SB (05663-00) PEM electrolyser, SB (05662-00)

PEM fuel cell for hydrogen/ oxygen operation and hydrogen/ air operation, SB 05661-00 PEM electrolyser, SB 05662-00 Gas storage, SB, incl. tubes and plugs 05663-00

TESS Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy EN1

Function and applications Set to perform 21 experiments in the field of energy and sustainable energy sources. The set complements set 1 with following topics: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Hydrogen and fuel cells technology Wind-to-hydrogen technology Solar-to-hydrogen technology CSP technology (concentrated solar power) Electrical power from water turbines Storage of energy

Characteristic curves of all power devices of set 1 and 2 will be measured. Benefits

Function and Application Set to perform 31 student experiments in the field of energy and sustainable energy sources: ▪

Energy conversion (5 exp.)

excellence in science 158

Comprehensive solution to cover the field of energy, conversion and storage of energy and sustainable energy sources with more than 50 experiments. Easy teaching and efficient learning by using the interactive software interTESS. The PC based experimentation with interTESS not only minimises the preparation time and facilitates efficient step by step setup, operation, analysis and evaluation, but also allows students performing the experiments and understanding the scientific background. Equipment and technical data Selected parts:

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fuel cell Electrolyser Water turbine Electric building blocks (potentiometer, gold cap) Concave mirror for CSP technology

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electricity, current ± 6 A/ voltage ± 30V

Accessories ▪ ▪

Power supply 0-12V, 6V~, 12V~ 2 multimeter

13288-88

TESS beginner natural sciences set Current and Magnets

Function and Applications

Set for student experiments, especially suitable for teaching of natural sciences in primary school and early secondary school. Contains all necessary materials and description in a sturdy storage. Included german handbook in color, DIN A5, ring binder. Additional set for demonstration experiments and handbook with hints for teachers available. 15 experiments are described: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Getting illuminated The perfect electric circuit On and off Take one, make two A battery-powered heater The path of current More lamps - more light? The magnet testing apparatus The power of magnets Long-distance effect Magnetic patterns An invisible force For scouts and seafarers Opposites attract Abracadabra - be a magnet!

TESS beginner natural sciences set Current and Magnets 13245-88 DEMO beginner natural sciences set Current and Magnets 13246-88 TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Current /Voltage ±30 V ± 6 A is a secured measuring sensor, which can be connected to theCobra4 WirelessLink, the Cobra4 Mobile Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection, depending on the application type. Benefits ▪ ▪

The sensor has a voltage difference input. Simultaneous measurement of current and voltage is possible.

Equipment and technical data Measuring range: ▪ ▪

Voltage: -30...30 V Current: -6...6 A

Resolution: ▪ ▪

Voltage: 15 mV Current: 3 mA

Internal resistances: ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage: 1 MOhm Current: 33 mOhm Weight: 100 g

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electricity, current ± 6 A/ voltage ± 30V 12644-00 Cobra4 Mobile-Link set, incl. rechargeable batteries, SD memory card, USB cable and software "measure" 12620-55 Cobra4 Wireless, Basic Set Physics, incl. Software and aluminium case 12605-89

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 159

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Demo Renewable Energy

Demo Physics electric/electronic, building block, set1, without board

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Recommended accessories ▪

Experimental literature and Demo board, Demomultimeter / PCInterface, Power Supply

Demo Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy ENT1 09492-88 Demo Applied Sciences Set Renewable Energy ENT2 09493-88

excellence in science 160

Equipment set consisting of 57 components. Allows the performance of 36 demonstration experiments on the board for the following subjects: Electric Cirucits, Electrical Resistance, Electric Power and Work, Capacitors, Diodes and Transistors. Benefits

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications

▪ ▪ ▪

Reliable contact due to magnetic adhesive, puzzle-like connectable building blocks with corrosion-free, gold-plated contacts. Circuit diagram demonstratively visible on the connected building blocks. 100 percent reliable contact due to interlocking building blocks

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Building block system buildingblocks with gold contacts,magnetically adhesive, labeling. Including two wodden storage boxes with foam inserts for building blocks. Size of building blocks (mm): 60 × 60 × 46 Dimensions H × W × D (mm): 150 × 410 × 545 Mass: 14,25 kg

Recommended accessories ▪

Experimental literature and Demo board.

Demo Physics Electric/ Electronics, building block, set1, without board 09400-88 Basic set electric/ electronic 1, demo building block, without board 09400-66 Supplement for equipment set electric/ electronic 1, demo buding block, without board 09400-55 Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook

01005-02

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Double PEM electrolyser, DB

Demonstration electronic building block with double PEM fuel cell for O2/H2 operation and air/H2 operation. To perform demonstration experiments in the field of hydrogen technology, for example conversion of hydrogen to electrical energy and its use. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Easy and comprehensive experimentation due to compatibility to other devices in the field of renewable energy With air/H2 operation for a more realistic application of h-technology, for example in cars or power supplies 100% reliable contacts due to interlocking building blocks and gold contacts even under humid climate conditions Integrated electrical devices are visible from the rear

Equipment and Technical Data Function and Application Demonstration electronic building block with double electrolyser for H2 and O2 production. To perform student experiments in thef ield of hydrogen technology, for example solar-hydrogen and wind-hydrogen technology. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Easy and comprehensive experimentation due to compatibility to other devices in the field of renewable energy, especially wind generator. 100% reliable contacts due to interlocking building blocks and gold contacts even under humid climate conditions. Integrated electrical devices are visible from the rear. Magnetic pads for vertical setups.

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Double PEM fuel cell H2/O2 Double PEM fuel cell H2/air: Imprinted polarity indication Gold coated side contacts Magnetic pad for vertical setup

09486-88

Set double PEM fuel cell and double PEM electrolyser, gas storage and connecting blocks, DB 09487-88

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Hydrogen production: 10 cm3/min Oxygen production: 5 cm3/min Power: 2.33 W Dimensions H x W x D (mm): 56 x 42 x 57 Imprinted polarity indication gold coated side contacts magnetic pads for vertical setups

Accessories Gas storage, DB (09489-00), Double PEM fuel cell, DB (09486-00), Quattro PEM fuel cell, DB (09487-00) 09488-00

Double PEM fuel cell for hydrogen/ oxygen operation and hydrogen/ air operation, DB 09486-00

Set double PEM fuel cell and electrolyzer, gas storage and connecting blocks, DB

Function and Application

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 161

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Quattro PEM fuel cell for hydrogen/ oxygen operation andhydrogen/ air operation, DB

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Energy

Function and Applications Demonstration electronic building block with double PEM fuel cell for O2/H2 operation and air/H2 operation. To perform demonstration experiments in the field of hydrogen technology, for example conversion of hydrogen to electrical energy and its use. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Easy and comprehensive experimentation due to compatibility to other devices in the field of renewable energy. With air/H2 operation for a more realistic application of h-technology, for example in cars or power supplies 100% reliable contacts due to interlocking building blocks and gold contacts even under humid climate conditions Integrated electrical devices are visible from the rear.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications To be connected directly to the sensor ports of the Cobra4 Basic unit. Sensor sheathing: stainless steel. Measuring range: -20°C...+110°C. Total length incl. cable: 1.5 m. Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Energy electricity, voltage, power, capacity 12656-00 Cobra4 Mobile-Link 12620-00

Cobra4 Display-Connect, Set of transmitter and receiver

Double PEM fuel cell H2/O2 Double PEM Fuell Cell H2/air Dimensions H x W x D (mm): 65 x 48 x 60 Imprinted polarity indication Gold coated side contacts Magnetic pad for vertical setup

Accessories Gas storage, DB (09489-00), Electrolyser, SB (09488-00) 09487-00

Function and Applications

Gas storage with magnetic pad, incl. tube and plug 09489-00

Device combination consisting of a sender and a receiver for the radio-based communication between a Cobra4 Mobile Link and up to 2 digital large displays. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

The system works with 5 switchable send channels at a carrier frequency of 433 MHz. The current supply of the sender and receivers occurs in each case via the devices. A parallel write-out of a series of measurements to the SD-Card of the Mobile-Link is possible.

Cobra4 Display-Connect, Set of transmitter and receiver for using the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with large-scale displays 12623-88 Large-scale display, digital, RS-232 port 07157-93 Cobra4 Mobile-Link 12620-00 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 2 x Temperature, NiCr-Ni 12641-00 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03

excellence in science 162

2.4 Electricity 2.4.1 Electricity/electronics teaching system

Multimeter ADM2, demo., analoque

Function and Applications Electronic analogue multimeter for measuring direct and alternating voltage and current, and for measuring resistance. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Eight demonstrative scales with a total of 66 measuring ranges. Measures direct or alternating current from 1 mikroA to 10 A. Measures direct or alternating voltage from 1 mV to 10 kV. Measures resistance up to 1 MOhm. Scale with zero in the middle with automatic middle positioning of pointer. Automatic switch-off of battery after approx. 50 min. Operatable and readable also from the back. Extensive overload protection in all measuring ranges even when line voltage is falsely applied. Eliminates the need for fuses and cutouts.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Display system: Moving coil measuring system (core magnet) Control display on the back 3 Digit LCD display with floating decimal point and sign Accuracy: Class 1.5 Rectifier principle: Effective value (True RMS-to-DC Converter) Frequency range: 15 Hz...20 kHz Signal shape: Arbitrary Power supply: 3 × 1.5 V Battery lifetime: 400 hours of operation Casing dimensions (mm): 320 × 190 × 385 Weight: 6.4 kg

13820-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 163

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

Ohm's law with Cobra3

Principle The electrical resistance of pure metals increases with increasing temperature. The correlation between voltage and current is to be measured using temperature-in- and dependent resistors. Determine the work and power of an incandescent bulb. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To plot the current/voltage characteristics of Ohm's resistors and of pure metals and to calculate their resistivity. To determine the resistance of various connecting cords by plotting their current/characteristics and calculating the contact resistances. To determine the work and power of an incandescent bulb as a function of the applied voltage.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ohm's law Resistivity Contact resistance Conductivity Power and Work

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410115

excellence in science 164

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

Wheatstone bridge

Principle The Wheatstone bridge circuit is used to determine unknown resistances. The total resistance of resistors connected in parallel and in series is measured. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determination of unknown resistances. Determination of the total resistance of resistors in series, of resistors in parallel. Determination of the resistance of a wire as a function of its cross-section.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Kirchhoff's laws Conductor Circuit Voltage Resistance Parallel connection Series connection

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 165

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

Internal resistance and matching in voltage sources

Principle Both the terminal voltage of a voltage source and the current depend on the load, i. e. on the external resistance. The terminal voltage is measured as a function of the current and from it the internal resistance and no-load voltage of the voltage source are determined and the power graph plotted. Tasks ▪

To measure the terminal voltage Ut of a number of voltage source as a function of the current, varying the external resistance Re, and to calculate the no-load voltage U0 and the internal resistance Ri. 1.1 Slimline battery 1.2 Power supply 1.2.1 Alternating voltage output 1.2.2 Direct voltage output

▪ ▪

To measure directly the no-load voltage of the slimline battery (with no external resistance) and its internal resistance (by power matching, Ri = Re). To determine the power diagram from the relationship between terminal voltage and current, as illustrated by the slimline battery.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage source Electromotive force (e.m.f.) Terminal voltage No-load operation Short circuit Ohm's law Kirchhoff's laws Power matching

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410300

excellence in science 166

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

Characteristic curves of semiconductors with the FG module

Principle Determine the current strength flowing through a semi-conducting diode. Determine the collector current with the collector voltage for various values of the base current intensity. Tasks 1. 2.

To investigate the dependence of the current strength flowing through a semi-conducting diode. To determine the variations of the collector current with the collector voltage for varios values of the base current intensity.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Semiconductor P-n junction Energy-band diagram Acceptors Donors Valence band Conduction band Transistor Operating point

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410915

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 167

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

The bimetallic switch

Principle A bi-metal strip comprises two metal strips which are laminated together and have different thermal expansion coefficients. When warmed the strip flexes toward the side with the lower expansion coefficient. In so doing, it can act as a switch in the electric circuit. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronik 01169-01 German TESS Physics manual Electricity/Electronics 01169-02 English

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 8 2 6

Resistor 100 Ohm Resistor 470 Ohm Resistor 1 kOhm Resistor 4.7 kOhm Resistor 10 kOhm Resistor 47 kOhm Potentiometer 250 Ohm Potentiometer 10kOhm Capacitor 47 nF Capacitor 47 microF Silicon diode 1n4007 Z-diode 4.7V/1W Transistor bc337 Transistor bc327 Battery holder Universal holder Bimetallic strips,100 cm Conductors/non-conductors Connecting cords Crocodile clips Short circuit plug, black

13281-88

TESS Physics Set Electric/Electronics EEP2

TESS Física manual Electr./Electron. 01169-04 Spanish P1352400

TESS Physics Set Electric/Electronics EEP1

Function and Applications Supplementary equipment set for student experiments Electricity /Electronics TESS EEP1. In connection with EEP1 69 experiments can be performed to the following themes:

Function and Applications Enables the performance of 35 experiments on following themes: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric circuits (9 exp.) Electrical resistance (10 exp.) Electric power and work (1 exp.) Capacitors (3 expe.) Sensors (1 exp.) Diodes (5 exp.) Transistors (7 exp.)

Equipment and technical data The set consists of 30 items following including: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Solid, stackable storage box with moulded foam insert 1 Plug-in board, 4 mm plugs 1 On/off switch 2 Switch, 2-way 2 Lampholder E10 1 Resistor 47 Ohm

excellence in science 168

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric circuits (9 experiments) Electrical resistance (9 exp.) Power and work (2 exp.) Electro-chemistry (6 experiments) Capacitor (3 experiments) Electromagnetism (6 exp.) Electric motor (4 exp.) Induction (3 exp.) Transformer (2 exp.) Self-Induction (3 exp.) Sensors (3 exp.) Diodes (10 exp.) Transistors (9 exp.)

Equipment and technical data This supplementary set consists of 32 components, which can be stored in the box of the basic kit EEP1. 13282-88

2.4 Electricity 2.4.2 Switching unit system Electricity

TESS Physics manual Electricity/Electronics

01169-02

Fundamentals of electricity and electronics, 10 experiments with FG module

Function and Applications Multifunctional and easy adaptable basic set for computer-based analysis of current and voltage characteristics, especially for very fast signal response (500 kHz) and dependance of frequencies for practicals and demonstration. The set contains everything for the performance of the following experiments: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ohm´s law Characterics of semiconductors (Diodes, Transistors) Switch on behaviour of capacitors Switch on behaviour of coils Coil in AC circuit Capacitor in AC circuit Inductance of solenoids Magnetic induction RLC-circuit High-pass and low-pass filters

12111-88

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 169

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Measurement of low resistances

Principle The resistances of various DC conductors are determined by recording the current / voltage characteristic. The resistivity of metal rods and the contact resistance of connecting cords are calculated. Tasks 1. 2.

To plot the current / voltage characteristics of metal rods (copper and aluminium) and to calculate their resistivity. To determine the resistance of various connecting cords by plotting their current / voltage characteristics and calculating the contact resistances.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Ohm's law Resistivity Contact resistance Conductivity Four-wire method of measurement

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410101

excellence in science 170

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Wheatstone bridge

Principle The Wheatstone bridge circuit is used to determine unknown resistances. The total resistance of resistors connected in parallel and in series is measured. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Kirchhoff's laws Conductor Circuit Voltage Resistance Parallel connection Series connection

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 171

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Internal resistance and matching in voltage sources

▪ ▪

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage source Electromotive force (e.m.f.) Terminal voltage No-load operation Short circuit Ohm's law Kirchhoff's laws Power matching

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410300

excellence in science 172

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Temperature dependence of different resistors and diodes with the FG module and Cobra3

Principle The temperature dependence of an electrical parameter (e.g. resistance, conducting-state voltage, blocking voltage) of different components is determined. To do this, the immersion probe set is immersed in a water bath and the resistance is measured at regular temperature intervals. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measurement of the temperature dependence of the resistance of different electrical components. Measurement of the temperature dependence of the conducting state voltage of semiconducting diodes. Measurement of the temperature dependence of the voltage in the Zener and the avalanche effects.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Carbon film resistor Metallic film resistor PTC NTC Z diode Avalanche effect Zener effect Charge carrier generation Free path Mathie's rule

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410415

Temperature dependence of different resistors and diodes with a multimeter P2410401

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 173

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Semiconductor thermogenerator

Principle In a semi-conductor thermogenerator, the no-load voltage and the short-circuit current are measured as a function of the temperature difference. The internal resistance, the Seebeck coefficient and the efficiency are determined. Tasks 1. 2.

To measure no-load voltage Uo and short-circuit current Is at different temperature differences and to determine the Seebeck coefficient. To measure current and voltage at a constant temperature difference but with different load resistors, and to determine the internal resistance Ri from the measured values. To determine the efficiency of energy conversion, from the quantity of heat consumed and the electrical energy produced per unit time.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Seebeck effect (thermoelectric effect) Thermoelectric e.m.f. Efficiency Peltier coefficient Thomson coefficient Seebeck coefficient Direct energy conversion Thomson equations

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410700

excellence in science 174

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Characteristic curve and efficiency of a PEM fuel cell and a PEM electrolyser

Principle In a PEM electrolyser, the electrolyte consists of a proton-conducting membrane and water (PEM = Proton- Exchange-Membrane). When an electric voltage is applied, hydrogen and oxygen are formed. The PEM fuel cell generates electrical energy from hydrogen and oxygen. The electrical properties of the electrolyser and the fuel cell are investigated by recording a current-voltage characteristic line. To determine the efficiency, the gases are stored in small gasometers in order to be able to measure the quantities of the gases generated or consumed. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Recording the characteristic line of the PEM electrolyser. Recording the characteristic line of the PEM fuel cell. Determination of the efficiency of the PEM electrolysis unit. Determination of the efficiency of the PEM fuel cell.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electrolysis Electrode polarisation Decomposition voltage Galvanic elements Faraday's law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2411100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 175

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Faraday's law

Principle The correlation between the amounts of substances transformed in the electrode reaction and the applied charge (amount of electricity) is described by Faraday´s law. Faraday ´s constant, which appears as a proportionality factor, can be determined experimentally from this dependence. Tasks 1.

Determine Faraday´s constant from the dependence of the volumes of hydrogen and oxygen evolved on the applied charge in the hydrolysis of diluted sulphuricacid.

What you can learn about Electrolysis, Coulometry, Charge, Amount of substance, Faraday´s law, Faraday´s contant, Avogadro´s number, General equation of state for ideal gases Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2411200

excellence in science 176

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Second order conductors - electrolysis with the FG module

Principle In this experiment a copper(II) sulphate solution is to be electrolysed using two different materials - graphite electrodes and copper wires. During the electrolyses the current/voltage curves are recorded. Tasks 1.

Measure the correlation between voltage and current on second order conductors(copper (II) sulphate solution using two different materials - graphite electrodes and copper wires.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electrolysis Electrode polarisation Conductivity Ohm's law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2411315

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 177

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Hall effect in p-germanium (with Cobra3)

Principle The resistivity and Hall voltage of a rectangular germanium sample are measured as a function of temperature and magnetic field. The band spacing, the specific conductivity, the type of charge carrier and the mobility of the charge carriers are determined from the measurements. Tasks 1. 2.

The Hall voltage is measured at room temperature and constant magnetic field as a function of the control current and plotted on a graph (measurement without compensation for defect voltage). The voltage across the sample is measured at room temperature and constant control current as a function of the magnetic induction B. The voltage across the sample is measured at constant control current as a function of the temperature. The band spacing of germanium is calculated from the measurements. The Hall voltage UH is measured as a function of the magnetic induction B, at room temperature. The sign of the charge carriers and the Hall constant RH together with the Hall mobility mH and the carrier concentration p are calculated from the measurements. The Hall voltage UH is measured as a function of temperature at constant magnetic induction B and the values are plotted on a graph.

3. 4. 5.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Semiconductor Band theory Forbidden zone Intrinsic conductivity Extrinsic conductivity Valence band Conduction band Lorentz force Magnetic resistance Mobility Conductivity Band spacing Hall coefficient

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2530111

excellence in science 178

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Hall effect in metals

Principle The Hall effect in thin zinc and copper foils is studied and the Hall coefficient determined. The effect of temperature on the Hall voltage is investigated. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The Hall voltage is measured in thin copper and zinc foils. The Hall coefficient is determined from measurements of the current and the magnetic induction. The temperature dependence of the Hall voltage is investigated on the copper sample.

What you can learn about Normal Hall effect, Anomalous Hall effect, Charge carriers, Hall mobility, Electrons, Defect electrons Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2530300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 179

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

The PEM solar hydrogen model

Hall effect module

Function and Applications Hall module with central power supply to provide an adjustable constant current for the sample and for the integrated sample heater

Principle Electrical energy from solar cells supplies an electrolyser. The gases generated by the PEM electrolyser - hydrogen and oxygen - are sent directly to the PEM fuel cell. The electrical energy generated is used to drive a small motor. The solar cells can be irradiated by a 120-watt lamp or sunlight. Literature for this experiment as follows: Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English P1397600

Benefits digital LED display (3 digits, 9mm) to show either the sample current or the sample temperature, sample heater with fully automatic temperature control system to avoid damage to the samples, electronic compensating circuit for Hall voltage offset compensation, RS 232 interface to connect an interface for comfortable data capturing, display and evaluation using a PC, Different boards can be plugged easily and safely into the Hall module which requires only a 12V AC power supply. , The Hall module provides all operating parameters for the samples and displays the sample. Equipment and technical data Max. current of probe: +/- 60 mA, Max. temperature of probe: 175 °C, Power supply: 12 VAC/max.3,5 A, Dimensions: 16x10,5x2,5 cm, Weight: 0,25 kg 11801-00

Hall effect apparatus Carrier boards Hall effect,n-Ge,carrier board 11802-01 Hall effect,p-Ge,carrier board 11805-01 Intrins.conduct.Ge,carrier board 11807-01 Hall effect, Cu, carrier board 11803-00 Hall effect, zinc, carrier board 11804-01 Function and Applications To demonstrate the Hall effect. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Bismuth rod (d =2mm) visibly mounted in a plastic casing. 2 potentiometers (coarse and fine) for easy and accurate zero adjustment. 4 mm sockets for current supply and to detect Hall voltage. Control current: max. 5 A DC. Casing dimensions (mm): 120 x 90 x 30.

06415-00

excellence in science 180

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

High voltage supply unit, 0-10 kV

Cathode-ray tube with slit and fluorescent screen

Fucntion and Applications For demonstration of the deflection of electrons in a magnetic field. Function and Applications For electrostatic experiments and for operation of spectral and gas discharge tubes. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

It supplies 3 continuously variable DC voltages isolated from earth and ground. Two of the voltages are connected in series 0-5 kV DC = total of 0 -10 kV DC. Selectable positive and negative polarity. 3-figure LED display. Outputs short-circuit proof. Special safety sockets. Modern plastic housing, impact resistant, easy to service, light stackable with retractable carrying handle and stand. Internal resistance: approx.5 MOhm. Ripple: < 0.5%. Supply voltage: 230 V. Short circuit current: max. 3 mA. Housing dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Vacuum tube with fluorescent screen and contact electrodes. With base. Tube length: 300 mm. Tube diameter: 50mm.

06680-00

Braun`s tube with socket

13670-93

Cathode-ray tube with shadow cross Function and applications For demonstrating how an oscilloscope tube works. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Function and Applications To demonstrate rectilinear propagation of electron beams. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Tube with folding metal cross inside. Electrodes on metal caps with connecting pins. Tube on a base. Tube length: 300 mm. Tube diameter: 85 mm.

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cathode ray tube with inert gas filling and screen. The tube is fixed to a base with a circuit diagram and 4-mm sockets. Anode: 0...+300 V/1 mA. Heater: 6.3 V/0.5 A. Wehnelt electrode voltage (grid voltage): 0...+/- 50 V. Accelerating voltage: +300 V. Screen diameter: 100 mm. Length of tube: 235 mm

Braun`s tube with socket 06987-00 Power supply for Braun's tube 06986-93

Accessories ▪

Adequate voltage supply: power supply 0.10 kV, (13670.93).

06682-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 181

2.4 Electricity 2.4.3 Electrical conduction

Electrodes for climbing arc discharge in acryl glass housing with adjustable electrode distance

Function and Applications For Demonstration of upward moving electrical arc due to spark discharge and convection current produced. Electric arcs that result from spark discharge are made use of in high voltage technology to balance out overvoltage. Benefits ▪ ▪

Particularly safe thanks to the housing inside an acryl glass tube Easy generation and stabilisation of discharge arks thanks to easy adjustable distance of electrodes.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Isolated setup in acryl glass tube Electrode material: stainless steel, diameter 3mm Base plate: 220 x 220 mm Height: 510 mm Weight: 2.9 kg

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Variable transformer (13532-93) Connecting cord, safety (07337-05) Coil, 75 turns (06511-01) Coil, 12000 turns (06517-01) Iron core, U-shaped (06501-00) Iron core, short 06500-00 Clamping device 06506-00

06539-00

excellence in science 182

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Electric fields and potentials in the plate capacitor

Principle A uniform electric field E _ is produced between the charged plates of a plate capacitor. The strength of the field is determined with the electric field strength meter, as a function of the plate spacing d and the voltage U. The potentialø within the field is measured with a potential measuring probe. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The relationship between voltage and electric field strength is investigated, with constant plate spacing. The relationship between electric field strength and plate spacing is investigated, with constant voltage. In the plate capacitor, the potential is measured with a probe, as a function of position.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Capacitor Electric field Potential Voltage Equipotential lines

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 183

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Charging curve of a capacitor

Principle A capacitor is charged by way of a resistor. The current is measured as a function of time and the effects of capacitance, resistance and the voltage applied are determined. Tasks To measure the charging current over time:

▪ 1. 2. 3.

using different capacitance values C, with constant voltage U and constant resistance R using different resistance values (C and U constant) using different voltages (R and C constant).

To determine the equation representing the current when a capacitor is being charged, from the values measured. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Charging Discharging Time constant Exponential function Half life

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420201

excellence in science 184

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Switch-on behaviour of a capacitor and an inductance with the FG module

Principle To measure the course of current strength and voltage in a capacitance/inductivity in the instant of switching on. The capacitance/inductivity is determined from the measurement curve. Tasks 1. 2.

To measure the course of current strength and voltage in a capacitance in the instant of switching on. The capacitance is determined from the measurement curve. To measure the course of current strength and voltage in inductivity in the instant of switching on. The inductivity is determined from the measurement curve.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Charging Discharging Time constant Exponential function Half life

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420215

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 185

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Capacitance of metal spheres and of a spherical capacitor

Principle Metal spheres with different radii and a spherical capacitor are charged by means of a variable voltage. The induced charges are determined with a measuring amplifier. The corresponding capacitances are deduced from voltage and charge values. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the capacitance of three metal spheres with different diameters. Determination of the capacitance of a spherical capacitor. Determination of the diameters of each test body and calculation of their capacitance values.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage Potential Charge Electric field Electrostatic induction Electrostatic induction constant Capacitance Capacitor Dielectrics

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420300

excellence in science 186

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Coulomb's law/ image charge

Principle A small electrically charged ball is positioned at a certain distance in front of a metal plate lying at earth potential. The surface charge on the plate due to electrostatic induction together with the charged ball forms an electricfield analogous to that which exists between two oppositely charged point charges. The electrostatic force acting on the ball can be measured with a sensitive torsion dynamometer. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Establishment of the relation between the active force and the charge on the ball. Establishment of the relation between force and distance, ball to metal plate. Determination of the electric constant.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric field Electric field strength Electric flux Electrostatic induction Electric constant Surface charge density Dielectric displacement Electrostatic potential

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420401

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 187

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Coulomb potential and Coulomb field of metal spheres

Principle Conducting spheres with different diameters are charged electrically. The static potentials and the accompanying electric field intensities are determined by means of an electric field meter with a potential measuring probe, as a function of position and voltage. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

For a conducting sphere of diameter 2R = 12 cm, electrostatic potential is determined as a function of voltage at a constant distance from the surface of the sphere. For the conducting spheres of diameters 2R = 12 cm and 2R = 4 cm, electrostatic potential at constant voltage is determined as a function of the distance from the surface of the sphere. For both conducting spheres, electricfield strength is determined as a function of charging voltage at three different distances from the surface of the sphere. For the conducting sphere of diameter 2R = 12 cm, electric field strength is determined as a function of the distance from the surface of the sphere at constant charging voltage.

What you can learn about Electric field, Field intensity, Electric flow, Electric charge, Gaussian rule, Surface charge density, Induction, Induction constant, Capacitance, Gradient, Image charge, Electrostatic potential, Potential difference Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420500

excellence in science 188

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Dielectric constant of different materials

Principle The electric constant is determined by measuring the charge of a plate capacitor to which a voltage is applied. The dielectric constant is determined in the same way, with plastic or glass filling the space between the plates. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

The relation between charge Q and voltage U is to be measured using a plate capacitor. The electric constant is to be determined from the relation measured under point 1. The charge of a plate capacitor is to be measured as a function of the inverse of the distance between the plates, under constant voltage. The relation between charge Q and voltage U is to be measured by means of a plate capacitor, between the plates of which different solid dielectric media are introduced. The corresponding dielectric constants are determined by comparison with measurements performed with air between the capacitor plates.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Electric constant Capacitance of a plate capacitor Real charges Free charges Dielectric displacement Dielectric polarisation Dielectric constant

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2420600

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 189

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Electrostatic induction with an electroscope

▪ ▪

Storing charge (4 exp.) Insulators and conductors (4 exp.)

Equipment and technical data The set consists of the 14 items following incl. storage box with foam insert.

Principle Bringing a charged rod close to an electroscope causes separation of charge, whereby attracting charges are more prevalent in the scope than repelling charges, causing the pointer to move towards the rod. This occurs whether the charge on the rod itself is positive or negative. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Electrostatics / Magnetism, DVD 01055-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Elektrostatik 01163-01 German TESS Physics manual Electrostatics 01163-02 English TESS Physics manual Electrostatique 01163-03 French

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electroscope with metal pointer Faraday pail, d = 40 mm, h = 75 mm Polycarbonate plate, 136 x 112 x 1 mm Polypropylene rod, d = 8 mm, l = 175 mm 2 Acrylic resin rod, d = 8mm, l = 175 mm Electrostatic ind. plate, 30 x 60 mm Pendulums, pair, for electrostatics Clip for rods, with cord Rod, stainl. steel, d = 8 mm, l = 175 mm Neon tube Rubber stopper, d = 49/ 41 mm 1 hole Film, transparent, 105 x 148 mm Piezo film, 3 x 60 mm

13240-77

TESS Physics manual Electrostatics 01163-02 TESS advanced Physics set Equipotential lines and electric fields 13029-88 Digital multimeter 2010 07128-00 Power supply 0...12 V DC / 6 V, 12 V AC, 230 Volt 13505-93

Plate capacitor, d 260mm

TESS Física manual Electrostatica 01163-04 Spanish P1084700

TESS Physics Electrostatics EST

Function and Appliations High accuracy capacitor for electrostatic experiments, e. g. to investigate the relation between charge, voltage and capacity on a plate capacitor, to measure the dielectric constant and for precise determination of the electrostatic induction constant. Equipment and technical data ▪

Function and Applications Equipment set for the performance of 16 student experiments on the following topics: ▪ ▪ ▪

Contact electricity (2 exp.) Electrostatic force (3 exp.) Electrostatic induction (3 exp.)

excellence in science 190

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The fixed plate is highly insulated whereas the mobile plate is connected conductingly to the support. Highly precise adjustment of distance by means of a spindle drive. Distance is read on a vernier scale with a precision of 1/10 mm. Distance between plates: 0.70 mm. Reading accuracy: 1/10 mm. Plate diameter: 260 mm. Plate thickness: 6 mm.

06220-00

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

Electric-field meter

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Scale with zero in the middle with automatic middle positioning of pointer. Automatic switch-off of battery after approx. 50 min. Operatable and readable also from the back. Extensive overload protection in all measuring ranges even when line voltage is falsely applied. Eliminates the need for fuses and cutouts.

Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications For the measurement of electrostatic fields derivation-free and with the correct sign, as well as for high-impedance voltage and potential measurement. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Field-strength measuring range 1/10/100 kV/m Voltage measuring range 10/100/1000 V Input impedance 10 teraohms Precision: 3% Supply voltage: 14...18 V DC Analog output: +/- 10 V Metal casing on stem Chopper wheel and corresponding voltage measurement prefix, gilded Dimensions (mm): 70 x 70 x 150 Interface PC (RS 232)

Electric field meter 11500-10 Software f. electrofieldmeter 14406-61 Electrometer Amplifier 13621-00 Power supply 12V AC/500 mA 11074-93

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13820-00

Multimeter ADM1, demo., analog

Function and Applications Switchable, overload protected moving coil instrument for measuring direct and alternating voltage and current. Passive instrument.

Multimeter ADM2, demo., analoque

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Independent of a mains, battery or accumulator supply of power. Separate selection measuring range and type of current for clear settings. Reading of measured values made easy by automatic call-up of a scale with 30 or 100 divisions when the measuring range is selected. Scale is clearly visible from a distance, scale length 200 mm, digit height 20 mm. Extensive overload protection. System Moving coil measuring system (core magnet).

Equipement and technical data

Function and Applications Electronic analogue multimeter for measuring direct and alternating voltage and current, and for measuring resistance. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Accuracy Class 1.5 for DC, Class 2.5 for AC. Frequency range 10 Hz...10 kHz. Overload Voltage measuring ranges min. 230 V. Current measuring ranges 1 A in measuring ranges to 0.3 A 15 A in measuring ranges to 10A. Dimensions (mm) 320 × 130 × 385 Weight approx. 5 kg

13810-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 191

2.4 Electricity 2.4.4 Electrostatics, electric field

High voltage supply unit, 0-10 kV

Function and Applications For electrostatic experiments and for operation of spectral and gas discharge tubes. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13670-93

excellence in science 192

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Determination of the earth's magnetic field

Principle A constant magnetic field, its magnitude and direction known, is superimposed on the unknown earth magnetic field. The earth-magnetic field can then be calculated from the magnitude and direction of the resulting flux density. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The magnetic flux of a pair of Helmholtz coils is to be determined and plotted graphically as a function of the coil current. The Helmholtz system calibration factor is calculated from the slope of the line. The horizontal component of the earth-magnetic field is determined through superimposition of the Helmholtz field. The angle of inclination must be determined in order to calculate the vertical component of the earth-magnetic field.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Magnetic inclination and declination Isoclinic lines Isogenic lines Inclinometer Magnetic flow density Helmholtz coils

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 193

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetic field of single coils/ Biot-Savart's law with a teslameter

Principle The magnetic field along the axis of wire loops and coils of different dimensions is measured with a teslameter (Hall probe). The relationship between the maximum field strength and the dimensions is investigated and a comparison is made between the measured and the theoretical effects of position. Tasks 1.

To measure the magnetic flux density in the middle of various wire loops with the Hall probe and to investigate its dependence on the radius and number of turns. To determine the magnetic field constant. To measure the magnetic flux density along the axis of long coils and compare it with theoretical values.

2. 3.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wire loop Biot-Savart's law Hall effect Magnetic field Induction Magnetic flux density

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430201

Magnetic field of single coils/ Biot-Savart's law with Cobra3 P2430215

excellence in science 194

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetic field of paired coils in a Helmholtz arrangement with a teslameter

Principle The spatial distribution of the field strength between a pair of coils in the Helmholtz arrangement is measured. The spacing at which a uniform magnetic field is produced is investigated and the superposition of the two individual fields to form the combined field of the pair of coils is demonstrated. Tasks 1.

To measure the magnetic flux density along the z-axis of the flat coils when the distance between them alpha = R(R = radius of the coils) and when it is larger and smaller than this. To measure the spatial distribution of the magnetic flux density when the distance between coils alpha = R, using the rotational symmetry of the set-up: a) measurement of the axial component Bz; b) measurement of radial component Br. To measure the radial components B´r and B"r of the two individual coils in the plane midway between them and to demonstrate the overlapping of the two fields at Br = 0.

2. 3.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Wire loop Flat coils Biot-Savart's law Hall effect"

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430301

Magnetic field of paired coils in a Helmholtz arrangement with Cobra3 P2430315

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 195

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field

Principle A conductor loop carrying a current in a uniform magnetic field experiences a torque. This is determined as a function of the radius, of the number of turns and the current in the conductor loop and of the strength of the external field. Tasks Determination of the torque due to a magnetic moment in a uniform magnetic field, as a function 1. 2. 3.

of the strength of the magneticfield, of the angle between the magnetic field in the magnetic moment of the strength of the magnetic moment.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Torque Magnetic flux Uniform magnetic field Helmholtz coils

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430400

excellence in science 196

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetic field outside a straight conductor

Principle A current which flows through one or two neighbouring straight conductors produces a magnetic field around them. The dependences of these magnetic fields on the distance from the conductor and on the current are determined. Tasks Determination of the magnetic field 1. 2. 3. 4.

of a straight conductor as a function of the current, of a straight conductor as a function of the distance from the conductor, of two parallel conductors, in which the current is flowing in the same direction, as a function of the distance from one conductor on the line joining the two conductors, of two parallel conductors, in which the current is flowing in opposite directions, as a function of the distance from one conductor on the line joining the two conductors.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Magnetic flux Induction Superimposition of magnetic fields

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430500

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 197

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetic field inside a conductor

Principle A current which produces a magnetic field is passed through an electrolyte.This magnetic field inside the conductor is determined as a function of position and current. Tasks Determination of the magnetic field inside a conductor as a function 1. 2.

of the current in the conductor, of the distance from the axis of the conductor.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Magnetic flux Induction Current density Field strength

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430600

excellence in science 198

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Ferromagnetic hysteresis with Cobra3

Principle A magnetic field is generated in a ring-shaped iron core by a continuous adjustable direct current applied to two coils. The field strength Η and the flux density B are measured and the hysteresis recorded. The remanence and the coercive field strength of two different iron cores can be compared. Tasks 1.

Record the hysteresis curve for a massive iron core and for a laminated one.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Induction Magnetic flux coil Magnetic field strength Magnetic field of coils Remanence Coercive field strength

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430711

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 199

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Magnetostriction with the Michelson interferometer

Principle With the aid of two mirrors in a Michelson arrangement, light is brought to interference. Due to the magnetostrictive effect, one of the mirrors is shifted by variation in the magnetic field applied to a sample, and the change in the interference pattern is observed. Tasks 1. 2.

Construction of a Michelson interferometer using separate optical components. Testing various ferromagnetic materials (iron and nickel) as well as a non-ferromagnetic material (copper), with regard to their magnetostrictive properties.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Diffraction index Speed of light Phase Virtual light source Ferromagnetic material Weiss molecular magnetic fields Spin-orbit coupling

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430800

excellence in science 200

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

TESS physics set magnetism MAG

Teslameter

Function and Applications Function and Applications Basic device set for the implementation of 11 student experiments on the following subjects: Magnetic interactions (3 experiments) Magnetic influence (3 experiments) Magnetic fields (5 experiments) Benefits Complete device set: Simple implementation of the experiments Stable storage: Long-life, easy to store (stackable), rapid control-check for completeness (foamed-material insert) Experimentation literature available for students and teachers: Minimum preparation time Coordinated with the training plans: All subject areas covered Equipment and technical data The device set consists of all components necessary for the experiments. Stable, stackable safekeeping box with device-shaped, foamed-material insert. Spare parts Magnetic field sensor (06309-00): Cardan-supported for the three-dimensional scanning of magnetic fields, freely pivoting in space, small bar magnet with colored pole identification, magnet dimensions (mm): 3 x 3 x 25, grip length (mm): 95 Earth globe model, d = 60 mm (06308-00): Wooden ball with bore for the insertion of the bar magnet (063170-00) for the model-related illustration of the earth field; pole identified through printed "N" and "S"; automatic magnetic fixing of the bar magnet in the bore by two rings of ferromagnetic material. TESS Physics Set Magnetism MAG 13230-77 Earth globe model f.magnet 8x60mm 06308-00 Magnet, d 8mm, l 60mm 06317-00 Magnetic field sensor 06309-00 TESS Physics manual Magnetism 01162-02

For the measurement of magnetic constant and changing fields. Benefits ▪ ▪

Calibrated so that no calibration magnets or coils are necessary Shockproof plastic casing with zero-point actuator, diode input socket, 4 mm outlet sockets, handle and mounting feet

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

3 1/2 digit, 20 mm LED display with sign representation Measuring ranges: 20...2000 mT Resolution: 0.01 m Precision: 2% Limit frequency: 5 kHz Analog output: 0...+/- 2 DC Supply voltage: 230 V Dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168

Necessary accessories ▪

Tangential and/or axial Hall-effect probe

Teslameter, digital 13610-93 Hall probe, axial 13610-01 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02

Power supply variable 15 VAC/ 12 VDC/ 5 A

AC output: 0...15 V/5 A DC output: 0...12 V/5 A

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 201

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. current (short term): 10 A Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A Max. current (short term): 10 A Max. power: 150 VA Fuses: one 6 A and two 10 A Supply voltage: 230 V AC dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168

13530-93

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Two identical coils each on standbase with numbered 4mm sockets Removable busbars with holder for narrow beam tube Coils can be used indivdually and at any distance. Coil diameter: 400 mm Number of windings: each coil 154 Coil resistance: 2.1 Ohm Max. current per coil: 5 A Max. flux density (5A): 3.5 mT

Helmholtz coils, one pair 06960-00 Power supply, universal 13500-93

Magnetometer

Cobra3 Measuring module Tesla

Function and Applications To determine the direction of the magnetic field of the earth and to measure magnetic inclination. Also to determine the magnetic field of a conductor through which a current flows. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Magnetic needle in rotating mount in a swivelling bow with partial circle. Bow has current supply sockets. On a stem, with base. Length of needle: 85 mm. Scale subdivision: in steps of 2°.

Function and Applications Plug-in module for a precise measurement of magnetic DC and AC fields. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

06355-00

DIN-socket for Hall probes (tangential or axial) Detection of the field direction (sign) in the case of DC fields Software-controlled zero adjustment and compensation of interferencefields up to ± 1 T Already calibrated, i.e. no calibration magnet necessary.

Equipment and technical data

Helmholtz coils, one pair

Measurements possible from 5 µT to 1T.▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: ± 10 mT, ± 100 mT, ± 1 T Max. resolution 5 µT (12 bit) Compensation ± 1 T in all measuring ranges Dimensions (mm): 100 x 50 x 40

Measuring module, Tesla 12109-00 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software Cobra3-Force/ Tesla 14515-61 Function and Applications Helmholtz coils, one pair to generate a homogeneous magnetic field. Especially with narrowbeam tube for e/m determination. Equipment and technical data

excellence in science 202

2.4 Electricity 2.4.5 Magnetostatics, magnetic field

Cobra4 Sensor Tesla, ± 1 Tesla

He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder

Function and Applications Function and Applications Sensor out of the Cobra4 family to measure the magneticfield strength in DC and AC fields Benefits ▪

This Sensor is suitable for the connection oft the Hall probe, axial or Hall probe, tangential

Equipment and technical data Measuring Ranges DC field:- ± 1 T ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Resolution ± 1 mT- ± 100 mT Resolution ± 100 µT- ± 10 mT Resolution ± 10 µT- every range can be compensated up to the maximum value oft the measuringrange Accuracy approx. ± 2 % of the maximum value of the measuringrange

Measuring Ranges AC field: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency: 15 Hz ... 1 kHz- 1 T Resolution 1mT- 100 mT Resolution 100 µT- 10 mT Resolution 10 µT- AC fields measurements are of RMS type- no compensation accuracy approx. ± 3% of the maximum value of the measuring range. Max. data rate: 5 Hz Dimensions (L x W x H in mm) 60 x 70 x 35 Mass (g) 100

He/Ne laser with fixed connection cable with HV jack for laser power pack. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wave length 632.8 nm Modes TEMOO Degree of polarisation 1:500 Beam diameter 0.81 mm Beam divergence 1 mrad Max. power drift max. 2.5%/ 8 h Service life ca. 15000 h Coaxial cylinder casing Ø = 44.2mm, l = 400 mm Incl. 2 holders with three-point bearing and 2 setting collars

08701-00

Linear Levitation Track, length: 70 cm

Required accessory ▪

Hallprobe

Cobra4 Sensor Tesla, ± 1 Tesla 12652-00 Cobra4 Wireless-Link 12601-00 Cobra4 Wireless Manager 12600-00 Software Cobra4 - Single user and school licence 14550-61 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02

Function and Applications A magnetic levitation system uses magnetic fields to levitate and accelerate a vehicle along a track. Similar systems are in use today as high-speed trains and some of the newer, radical-ride roller coasters. The PHYWE Levitation Tracks use the power of a solar cell panel to propel the PHYWE Solar Cart with the help of a linear motor. Thereby, the Solar Cart hovers above the magnetic track. Equipment and technical data This set consists of: ▪

Linear levitation track with a length of approximately 70 cm, built on 2 pillars, with transparent guide and bumpers

▪

2 stylish Halogen lamps integrated in the track for propulsion of the solar cart

▪

2 carts (1 x solar cart and 1 x graphite cart for manual demonstration)

11330-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 203

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Current balance/ force acting on a current-carrying conductor with an amperemeter

Principle The force acting on a current-carrying conductor loop in a uniform magnetic field (Lorentz force) is measured with a balance. Conductor loops of various sizes are suspended in turn from the balance, and the Lorentz force is determined as a function of the current and magnetic induction. The uniform magnetic field is generated by an electromagnet. The magnetic induction can be varied with the coil current. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The direction of the force is to be determined as a function of the current and the direction of the magnetic field. The force F is to be measured, as a function of the current IL in the conductor loop, with a constant magnetic induction B and for conductor loops of various sizes. The magnetic induction is to be calculated. The force F is to be measured, as a function of the coil current IM, for a conductor loop. In the range being considered, the magnetic induction B is, with sufficient accuray, proportional to the coil current IM.

What you can learn about Uniform magnetic field, Magnetic induction (formerly magnetic-flux densitiy), Lorentz force, Moving charges, Current Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410601

Current balance/ force acting on a current-carrying conductor with Cobra3 P2410615

excellence in science 204

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Magnetic moment in the magnetic field

of the strength of the magneticfield, of the angle between the magnetic field in the magnetic moment of the strength of the magnetic moment.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Torque Magnetic flux Uniform magnetic field Helmholtz coils

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 205

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Magnetic field inside a conductor

of the current in the conductor, of the distance from the axis of the conductor.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Magnetic flux Induction Current density Field strength

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2430600

excellence in science 206

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Transformer

Principle An alternating voltage is applied to one of two coils (primary coil) which are located on a common iron core. The voltage induced in the second coil (secondary coil) and the current flowing in it are investigated as functions of the number of turns in the coils and of the current flowing in the primary coil. Tasks The secondary voltage on the open circuited transformer is determined as a function

▪ 1. 2. 3.

of the number of turns in the primary coil, of the number of turns in the secondary coil, of the primary voltage. The short-circuit current on the secondary side is determined as a function

▪ 1. 2. 3.

of the number of turns in the primary coil, of the number of turns in the secondary coil, of the primary current. With the transformer loaded, the primary current is determined as a function

▪ 1. 2. 3.

of the secondary current, of the number of turns in the secondary coil, of the number of turns in the primary coil.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Induction Magnetic flux Loaded transformer Unloaded transformer Coil

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 207

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Magnetic induction

Principle A magnetic field of variable frequency and varying strength is produced in a long coil. The voltages induced across thin coils which are pushed into the long coil are determined as a function of frequency, number of turns, diameter and field strength. Tasks Determination of the induction voltage as a function

▪ 1. 2. 3. 4.

of of of of

the the the the

strength of the magneticfield, frequency of the magneticfield, number of turns of the induction coil, cross-section of the induction coil.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell's equations Electrical eddy field Magnetic field of coils Coil Magnetic flux Induced voltage

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440201

Magnetic induction with the FG module and Cobra3 P2440215

excellence in science 208

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Inductance of solenoids

Principle A square wave voltage of low frequency is applied to oscillatory circuits comprising coils and capacitors to produce free, damped oscillations. The values of inductance are calculated from the natural frequencies measured, the capacitance being known. Tasks To connect coils of different dimensions (length, radius, number of turns) with a known capacitance C to form an oscillatory circuit. From the measurements of the natural frequencies, to calculate the inductances of the coils and determine the relationships between:

▪ ▪ 1. 2. 3.

inductance and number of turns inductance and length inductance and radius.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Lenz's law Self-inductance Solenoids Transformer Oscillatory circuit Resonance Damped oscillation Logarithmic decrement Q factor

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440301

Inductance of solenoids with Cobra3 P2440311

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 209

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Coil in the AC circuit

Principle The coil is connected in a circuit with a voltage source of variable frequency. The impedance and phase displacements are determined as functions of frequency. Parallel and series impedances are measured. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination Determination Determination circuit. Determination

of the impedance of a coil as a function of frequency. of the inductance of the coil. of the phase displacement between the terminal voltage and total current as a function of the frequency in the of the total impedance of coils connected in parallel and in series.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Inductance Kirchhoff´s laws Maxwell´s equations a.c. impedance phase displacement

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440401

Coil in the AC circuit with Cobra3 and the FG module P2440411

excellence in science 210

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Capacitor in the AC circuit

Principle A capacitor is connected in a circuit with a variable-frequency voltage source. The impedance and phase displacement are determined as a function of frequency and of capacitance. Parallel and series impedances are measured. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the impedance of a capacitor as a function of frequency. Determination of the phase displacement between the terminal voltage and total current as a function of the frequency in the circuit. Determination of the total impedance of capacitors connected in parallel and in series.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Capacitance Kirchhoff's laws Maxwell's equations AC impedance Phase displacement

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440501

Capacitor in the AC circuit with Cobra3 and the FG module P2440515

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 211

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

RLC circuit

Principle The current and voltage of parallel and series-tuned circuits are investigated as a function of frequency. Q-factor and band-width are determined. Tasks Determination of the frequency performance of a Series-tuned circuit for 1. 2. 3.

voltage resonance without damping resistor, current resonance without damping resistor, current resonance with damping resistor.

parallel-tuned circuit for 1. 2. 3.

current resonance without parallel resistor, voltage resonance without parallel resistor voltage resonance with parallel resistor.

What you can learn about Series-tuned circuit, Parallel-tuned circuit, Resistance, Capacitance, Inductance, Capacitor, Coil, Phase displacement, Q factor, Band-width, Loss resistance, Damping Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440601

RLC circuit with Cobra3 and the FG module P2440611

excellence in science 212

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Rectifier circuits

Principle The ripple of the output voltage of various rectifier circuits is measured as a function of the load current strength and the charging capacitance. The characteristics of a voltage stabilizer and of a multiplier are investigated. Tasks Using the half-wave rectifier: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

to to to to to

display the output voltage (without charging capacitor) on the oscilloscope measure the diode current ID as a function of the output current strength IO (with the charging capacitor) measure the ripple component UACpp of the output voltage as a function of the output current (C = constant) measure the ripple as a function of the capacitance (IO = constant) measure the output voltage UO as a function of the input voltage Ui (IO= 0).

Using the bridge rectifier: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

to to to to to

display the output voltage (without charging capacitor) on the oscilloscope measure the current through one diode, ID , as a function of the output current Io (with the charging capacitor) measure the ripple of the output voltage as a function of the output current (C = constant) measure the ripple as a function of the capacitance (Io = constant) measure the output voltage as a function of the input voltage.

To measure the voltage at the charging capacitor, UC , and the output voltage of a stabilized voltage source as a function of the input voltage Ui . To measure the output voltage of a voltage multiplier circuit as a function of the input voltage. What you can learn about Half-wave rectifier, Full-wave rectifier, Graetz rectifier, Diode and Zener diode, Avalanche effect, Charging capacitor, Ripple, r.m.s. value, Internal resistance, Smoothing factor, Ripple voltage, Voltage stabilisation, Voltage doubling Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440700

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 213

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

RC filters

Principle The frequency response of simple RC filters is recorded by point-by-point measurements and the sweep displayed on the oscilloscope. Tasks To record the frequency response of the output voltage of

▪ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

a a a a a

high-pass filter low-pass filter band-pass filter Wien-Robinson bridge parallel-T filter, point by point and to display the sweep on the oscilloscope.

To investigate the step response of

▪ 1. 2.

a differentiating network an integrating network

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

High-pass Low-pass Wien-Robinson bridge Parallel-T filters Differentiating network Integrating network Step response Square wave Transfer function

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440800

excellence in science 214

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

High-pass and low-pass filters

Principle A coil, a capacitor, an ohmic resistance and combinations of these components are investigated for their filter characteristics as a function of frequency. The phase displacement of the filters is determined also as a function of frequency. Tasks Determination of the ratio of output voltage to input voltage with the

▪ 1. 2. 3. 4. ▪ ▪

RC/CR network, RL/LR network, CL/LC network, Two CR networks connected in series Determination of the phase displacement with the RC/CR network. Determination of the phase displacement with two CR networks connected in series.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Circuit Resistance Capacitance Inductance Capacitor Coil Phase displacement Filter Kirchhoff's laws Bode diagram

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440901

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 215

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

High-pass and low-pass filters with the FG module

▪ 1. 2. 3. 4. ▪ ▪

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Circuit Resistance Capacitance Inductance Capacitor Coil Phase displacement Filter Kirchhoff's laws Bode diagram

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2440915

excellence in science 216

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

RLC measuring bridge

Principle Ohmic resistances, inductances and capacitances are determined in a Wheatstonebridge circuit operated on AC. Balancing is done aurally through headphones, using the high sensitivity of the human ear. Tasks To determine

▪ 1. 2. 3.

ohmic resistances inductances capacitances with the Wheatstonebridge, using bridge balancing.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wheatstone bridge Inductive and capacitive reactance Ohmic resistance Impedance Kirchhoff's laws

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2441000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 217

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Resistance, phase shift and power in AC circuits

Principle Series circuits containing self-inductances or capacitances and ohmic resistances are investigated as a function of frequency. Measuring the electrical magnitudes with a work or power measurement instrument, real power or apparent power can be displayed directly. Tasks Series circuit of self-inductance and resistor (real coil)

▪ 1. 2. 3.

Investigation of impedance and phase shift as a function of frequency Investigation of the relation between real power and current intensity Determination of self-inductance and ohmic resistance Series circuit of capacitor and resistor

▪ 1. 2. 3.

Investigation of impedance and phase shift as a function of frequency Investigation of the relation between real power and current intensity Determination of capacitance and ohmic resistance

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Impedance Phase shift Phasor diagram Capacitance Self-inductance

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2441100

excellence in science 218

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Induction impulse

Principle A permanent magnet falls with different velocities through a coil. The change in the magnetic flux Φ generates an induced voltage impulse. The induced voltage impulse USS is recorded with a computer interface system. Depending on the polarity of the permanent magnet the induced voltage impulse is negative or positive. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Measurement of the induced voltage impulse USS and the falling magnet's velocity. Evaluation of the induced voltage impulse USS as a function of the magnet's velocity. Calculation of the magnetic flux induced by the falling magnet as a function of the magnet's velocity.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Law of induction Magnetic flux Maxwell's equations

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2441211

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 219

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Coupled resonant circuits

Principle The Q factor of oscillating circuits is determined from the bandwidth and by the Pauli method. In inductively coupled circuits (band-pass filters) the coupling factor is determined as a function of the coil spacing. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the dissipation factor and the quality factor Q from the bandwidth of oscillating circuits. Determination of the dissipation factor and Q factor of oscillating circuits from the resonant frequency, the capacitance Ctot. and the parallel conductance Gp determined by the Pauli method. Determination of the coupling factor k and the bandwidth Δ f of a band-pass filter as a function of the coil spacing s.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Resonance Q factor Dissipation factor Bandwidth Critical or optimum coupling Characteristic impedance Pauli method Parallel conductance Band-pass filter Sweep

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450200

excellence in science 220

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Coupled resonant circuits

Principle: The Q factor of oscillating circuits is determined from the band width and by the Pauli method. In inductively coupled circuits (band-pass filters) the coupling factor is determined as a function of the coil spacing. Tasks: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determine the dissipation factor t and k and the quality factor Q from the band width of oscillating circuits. Determine the dissipation factor and Q factor of oscillating circuits from the resonant frequency , the capacitance Ctot and the parallel conductance Gp by the Pauli method. Determine the coupling factor k and the band width of a band-pass filter as a function of the coil spacing s. Analyse and verify the measurements using the measure analysis software.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Resonance Q factor Dissipation factor Bandwidth Critical or optimum coupling Characteristic impedance Pauli method Parallel conductance Band-pass filter Sweep

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450201

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 221

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Self-induction when switching a circuit on

Transformer for student experiments

Function and Applications Principle A coil is located in a DC circuit. When the circuit is closed, the magnetic field of the coil builds up and generates a self-induction voltage which counteracts the increase. An incandescent lamp in the circuit lights up only gradually. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronik 01169-01 German TESS Physics manual Electricity/Electronics 01169-02 English TESS Física manual Electr./Electron. 01169-04 Spanish P1356200

Coils for student experiments

U-core (07832-00) and yoke (07833-00) are laminated and composed of transformer plates. They are both put together to a closed transformer core with the clamping bolt (07834-00) and two reactance coils, for student experiments. Optionally available brass pins (07838-01) prevent slipping of the yoke. The yoke alone can be employed as an iron core for the reactance coils for student experiments, or in combination with the pressure part (07833-03) as an electromechanical functional model (e.g. solenoid valve, stamp mechanism). The ring conduit (07835-00) can be displaced to the U-core and is suitable for maximum-current melting experiments. U-core 07832-00 Yoke 07833-00 Compression element, for 07833.00 07833-03 Circular trough 07835-00 Brass pins, d 3mm, l 35mm, 2 pcs 07838-01

Fundamentals of electricity and electronics, 10 experiments with FG module

Function and Applications For student experiments with electromagnetism. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Coil casings of shock proof plastic with two 4 mm sockets 19 mm apart. On cover coloured according to the number of windings. Coil flanges with printed symbol or winding direction. Suitable for U-core (07832.00), yoke (07833.00) and small notch bearing (07874.00).

Multifunctional and easy adaptable basic set for computer-based analysis of current and voltage characteristics, especially for very fast signal response (500 kHz) and dependance of frequencies for practicals and demonstration. The set contains everything for the performance of the following experiments:

Coil,8 turns 07828-00 Coil, 400 turns 07829-01 Coil, 800 turns 07829-03 Coil, 1600 turns 07830-01 Coil, 20000 turns 07831-01

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

excellence in science 222

Function and Applications

Ohm´s law Characterics of semiconductors (Diodes, Transistors) Switch on behaviour of capacitors Switch on behaviour of coils Coil in AC circuit Capacitor in AC circuit

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Inductance of solenoids Magnetic induction RLC-circuit High-pass and low-pass filters

Electromagnet w/o pole shoes

12111-88

Measuring module function generator 12111-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Electromagnetic-force apparatus

Function and Applications Electromagnet w/o pole shoes for generation of strong magneticfields together with differently shaped pole pieces. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

U-shaped iron core with coils for parallel and series use. Clamping device with threaded drive for sensitive air gap adjustment with pole piece 06480.02 Turns per coil: 842 Admissible permanent current: 4 A Max. current: 5 A (short term) Resistance per coil: 2.66 Ohm Flux density (for l=5A) with 2 pole pieces 06480.02 with 2.5 mm air gap: approx.1.3T Weight: approx. 17 kg Dimensions: 350 x 140 x 180 mm

06480-01

Field coil, 750 mm, 485 turns/m Function and Applications Plunger electromagnet to demonstrate electromagnetic forces. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Both pole pieces have handles, so that two persons can try to overcome the electromagnetic force generated by a 1.5 V single cell battery. Two holding shackles securely take up the forces released when the parts come apart. With holder for single cell battery. Holding force: approx. 600 N. Pole piece diameter: 70 mm.

06481-00

Function and Applications Single-layer cylincrical coil for determination of the electromagnetic induction. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Length of field coil: 75 cm. Turns per meter: 485. Inductance: 1 mH. Ohmic resistance: 0.3 Ohm. Current: max. 8 A.

11001-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 223

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

Induction coils

Power supply variable 15 VAC/ 12 VDC/ 5 A

Function and Applications Function and Applications

Standard heavy duty power supply unit for low voltage.

For the investigation of electromagnetic induction in combination with the field coil 750 mm (11001-00), as well as for the preparation of conformity to magnetic field laws in long reactance coils. Single-layer winding on plastic hollow cylinder with flanges. Flange matching in field coil (11001-00). The reactance coils (11006-01...11006-06) can be ordered under the set number (11006-88).

Supplies unit for continuously adjustable DC and AC voltages & 2 frequently required fixed voltages

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Single-layer coil on plastic hollow cylinder with flanges with 4 mm sockets Compatible with field coil 75 cm

Induction coils, 1 set 11006-88 Induction coil,300 turns,dia.40mm 11006-01 Induction coil,300 turns,dia.32mm 11006-02 Induction coil,300 turns,dia.25mm 11006-03 Induction coil,200 turns,dia.40mm 11006-04 Induction coil,100 turns,dia.40mm 11006-05 Induction coil,150 turns,dia.25mm 11006-06 Induction coil, 75 turns,dia.25mm 11006-07

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

AC output: 0...15 V/5 A DC output: 0...12 V/5 A Max. current (short term): 10 A Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A Max. current (short term): 10 A Max. power: 150 VA Fuses: one 6 A and two 10 A Supply voltage: 230 V AC dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168

13530-93

LF amplifier, 220 V

Function and Applications For amplifying direct and alternating voltage up to 100 kHz. Can be used for induction experiments and for examining acoustic and electromagnetic fields. Signal output for the amplified measured signal. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Effective value output for display of the effective value of the signal output voltage. Power amplifier 12.5 W for weak acoustic frequency signals to control low resistance loudspeakers. For signals from frequency generators or computer interfaces. Amplification is continuously adjustable.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

excellence in science 224

Ampl. factor: 0.1...10000, continuously adjustable Input impedance: 50 kOhm/ AC, 100 kOhm/ D Input voltage: -10 V...+10 V Frequency range: 3.5 Hz....200 kHz, Accuracy of amplification factor: < 5% amplification factor

2.4 Electricity 2.4.6 Electromagnetism, induction, Lorentz force

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Output voltage: 10 Veff Nominal final res.: 8 Ohm signal output, 1 kOhm RMS output Load capacity: Permanently short-circuit proof Offset: Voltage compensation with potentiometer Mains supply 230 V AC/ 50...60 Hz Casing dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168

Induction coil,spark l 70 mm

13625-93

Power frequency generator, 10 Hz - 1 MHz

Function and Applicatios Induction coil on base plate with 4 mm connecting sockets for input voltage. Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications Sinus and rectangular signal generator with signal and power output for optimal adaptation to different experimental circuits. Benfits ▪ ▪ ▪

Large frequency range, frequencies can be continuously adjusted to five decade areas Output for sinus and regtangular signals Power output for sinus

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

With hammer interrupter and extinguishing capacitor. Identification of output voltage polarity. Maximum admissible primary voltage: 8 V-. Dimensions (mm): 270 × 150 × 230.

07591-00

Variable transformer, 25 VAC/ 20 VDC, 12 A

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Demonstative frequency display with 4 digit LED display Supplementary headphone and loudspeaker connector jack

Signal output: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 6 V Power: 1 W Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.2%)

Power output: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 18 V Power: 10 W Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.3%)

Input: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Input voltage range: Up = 0...1V Electric strength: Up < 30V Input resistance: 50 kOhm Required power: max. 70 VA Dimensions (mm): 370 x 236 x 168

13650-93

AC output: 0...25 V/12 A DC output: 0...20 V/12 A Max. current (short term): 13 A Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A Max. current (short term): 10 A Max. power: 375 VA Fuses: one 13 A and two 10 A supply voltage: 230 V AC dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 234

13531-93

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 225

2.4 Electricity 2.4.7 Electric motor/generator teaching systems

Generation of an alternating voltage, rectification and smoothing

The shunt motor

Principle An alternating voltage is induced in acoil in the (alternating) field of aperiodically moving magnet. Thecharacteristic of a diode to allowelectric current only to pass in onedirection is used to rectify the inducedalternating voltage. A capacitor that isswitched in parallel to the load(resistance) smoothes the rectifiedalternating voltage. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsph채nomene 01330-01 German TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English

P1331360

Demo advanced Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronikauf der Tafel (ET) 01005-01 German

The permanent magnet DC motor

Electricity/Electronics on the Magnetic Board, Handbook 01005-02 English P1398700

Conversion of electrical energy into mechanical energy Principle Electric motors for not too high powerand simple dynamos are frequently basedon the basic principle that anelectromagnet rotates in the field of apermanent magnet (or several of them). Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsph채nomene 01330-01 German TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra4 Mechanik, W채rme, Elektrik / Elektronik 01332-01 German TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02 English P1376260

excellence in science 226

Principle A motor that raises a load, i.e. converts electrical energy into mechanical energy, is a familiar everyday sight. The special feature of this set-up is that it can be used to generate electrical energy again directly from the descending weight. That electrical energy illuminates a small lamp.

2.4 Electricity 2.4.7 Electric motor/generator teaching systems

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik Handbuch Elektrik/Elektronik 01169-01 German

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electricity, current ± 6 A/ voltage ± 30V

TESS Physics manual Electricity/Electronics 01169-02 English TESS Física manual Electr./Electron. 01169-04 Spanish P1353700

Electrical energy from wind energy

Function and Applications Principle Experiment using a model to generate electrical energy with the help of a windmill. A lamp is connected to the wind generator to act as a load and the brightness of the lamp is observed for various different wind speeds. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS, DVD 01000-00 Software interTESS Applied Science, Renewable Energy, DVD 01081-00 P9515100

The sensor has a voltage difference input. Simultaneous measurement of current and voltage is possible.

Equipment and technical data Measuring range: ▪ ▪

Voltage: -30...30 V Current: -6...6 A

Resolution: ▪ ▪

Voltage: 15 mV Current: 3 mA

Internal resistances: ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage: 1 MOhm Current: 33 mOhm Weight: 100 g

12644-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 227

2.4 Electricity 2.4.7 Electric motor/generator teaching systems

TESS advanced physics set electric motor/ generator

Power supply 0...12 V DC / 6 V, 12 V AC, 230 Volt

Function and Applications Modular system for student experiments to work out physical and technical basic relations common to electric motors, generators and transformers. This system, which consists of single parts, allows to set up different function models. Following experiments can be carried out: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Disassembling of an electric motor and examination of its components (stator, coil, rotary coil in the magnetic field, current inversion, brush contacts). Direct current motor with permanent stator magnets and rotating electromagnets. Alternating current synchronous motor Series-wound motor. Shunt motor. Alternating current generator. Direct current generator. Transformer.

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Simple design of all components, so that the student can easily recognise their function. The possibility to set up function models gradually, so that functional relations between components can be understood. No tools required for assembly.

Equipment and technical data ▪

The system contains following parts: base plate, two pole pieces, permanent magnet, two coils, iron core, axle with current inversion, bearing carrier, two brush springs, two connecting cables with 2 mm plug pins, two reducing plugs for adaptation to the usual connecting cables with 4 mm plugs, brass driving axle, driving belt.

07880-00

excellence in science 228

Stabilised Shortcircuit proof Output voltage: 1...12 V DC 6 VAC, 12 VA Crated current: 2 A/ 5 A Ripple: approx. 1 MV Resistance: 1 mOhm Mains voltage: 230 V Housing dimensions: 194 x 140 x 130 mm

13505-93

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Coupled resonant circuits

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Resonance Q factor Dissipation factor Bandwidth Critical or optimum coupling Characteristic impedance Pauli method Parallel conductance Band-pass filter Sweep

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 229

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Coupled resonant circuits with the PHYWE digital function generator

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Resonance Q factor Dissipation factor Bandwidth Critical or optimum coupling Characteristic impedance Pauli method Parallel conductance Band-pass filter Sweep

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450201

excellence in science 230

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Interference of microwaves

Principle A microwave beam, after reflection from a metal screen or glass plate, interferes with the primary waves. The wavelength is determined from the resultant standing waves. Tasks Measurement of the wavelength of microwaves through the production of standing waves with

▪ 1. 2. 3.

reflection at the metal screen, plane-parallel plate, the Michelson interferometer.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Standing wave Reflection Transmission Michelson interferometer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 231

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Diffraction of microwaves

Principle Microwaves impinge on a slit and the edge of a screen. The diffraction pattern is determined on the basis of diffraction at these obstacles. Tasks Determination of the diffraction pattern of the microwave intensity

▪ 1. 2. 3.

behind the edge of a screen, after passing through a slit, behind a slit of variable width, with a fixed receiving point.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fresnel zones Huygens' principle Fraunhofer diffraction Diffraction at the slit

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450500

excellence in science 232

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Diffraction and polarisation of microwaves

Principle The equivalence between visible light and microwaves as special cases of the total spectrum of electromagnetic waves can be demonstrated using diffraction and polarization of microwaves as an example. The focusing of microwaves through a plane convex convergent lens is observed and the focal distance of the lens is determined. After that, polarizability of microwaves is demonstrated by means of a metallic grating. Tasks Measuring the irradiance of the microwave field behind a converging lens

▪ 1. 2.

along the optical axis transversally to the optical axis.

▪

Determination of the focal length of a synthetic resin converging lens and comparison of the results with the distribution of irradiance when no lens is used.

▪

Measurement of the irradiance transmitted through a metal grating as a function of the angle between the direction of polarization and the grating bars.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diffraction Focal point Linearity Circularly and elliptically polarized waves Transverse waves Polarizer and Analyzer Constructive and destructive interference

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450600

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 233

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Radiation field of a horn antenna/ microwaves

Principle The directional characteristic of a horn antenna is received in two perpendicular planes by means of a receiving dipole. The law of distance for the antenna is verified. Tasks 1. 2.

Measurement of the directional characteristic of the horn antenna in two perpendicular planes and evaluation of the corresponding directivity from the directional characteristic. Determination of the microwave irradiance I as a function of the distance r between the receiving dipole and the horn antenna, which verifies the validity of the law.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Horn antenna Directional characteristic pattern Directivity Law of distance Phase center

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450800

excellence in science 234

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Frustrated total reflection/ microwaves

Principle In the first part, the transmission and reflection characteristics of glass, acrylic glass and metal are studied with a microwave transmitter receiver pair and are compared to each other. In the second part, total reflection of microwaves on a prismatic surface is suppressed by bringing a second prism with the same refractive index close to the first one. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the reflecting and transmitting characteristics of glass, acrylic glass and metal. Observation of the effect of frustrated total reflection and determination of the transmitted irradiance as a function of distance d to the prismatic surface. The refractive index of the prism material can be calculated by determining the attenuation coefficient gamma.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Transmission Reflection Absorption Refraction Phase velocity Total reflection Surface waves Frustrated total reflection Tunnel effect

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2450900

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 235

2.4 Electricity 2.4.8 Electromagnetic oscillations and waves

Microwave power supply, 220V AC

Function and Applications To operate microwave emitter. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interior amplitude modulation without supplementary generator. Interior modulation with sinus or rectangular signals alternatively. Connecting sockets for exterior modulation, e.g. for LF transmission. Metal sheet casing with carrying handle. Interior modulation:frequency: 50 Hz. Signal shape: alternatively sinus or rectangular. Exterior modulation: frequency range: 50 Hz...10 kHz. Max. modulation voltage: 4 V.

Microwave power supply, 220 V AC 11740-93 Microwave transmitter w. klystron 11740-01 Klystron 06864-00

excellence in science 236

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

Semiconductor thermogenerator

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Seebeck effect (thermoelectric effect) Thermoelectric e.m.f. Efficiency Peltier coefficient Thomson coefficient Seebeck coefficient Direct energy conversion Thomson equations

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410700

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 237

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

Peltier heat pump

Principle The (cooling capacity) heating capacity and efficiency rating of a Peltier heat pump are determined under different operating conditions. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the cooling capacity Pc the pump as a function of the current and to calculate the efficiency rating hc at maximum output. To determine the heating capacity Pw of the pump and its efficiency rating hw at constant current and constant temperature on the cold side. To determine Pw, η w and Pc , ηc from the relationship between temperature and time on the hot and cold sides. To investigate the temperature behaviour when the pump is used for cooling, with the hot side air-cooled.

3. 4.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Peltier effect Heat pipe Thermoelectric e. m. f. Peltier coefficient Cooling capacity Heating capacity Efficiency rating Thomson coefficient Seebeck coefficient Thomson equations Heat conduction Convection Forced cooling Joule effect

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410800

excellence in science 238

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

Characteristic curves of a solar cell

Principle The current-voltage characteristics of a solar cell are measured at different light intensities, the distance between the light source and the solar cell being varied. The dependence of no-load voltage and short-circuit current on temperature is determined. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

To determine the light intensity with the thermopile at various distances from the light source. To measure the short-circuit current and no-load voltage at various distances from the light source. To estimate the dependence of no-load voltage, and short-circuit current on temperature. To plot the current-voltage characteristic at different light intensities. To plot the current-votlage characteristic under different operating conditions: cooling the equipment with a blower, no cooling, shining the light through a glass plate. To determine the characteristic curve when illuminated by sunlight.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Semiconductor p-n junction Energy-band diagram Fermi characteristic energy level Diffusion potential Internal resistance Efficiency Photo-conductive effect Acceptors Donors Valence band Conduction band

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410901

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 239

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

Characteristic curves of semiconductors with the FG module

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Semiconductor P-n junction Energy-band diagram Acceptors Donors Valence band Conduction band Transistor Operating point

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2410915

excellence in science 240

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

Thermogenerator with 2 water baths

Function and Applications To commute thermal energy into electrical energy directly and for operation as heat pump. Also been used to demonstrate the Seebeck effect and the Peltier effect. Equipment and technical data ▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Generator block consisting of two nickel coated copper plates with hole for thermometer, between these, p- and n-conducting silicon thermocouples, connected thermally parallel and electrically in series. Two water containers with open sides, which are used as heat reservoirs, are screwed to the generator block. They can be exchanged for flowthrough heat exchanger or air cooler. Standard accessories: 2 open water containers (brass, nickel coated); 2 rubber gaskets; 2 clamping jaws and 4 knurled screws. Number of thermocouples: 142. Permanent operating temperature: approx. 100°C. Interior resistance: 2.8 Ohm. Operation as thermo generator: output voltage at T = 40°C: approx. 2 V; efficiency at T = 40°C: approx. 1%. Operation as heat pump: max. permanent current 6 A. Dimensions (mm): generator block: 24 × 80 × 126, water container 28 × 70 × 94.

04366-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 241

2.4 Electricity 2.4.9 Thermoelectricity and photoelectricity

excellence in science 242

2 Physics 2.5 Optics

Optics 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6

Geometrical optics Speed of light Science of colours Wave optics Advanced optics and laser systems Optical components

244 248 250 253 286 295

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 243

2.5 Optics 2.5.1 Geometrical optics

Law of lenses and optical instruments

Principle The focal lengths of unknown lenses are determined by measuring the distances of image and object and by Bessel's method. Simple optical instruments are then constructed with these lenses. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To determine the focal length of two unknown convex lenses by measuring the distances of image and object. To determine the focal length of a convex lens and of a combination of a convex and a concave lens using Bessel's method. To construct the following optical instruments:

a) Slide projector; image scale to be determined b) Microscope; magnification to be determined c) Kepler-type telescope d) Galileo's telescope (opera glasses). What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Law of lenses Magnification Focal length Object distance Telescope Microscope Path of a ray Convex lens Concave lens Real image Virtual image

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2210200

excellence in science 244

2.5 Optics 2.5.1 Geometrical optics

Deviating prisms

Additive colour mixing

Principle A prism is a body made of a material with a higher refractive index than the prism's surroundings. This causes two effects to occur: 1) Beams of light that pass into the prism at 90° to one of the short sides undergo total internal reflection from the long side of the prism and emerge from the other short side. This is how mirrors for high-precision optical devices such as binoculars and telescopes are made. 2) When light beams are refracted by the long side of the prism, they are separated into their various colours. This means that light can be dispersed into a spectrum. Using normal optical glass, short-wavelength blue light is refracted more than longerwavelength red light, whereas optical gratings diffract the longer wavelength red light more. The physical reason for this is based on the refractive index of the material, which is dependent on the wavelength of the light. Literature for this experiment as follows:

Principle Additive mixing of colours is an optical model in which, unlike with subtractive mixing, colours are not produced by repeated restriction of the spectrum but by adding in new regions of the spectrum. Screens or projectors use the three primary colours, red, blue and green (called the RGB model), which can be combined to create virtually any colour perceptible by the human eye. In additive mixing of colours, the sum of all the colours is white and black appears where light is absent. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00

Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00

Software interTESS Physics, Optics & Wave Optics, DVD 01053-00

TESS Physik Handbuch Optik 01164-01 German

TESS Physics manual Optics 01164-02 English

TESS Physique manual Optique 01164-03 French

TESS Física manual Optica 01164-04 Spanish

P1066400

P1065100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 245

2.5 Optics 2.5.1 Geometrical optics

Law of imagery for a convex lens

them appear to be closer. When a telescope is used, the eye is the receiving object. It is not possible to create a stereo image with a telescope because they only possess one objective lens. Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Optics & Wave Optics, DVD 01053-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Optik 01164-01 German TESS Physics manual Optics 01164-02 English TESS Physique manual Optique 01164-03 French TESS Física manual Optica 01164-04 Spanish

Principle Convex surfaces have a surface which curves inwards. Convention has it that this is signified as a negative radius of curvature for a surface where light is incoming and positive where it is outgoing. Converging lenses can have two convex surfaces or one convex surface and a plane surface. Parallel beams of light are ideally focussed to a single point, the focal point.

P1069200

TESS Physics Set Optics OE1

Literature for this experiment as follows: Software interTESS Physics, DVD 01050-00 Software interTESS Physics, Optics & Wave Optics, DVD 01053-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Optik 01164-01 German TESS Physics manual Optics 01164-02 English TESS Physique manual Optique 01164-03 French TESS Física manual Optica 01164-04 Spanish

TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 13276-88

P1068400

TESS Physics Sets Optics The Galilean telescope

Modular system consisting of three interdependent sets and supplementary equipment. Principle A telescope is an optical device with which distant objects are focused to greater angles than the human eye would do, making

TESS Physics Sets Optics OE1 and OE2 combined with TESS Physics Set Color mixing with the light box enable the performance of 70 student experiments (see manual 01164-02) on the following topics: ▪

excellence in science 246

Propagation of light (11 exp.)

2.5 Optics 2.5.1 Geometrical optics

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Mirrors (11 exp.) Refraction (10 exp.) Lenses (14 exp.) Colours (6 exp.) The human eye (5 exp.) Optical equipment (9 exp.) Optical wave theory (4 exp.)

Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00

Diode laser 0.2/ 1 mW; 635 nm

TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 (13276-88) includes the light box 12 V/20 W (09801-00) with 4 mm plugs. Recommended power supply: 0...12 V, 6 V~, 12 V~ (13505-93). TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 with interTESS DVD 13276-78 TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 ,Light Box 12 V, adapter for 2 mm plug 13276-77 TESS Physics Set Color mixing with the light box 13250-77 TESS Physics Set Optics OE2 13277-88 TESS Physics manual Optics 01164-02

Function and Applications Diode laser approved for being used at schools. Equipment and technical data ▪

Demo Physics Magnet board Optics

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The diode laser complies with the technical requirements of DIN 60825-1, laser class 2. Equipped with a key switch, an indicator diode indicating the operating status and an electronic shutter to limit the laser output. Supplied with a support rod (length: 180 mm, diameter: 10 mm), a power supply unit 110...230 VAC and instruction manual and several test records. Output power: 1/0.2 mW. Wavelength: 635 nm. Lifetime: > 18000 h. Beam diameter (mm): approx. 2 x 4. Min. polarisation: 75:1.

Diodelaser 0.2/1 mW; 635 nm 08760-99 Fixing unit for diode laser 08384-00

Demo Physics Magnet board optics enables the performance of 60 demonstration experiments (see manual 01151-02) on the topics: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Propagation of light (4* + 3 exp.) Mirrors (6* + 10 exp.) Refraction (10 exp.) Lenses (6* + 7) Colours (6 exp.) The human eye (3 exp.) Optical equipment (2* + 3 exp.)

Demonstration experiments marked with an asterisk (18) may be conducted with the basic set. The supplementary set allows the performance of another 42 demonstration experiments. Supplementary equipment may be stored in the basic set box. Magnet board optics, basic set 08270-55 Magnet board optics, suppl. set 08270-66 Demo Physics Magnet board optics,w/o board+lit. 08271-88 Phys. Exp. Magnet Board Optics, Manual 01151-02

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 247

2.5 Optics 2.5.2 Speed of light

Measuring the velocity of light

Principle The intensity of the light is modulated and the phase relationship of the transmitter and receiver signal compared. The velocity of light is calculated from the relationship between the changes in the phase and the light path. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the velocity of light in air. To determine the velocity of light in water and synthetic resin and to calculate the refractive indices.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Refractive index Wavelength Frequency Phase Modulation Electric field constant Magnetic field constant

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2210101

excellence in science 248

2.5 Optics 2.5.2 Speed of light

Speed of Light Meter Set

The complete set to measure the light velocity in air, transparent liquids and solids. Consists of 1x Light velocity measuring apparatus, 1 x Retroreflector with stem, 1x Power supply 12 V/ 2 A, 1x Slide mount for optical bench, 1x Optical bench, l = 1800 mm, 1 x Holder for speed of light measuring instrument, 1 x Acrylic glass cylinder with a holder, 1 x Tubular cell with a holder 11226-88

Software Speed of Light Meter 14411-61

Speed of Light Meter

Function and Applications With the Speed of Light Meter you can measure the velocity of light in air and in other transparent media and additionally you can determine the distance. Benefits Measuring the speed of light, as well as distances, with only one device all thanks to state-of-the-art digital measuring technology, The unit is convincing by a quick set-up and a need of minimum adjustment, The speed of light can be measured with an accuracy in air of +/- 2%, Measurements can be performed with or without an oscilloscope, Due to the integrated display of all of the relevant measurement quantities (ƒ, Δφ, Δt, Δx) the unit is of special interest for student and teacher experiments, Distance measurements can be performed with the same device Technical data and features Modulation frequency: 50.0 MHz (quartz stabilised), Protective class: Laser Class 2 acc. to DIN EN 60825-1, Digital display: 3-digit LED-Display, Digit height: 20 mm, Operating voltage: 12 V DC, Power consumption: 5 W, Housing dimensions: 206 mm x 130 mm x 160 mm, Weight: approx. 2 kg Included accessories 12151-99 Power supply 12 V DC/ 2.25 A, 11226-01 Retro-reflector with rod (1), 09822-00 Slide mount for optical bench Recommended accessories 11226-02 Optical bench l = 1800 mm for speed of light measurements, 11226-03 Holder for speed of light meter, 09822-00 Slide mount for optical bench (2), 11226-04 Acrylic glass cylinder with holder, 11226-05 Tubular cell with holder 11226-99

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 249

2.5 Optics 2.5.3 Science of colours

Additive colour mixing and colour masking

Principle Production of mixed colours and white light by superimposed projection (additive mixing) of red, blue, and green light. Tasks 1.

Brightening of the colour spot (white masking) or its surroundings (black masking) by means of white light.

What you can learn about Additive colour mixing, Subtractive colour mixing, Complementary colour, Colour saturation, White masking, Black masking Literature for this experiment as follows: Labortory Experiments Biol., L.V. 16506-02 English P4070600

excellence in science 250

2.5 Optics 2.5.3 Science of colours

Additive colour mixing

TESS Physics Set Color mixing with the light box

Function and Applications Supplementary equipment for TESS Optics OE1 enabling the performance of 40 student experiments, 6 of which in the field of theory of colours. Equipment and technical data The device set contains all items needed for the performance of the experiments. ▪ ▪ ▪

Light box accessories for colour mixing (09806-00) consisting of 2 slit holders with 1 deflecting mirror and 1 blind. 6 plastic filters in red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, purple Colour filter set, add. colour mixt. (09807-00) consisting of 3 plastic filters in red, blue and green Colour filter set, add. colour mixt. (09808-00) consisting of 3 plastic filters in yellow, cyan and purple

All items may be stored in the TESS Optics OE1 storage box. TESS Physics Set Color mixing with the light box 13250-77 Light box accessories for colour mixing 09806-00 Color filter set,add.color mixt. 09807-00 Color filter set,subtr.col.mixt. 09808-00 TESS Physik Handbuch Optik 01164-01 TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 13276-88 TESS Physics Set Optics OE1 ,Light Box 12 V, adapter for 2 mm plug 13276-77 TESS Physics Set Optics OE2 13277-88

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 251

2.5 Optics 2.5.3 Science of colours

Color mixture device for chromatology

Function and Applications With this device set, all basic experiments can be demonstrated in the area of chromatology: Achromatic colors (gray scale), additive and subtractive color mixture, color saturation, successive/simultaneous contrast, surface colors. Equipment and technical data Color mixture device for chromatology. The color mixture device (13760-88) consists of: Triple light, brightness actuator, filter set additive color mixture, filter set subtractive color mixture. Triple light (13760-00): Three sources of light, independent of each other, with particularly high lighting density, mounted on a commonassembled support. The triple light can be adjusted so that its projection displays are fully separated or overlap each other in part (e.g. for the additive color mixture) or are completely covered over (as in the case of the color covering). The filter shaft is able to accommodate three color filters one behind the other. The image distances extend from a minimum of 50 cm to some meters. The device is equipped with: 3 tungsten-halogen lamps 12 V / 50 W, 3 connecting cables with diode plug connectors. Brightness actuator (13670-93): Setting unit for continuous change of the light intensity. 3 outputs: 0...12 V / 4 A (diode sockets), voltage: 230 V~ / 50 Hz. Filter set additive color mixture (13760-02): Three dichroic, highquality color filters coordinated with each other, for color mixture experiments on the additive color mixture; blue, green, red. Edge length 50 mm. Complements the filters for subtractive color mixture. Filter set subtractive color mixture (13760-03): Three high-quality, dichroic color filters coordinated with each other, for color mixture experiments for subtractive color mixture; yellow, cyan, magenta. Edge length 50 mm. Complements the filters for subtractive color mixture. Colour mixing apparatus, 230 V 13760-88 Three colour lamp 13760-00 Brightness adjuster for 13760-88 13760-93 Set of additive colour filters 13760-02 Set of substractive colour filters 13760-03

excellence in science 252

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Dispersion and resolving power of a prism and a grating spectroscope

Principle The refractive indices of liquids, crown glass and flint glass are determined as a function of the wave length by refraction of light through the prism at minimum deviation. The resolving power of the glass prisms is determined from the dispersion curve. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

To adjust the spectrometer-goniometer. To determine the refractive index of various liquids in a hollow prism. To determine the refractive index of various glass prism. To determine the wave lengths of the mercury spectral lines. To demonstrate the relationship between refractive index and wave length (dispersion curve). To calculate the resolving power of the glass prisms from the slope of the dispersion curves. Determination of the grating constant of a Rowland grating based on the diffraction angle (up to the third order) of the high intensity spectral lines of mercury. Determination of the angular dispersion of a grating. Determination of the resolving power required to separate the different Hg-Lines. Comparison with theory.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maxwell relationship Dispersion Polarizability Refractive index Prism Rowland grating Spectrometer Goniometer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2210300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 253

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Interference of light

Principle By dividing up the wave-front of a beam of light at the Fresnel mirror and the Fresnel biprism, interference is produced. The wavelength is determined from the interference patterns. Tasks Determination of the wavelength of light by interference 1. 2.

with Fresnel mirror, with Fresnel biprism.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wavelength Phase Fresnel biprism Fresnel mirror Virtual light source

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220100

excellence in science 254

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Newton's rings with optical base plate

Principle The air wedge formed between slightly convex lens and a plane glass plate (Newton\'s colour glass) is used to cause interference of monochromatic light. The wavelength is determined from the radii of the interference rings. Tasks The diameters of interference rings produced by Newton's colour glass are measured and these are used to: 1. 2.

Dertermine the wavelength for a given radius of curvature of the lens, determine the radius of curvature for a given wavelength.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Coherent light Phase relation Path difference Interference at thin layers Newton's colour glass

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220205

Newton's rings P2220200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 255

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Interference at a mica plate according to Pohl

Principle Monochromatic light falls on a plane parallel mica plate. The light rays, reflected at the front surface as well as at the rear surface, will interfere to form a pattern of concentric rings. The radii of the rings depend on the geometry of the experimental setup, the thickness of the mica plate and the wavelength of the light. Tasks The experiment will be performed with the light of a Na-lamp and with the light of different wavelengths of a Hg-vapour tube. 1. 2.

The thickness of the mica plate is determined from the radii of the interference rings and the wavelength of the Na-lamp. The different wavelengths of the Hg-vapour tube are determined from the radii of the interference rings and the thickness of the mica plate.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference of equal inclination Interference of thin layers Plane parallel plate Refraction Reflection Optical path difference

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220300

excellence in science 256

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Structure of a Fresnel zone / zone plate

Principle A zone plate is illuminated with parallel laser light. The focal points of several orders of the zone plate are projected on a ground glass screen. Tasks 1. 2.

The laser beam must be widened so that the zone plate is well illuminated. It must be assured that the laser lightbeam runs parallel over several meters. The focal points of several orders of the zone plate are projected on a ground glass screen. The focal lengths to be determined are plotted against the reciprocal value of their order. The radii of the zone plate are calculated.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens Fresnel principle Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction Interference Coherence Fresnel's zone construction Zone plates

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 257

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Michelson interferometer with optical base plate

Principle In a Michelson interferometer, a lightbeam is split into two partial beams by a semi transparent glass plate (amplitude splitting). These beams are reflected by two mirrors and brought to interference after they passed through the glass plate a second time. Tasks The wavelength of the used laserlight is determined through the observation of the change in the interference pattern upon changing the length of one of the interferometer arms. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Refraction index Light velocity Phase Virtual light source Coherence

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220505

Michelson interferometer P2220500

excellence in science 258

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Coherence and width of spectral lines with the Michelson interferometer

Principle The wavelengths and the corresponding lengths of coherence of the green spectral lines of an extreme high pressure Hg vapour lamp are determined by means of a Michelson interferometer. Different double slit combinations are illuminated to verify the coherence conditions of non punctual light sources. An illuminated auxiliary adjustable slit acts as a non punctual light source. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the wavelength of the green Hg spectral line as well as of its coherence length. The values determined in 1. are used to calculate the coherence time and the half width value of the spectral line. Verification of the coherence condition for non punctual light sources.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Interference Spatial and time coherence Coherence conditions Coherence length for non punctual light sources Coherence time Spectral lines (shape and half width value) Broadening of lines due to Doppler effect and pressure broadening Michelson interferometer Magnification

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220600

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 259

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Refraction index of air and CO2 with the Michelson interferometer

Principle A measurement cuvette set in the beam path of a Michelson interferometer can be evacuated or filled with CO2. The refraction indexes of air or CO2 are determined through the assessed modification of the interference pattern. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Phase Refraction index Light velocity Virtual light source

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220700

Refraction index of CO2 with the Michelson interferometer P2220705

excellence in science 260

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Michelson interferometer - High Resolution

Principle: With the aid of two mirrors in a Michelson arrangement, light is brought to interference. While moving one of the mirrors, the alterationin the interference pattern is observed and the wave length of the laser light determined. Tasks: 1. 2. 3.

Construction of a Michelson interferometer using separate components. The interferometer is used to determine the wavelength of the laserlight. The contrast function K is qualitatively recorded in order to determine the coherence length with it.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Diffraction index Speed of light Phase Virtual light source

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220900

Doppler effect with the Michelson interferometer P2221000 Fabry-Perot interferometer - determination of the wavelength of laser light P2221206

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 261

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction at a slit and Heisenberg's uncertainty principle

Principle The distribution of intensity in the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a slit is measured. The results are evaluated both from the wave pattern view point, by comparison with Kirchhoff's diffraction formula, and from the quantum mechanics standpoint to confirm Heisenberg's uncertainty principle. Tasks 1. 2.

To measure the intensity distribution of the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a single slit (e. g. 0.1 mm). The heights of the maxima and the positions of the maxima and minima are calculated according to Kirchhoff's diffraction formula and compared with the measured values. To calculate the uncertainty of momentum from the diffraction patterns of single slits of differing widths and to confirm Heisenberg's uncertainty principle.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diffraction Diffraction uncertainty Kirchhoff's diffraction formula Measurement accuracy Uncertainty of location Uncertainty of momentum Wave-particle dualism De Broglie relationship

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230100

excellence in science 262

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction of light at a slit and an edge

Principle Monochromatic light is incident on a slit or an edge. The intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern is determined. Tasks 1. 2.

Measurement of the width of a given slit. Measurement of the intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern of the slit and of the edge.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Intensity Fresnel integrals Fraunhofer diffraction

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 263

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Intensity of diffractions due to pin hole diaphragms and circular obstacles

Principle Pin hole diaphragms and circular obstacles are illuminated with laser light. The resulting intensity distributions due to diffraction are measured by means of a photo diode. Tasks 1. 2.

The complete intensity distribution of the diffraction pattern of a pin hole diaphragm (D1 = 0.25 mm) is determined by means of a sliding photo diode. The diffraction peak intensities are compared with the theoretical values. The diameter of the pin hole diaphragm is determined from the diffraction angles of peaks and minima. The positions and intensities of minima and peaks of a second pin hole diaphragm (D2 = 0.5 mm) are determined. The diffraction peak intensities are compared with the theoretical values. The diameter of the pin hole diaphragm is determined. The positions of minima and peaks of the diffraction patterns of two complementary circular obstacles (D*1 = 0.25 mm and (D*2 = 0.5 mm) are determined. Results are discussed in terms of Babinet's Theorem.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Fresnel's zone construction Coherence Laser Airy disk Airy ring- Poisson's spot Babinet's theorem Bessel function Resolution of optical instruments

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230300

excellence in science 264

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction intensity due to multiple slits and grids

Principle Multiple slits which all have the same width and the same distance among each other, as well as transmission grids with different grid constants, are submitted to laser light. The corresponding diffraction patterns are measured according to their position and intensity, by means of a photo diode which can be shifted. Tasks 1. 2.

The position of the first intensity minimum due to a single slit is determined, and the value is used to calculate the width of the slit. The intensity distribution of the diffraction patterns of a threefold, fourfold and even a fivefold slit, where the slits all have the same widths and the same distance among each other, is to be determined. The intensity relations of the central peaks are to be assessed. For transmission grids with different lattice constants, the position of the peaks of several orders of diffraction is to be determined, and the found value used to calculate the wavelength of the laser light.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Law Law Law Law Law

of of of of of

Huygens principle Interference Fraunhofer und Fresnel diffraction Coherence Laser

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 265

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction intensity at slit and double slit systems

Principle Slit and double slit systems are illuminated with laser light. The corresponding diffraction patterns are measured by means of a photodiode which can be shifted, as a function of location and intensity. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the intensity distribution of the diffraction patterns due to two slits of different widths.The corresponding width of the slit is determined by means of the relative positions of intensity values of the extremes. Furthermore, intensity relations of the peaks are evaluated. Determination of location and intensity of the extreme values of the diffraction patterns due to two double slits with the same widths, but different distances between the slits. Widths of slits and distances between the slits must be determined as well as the intensity relations of the peaks.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens principle Interference Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction Coherence Laser

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230500

excellence in science 266

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction intensity at a slit and at a wire - Babinet's theorem

Principle An aperture consisting of a single slit and a complementary strip (wire) is illuminated with a laser beam. The corresponding diffraction patterns are measured according to position and intensity with a photocell which can be shifted. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Determination of the intensity distribution of the diffraction patterns due to a slit and complementary strip (wire). Determination of the intensity relations of the diffraction pattern peaks for the single slit. Babinet's theorem is discussed using the diffraction patterns of the slit and the complementary strip.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Huygens' principle Interference Fraunhofer und Fresnel diffraction Babinet's theorem Poissons' spot Coherence Laser

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2230600

Diffraction intensity at a slit and at a wire - Babinet's theorem P2230605

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 267

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Photometric inverse-square law

Principle The luminous intensity emitted by a punctual source is determined as a function of distance. Tasks 1. 2.

The luminous intensity emitted by a punctual source is determined as a function of distance from the source. The photometric law of distance is verified by plotting illuminance as a function of the reciprocal value of the square of the distance.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Luminous flux Quantity of light Luminous intensity Illuminance Luminance

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2240201

Photometric inverse-square law with Cobra 3 P2240211

excellence in science 268

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Lambert's law

Principle Visible light impinges on a diffusely reflecting surface. The luminance of this surface is determined as a function of the angle of observation. Tasks 1. 2.

The luminous flux emitted reflected by a diffusely reflecting surface is to be determined as a function of the angle of observation. Lambert's law (cos-law) is to be verified using the graph of the measurement values.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Luminous flux Light quantity Light intensity Illuminance Luminance

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2240400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 269

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Polarisation through quarter-wave plates

Principle Monochromatic light falls on a mica plate perpendicular to its optic axis. At the appropriate plate thickness (lambda/4, or quarter-wave plate) there is a 90° phase shift between the ordinary and the extraordinary ray when the light emerges from the crystal. The polarisation of the emergent light is investigated at different angles between the optic axis of the lambda/4 plate and the direction of polarisation of the incident light. Tasks 1. 2.

To measure the intensity of plane polarised light as a function of the position of the analyser. To measure the light intensity behind the analyser as a function of the angle between the optic axis of the lambda/4plate and that of the analyser. To perform experiment 2. with two lambda/4 plates one behind the other.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Plane Circularly and elliptically polarised light Polariser Analyzer Plane of polarisation Double refraction Optic axis Ordinary and extraordinary ray

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2250100

Polarisation through quarter-wave plates P2250105

excellence in science 270

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Polarimetry

Principle The rotation of the plane of polarisation through a sugar solution measured with a half-shade polarimeter and the reaction rate constant for the inversion of cane sugar determined. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the specific rotation of cane sugar (sucrose) and lactose by measuring the rotation of various solutions of known concentration. To determine the reaction rate constant when cane sugar is transformed into invert sugar.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Half-shade principle Optical rotatory power Optical activity Saccharimetry Specific rotation Reaction rate Weber-Fechner law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2250200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 271

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Fresnel's equations - theory of reflection

Principle Plane-polarized light is reflected at a glas surface. Both the rotation of the plane of polarization and the intensity of the reflected light are to be determined and compared with Frewsnel's formulae for reflection. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The reflection coefficients for light polarized perpendicular and parallel to the plane of incidence are to be determined as a function of the angle of incidence and plotted graphically. The refractive index of the flint glass prism is to be found. The reflection coefficients are to be calculated using Fresnel's formulae and compared with the measured curves. The reflection factor for the flint glass prism is to be calculated. The rotation of the polarization plane for plane polarized light when reflected is to be determined as a function of the angle of incidence and presented graphically. It is then to be compared with values calculated using Fresnel's formulae.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electromagnetic theory of light Reflection coefficient Reflection factor Brewster's law Law of refraction Polarization Polarization level

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2250300

excellence in science 272

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Malus' law

Principle Linear polarized light passes through a polarization filter. Transmitted light intensity is determined as a function of the angular position of the polarization filter. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The plane of polarization of a linear polarized laser beam is to be determined. The intensity of the light transmitted by the polarization filter is to be determined as a function of the angular position of the filter. Malus' law must be verified.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric theory of light Polarization Polarizer Analyzer Brewster's law Malus' law

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2250400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 273

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Faraday effect

Principle The angle of rotation of the polarisation- plane of plane polarized light through a flint glass rod is found to be a linear function of the product of the mean flux-densitiy and the length of the optical medium. The factor of proportionally, called Verdet's constant, is investigated as a function of the wavelength and the optical medium. Tasks 1.

To determine the magnetic flux-densitiy between the pole pieces using the axial Hall probe of the teslameter for different coil currents. The mean flux-density is calculated by numerical integration and the ratio maximum flux-density over mean flux-density established. To measure the maximum flux- density as a function of the coil current and to establish the relationship between mean fluxdensity and coil current anticipating that the ratio found under 1. remains constant. To determine the angle of rotation as a function of the mean flux-density using different colour filters. To calculate the corresponding Verdet's constant in each case. To evaluate Verdet's constant as a function of the wavelength.

2. 3. 4.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electromagnetic field interaction Electron oscillation Electromagnetism Polarization Verdet's constant Hall effect

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260100

Faraday effect with optical base plate P2260105

excellence in science 274

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Recording and reconstruction of holograms

Principle In contrast to normal photography a hologram can store information about the three-dimensionality of an object. To capture the three-dimensionality of an object, the film stores not only the amplitude but also the phase of the light rays. To achieve this, a coherent light beam (laser light) is split into an object and a reference beam by being passed through a beam splitter. These beams interfere in the plane of the holographic film. The hologram is reconstructed with the reference beam which was also used to record the hologram. Tasks 1. 2.

Record a laser light hologram and process it to get a phase hologram. Reconstruct it by verifying the virtual and the real image. Record a white light reflectionhologram and process it to get a phase hologram. Laminate it for reconstruction by a white light source.

What you can learn about Object beam, Reference beam, Real and virtual image, Phase holograms, Amplitude holograms, Interference, Diffraction, Coherence, Developing of film Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260300

Transfer hologram from a master hologram P2260305 Holography - Real time procedure (bending of a plate) P2260306

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 275

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

LDA - laser Doppler anemometry with Cobra3

Principle Small particles in a current pass through the LDA measuring volume and scatter the light whose frequency is shifted by the Doppler effect due to the particle movement. The frequency change of the scattered light is detected and converted into a particle or flow velocity. Tasks 1.

Measurement of the light-frequency change of individual light beams which are reflected by moving particles.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Doppler effect Scattering of light by small particles (Mie scattering) High- and low-pass filters Sampling theorem Spectral power density Turbulence

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260511

excellence in science 276

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Helium neon laser, basic set

Principle The difference between spontaneous and stimulated emission of light is demonstrated. The beam propagation within the resonator cavity of a He- Ne laser and its divergence are determined, its stability criterion is checked and the relative output power of the laser is measured as a function of the tube's position inside the resonator and of the tube current. The following items can be realized with advanced set 08656.02. By means of a birefringent tuner and a Littrow prism different wavelengths can be selected and quantitatively determined if a monochromator is available. Finally you can demonstrate the existence of longitudinal modes and the gain profile of the He-Ne laser provided an analysing Fabry Perot system is at your disposal. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Set up the He-Ne laser. Adjust the resonator mirrors by use of the pilotlaser. (left mirror: VIS, HR, plane; right mirror: VIS, HR, R = 700 mm) Check on the stability condition of a hemispherical resonator. Measure the integral relative output power as a function of the laser tube's position within the hemispherical resonator. Measure the beam diameter within the hemispherical resonator right and left of the laser tube. Determine the divergence of the laser beam. Measure the integral relative output power as a function of the tube current.

Spontaneous and stimulated light emission Inversion Collision of second type Gas discharge tube Resonator cavity Transverse and longitudinal resonator modes Birefringence Brewster angle Littrow prism Fabry Perot Etalon

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260701

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 277

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Helium neon laser, advanced set

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260705

excellence in science 278

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Optical pumping

Principle The visible light of a semiconductor diode laser is used to excite the neodymium atoms within a Nd-YAG (NeodymiumYttrium Aluminium Garnet) rod. The power output of the semiconductor diode laser is first recorded as a function of the injection current. The fluorescent spectrum of the Nd-YAG rod is then determined and the maon absorption lines of the Nd-atoms are verified. Conclusively, the mean life-time of the4F3/2-level of the Nd-atoms is measured in approximation. Tasks 1. 2.

To determine the power output of the semiconductor diode laser as a function of the injection current. To trace the fluorescent spectrum of the Nd-YAG rod pumped by the diode laser and to verify the main absorption lines of neodymium. To measure the mean life-time of the 4F3/2-level of the Nd-atoms. For further applications see experiment 2.6.09 "Nd-YAG laser".

3. 4.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Spontaneous emission Induced emission Mean lifetime of a metastable state Relaxation Inversion Diode laser

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260800

Nd:YAG laser P2260900

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 279

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Fibre optics

Principle The beam of a laser diode is treated in a way that it can be coupled into a monomode fibre. The problems related to coupling the beam into the fibre are evaluated and verified. In consequence a low frequency signal is transmitted through the fibre. The numerical aperture of the fibre is recorded. The transit time of light through the fibre is measured and the velocity of light within the fibre is determined. Finally the measurement of the relative output power of the diode laser as a function of the supply current leads to the characteristics of the diode laser such as "threshold energy" and "slope efficiency". Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Couple the laser beam into the fibre and adjust the setting-up in a way that a maximum of output power is achieved at the exit of the fibre. Demonstrate the transmission of a LF-signal through the fibre. Measure the numerical aperture of the fibre. Measure the transit time of light through the fibre and determine the velocity of light within the fibre. Determine the relative output power of the diode laser as a function of the supply current.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Total reflection Diode laser Gaussian beam Monomode and multimode fibre Numerical aperture Transverse and longitudinal modes Transit time Threshold energy Slope efficiency Velocity of light

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2261000

excellence in science 280

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Fourier optics - 2f arrangement

Principle The electric field distribution of light in a specific plane (object plane) is Fourier transformed into the 2 f configuration. Tasks 1.

Investigation of the Fourier transform by a convex lens for different diffraction objects in a 2 f set-up.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fourier transform Lenses Fraunhofer diffraction Index of refraction Huygens' principle

Literature for this experiment as follows: Handbook Laser Physics III: Interferometry 01401-02 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2261100

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 281

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Fourier optics - 4f arrangement - filtering and reconstruction

Principle The electric field distribution of light in a specific plane (object plane) is Fourier transformed into the 4f configuration by 2 lenses and optically filtered with appropriate diaphragms. Tasks 1. 2.

Optical filtration of diffraction objects in 4 f set-up. Reconstruction of a filtered image.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fourier transform Lenses Fraunhofer diffraction Index of refraction Huygens' principle Fog technique

Literature for this experiment as follows: Handbook Laser Physics III: Interferometry 01401-02 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2261200

excellence in science 282

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Magnetostriction with the Michelson interferometer

Principle With the aid of two mirrors in a Michelson arrangement, light is brought to interference. Due to the magnetostrictive effect, one of the mirrors is shifted by variation in the magnetic field applied to a sample and the change in the interference pattern is observed. Tasks 1. 2.

Construction of a Michelson interferometer using separate optical components. Testing various ferromagnetic materials (iron and nickel) as well as a non-ferromagnetic material,copper, with regard to their magnetostrictive properties.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Diffraction index Speed of light Phase Virtual light source Ferromagnetic material Weiss molecular magnetic fields Spin-orbit coupling

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2261300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 283

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

Diffraction at a grating

How are the energy and the colour of light connected?

Principle Diffraction is defined as the bending of waves by an obstacle. Diffraction is caused by the creation of new waves at the obstacle and by their interference. An optical grating has a large number of slits arranged at regular intervals. This results in a series of diffraction maxima. As the location of the maxima depends on the wavelength of the light, optical gratings can be used to separate different wavelengths.

Principle

Tasks

Determine Planck's constant h by measurements and observations of light-emitting diodes.

Use transmission gratings with different grating constants g to study the relationship between g and the separation of the interference bands d. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik Handbuch Wellenoptik 01167-01 German

According to the findings of quantum physics, the energy of electromagnetic radiation (light) occurs only at discrete values. As a fundamental natural constant, Planck's constant h describes the increments of this energy gradation of light. Exercises

Literature for this experiment as follows: Schülerversuche TESS Physik Optik/Atomphysik 13286-01 German TESS advanced Physics manual Optics/ Atomic Physics 13286-02 English

TESS Physics manual Wave Optics 01167-02 English

P1418001

TESS Physique manual Optique des Ondes 01167-03 French

Michelson interferometer

P1195900

Function and Application To measure light wavelengths and refractivity of liquids and gases. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

metalbase-plate 120 x 120 mm with removable holding stem and with adjustable surface mirrors 30 x30 mm two polarising filters and micrometer Fine shoots to the tilt adjustment of fixed mirror Bracket for additional required cell for investigation of gases

08557-00

excellence in science 284

2.5 Optics 2.5.4 Wave optics

TESS Physics Set Optics OE3

TESS Physics Set for Optics/Atomic physics

Function and Applications supplementary equipment set for student experiment OE1/OE2 Optics to perform 29 experiments on the following themes: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference (4 experiments) Diffraction from unidimensional objects (8 experiments) Diffraction from two-dimensionalobjects (3 experiments) Resolving power (3 experiments) Qualitative experiments on polarisation (6 experiments) Quantitative experiments on polarisation (5 experiments)

Equipment and technical data The set consists of the 19 items following incl. solid, stackable storage box with moulded foaminsert. ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Aperture, d=0.4mm Diaphragm, single slit, edge Diaphragm, 3 single slits Diaphragm, 4 double slits Diaphragm, 4 multiple slits Diffraction grating,4 lines/mm Diffraction grating,8 lines/mm Diffraction grating,10 lines/mm Lens on slide mount,f=+300mm 2Mount with scale on slide mount Photoelastic model Plate mount for 3 objects 2Measuring magnifier Measuring tape, l=2m Slit, adjustable up to 1 mm Glass beaker, short, 250 ml Microscopic slide

TESS Physics Set Optics OE3 13280-88 TESS Physics manual Wave Optics 01167-02

Function and Application Set to perform more than 16 student experiments in the field of optics and atomic/quantum physics especially the wave particle duality of light and the interaction of light with matter: spectroscopy and electromagnetic emission spectras, diffraction and interference, emission, absorption and fluorescence, light-solid and light-liquid interaction, determination of plancks constant h-band structures/gaps, solar cells and fotodiodes, properties of LEDs-polarization. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Experimental solution to study the fundamentals of the waveparticle duality of light and interaction with matter and atomic physics in 16 described experiments The equipment is storaged in a rugged, stackable and compact box Easy teaching and efficient learning by using the interactive Software interTESS The PC based experimentation with interTESS minimises the preparation time and facilitates efficient step by step setup, operation, analysis and evaluation, and focuses the students doing the experiment and understand the natural science background

Equipment and technical data Selected parts: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

optical bench and slide mounts-halogen light source LED light sources (6 colours) lenses and filters (colour, polarisation) light-liquid interaction unit diffraction objects fotodiode with amplifier solar cell different fluorescent parts

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Power supply 0-12V, 6V~,12V~ (13505-93) 2 Multimeter (07122-00) Connecting cords interTESS-Software (01000-00) / Manual(13286-02)

TESS Physics Set for Optics/ Atomic physics 13286-88 TESS advanced Physics manual Optics/ Atomic Physics 13286-02

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 285

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Fabry-Perot interferometer - determination of the wavelength of laser light

Principle Two mirrors are assembled to form a Fabry-Perot interferometer. Using them, the multibeam interference of a laser's light beam is investigated. By moving one of the mirrors, the change in the interference pattern is studied and the wavelength of the laser's light determined. Tasks 1. 2.

Construction of a Fabry-Perot interferometer using separate optical components. The interferometer is used to determine the wavelength of the laser light.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Wavelength Diffraction index Speed of light Phase

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2221205

excellence in science 286

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Recording and reconstruction of holograms

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Object beam Reference beam Real and virtual image Phase holograms Amplitude holograms Interference Diffraction Coherence Developing of film

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 287

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

LDA - laser Doppler anemometry with Cobra3

Measurement of the light-frequency change of individual light beams which are reflected by moving particles.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interference Doppler effect Scattering of light by small particles (Mie scattering) High- and low-pass filters Sampling theorem Spectral power density Turbulence

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260511

excellence in science 288

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Helium neon laser, basic set

The He-Ne laser can be tuned using a BFT or a LTP. Longitudinal modes can be observed by use of a Fabry Perot Etalon of low finesse. Remark: These points can only be covered quantitatively if a monochromator and an analysing Fabry Perot system are available. What you can learn about Spontaneous and stimulated light emission, Inversion, Collision of second type, Gas discharge tube, Resonator cavity, Transverse and longitudinal resonator modes, Birefringence, Brewster angle, Littrow prism, Fabry Perot Etalon Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260701

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 289

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Optical pumping

What you can learn about Spontaneous emission, Induced emission, Mean lifetime of a metastable state, Relaxation, Inversion, Diode laser Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2260800

Nd:YAG laser P2260900

excellence in science 290

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Fibre optics

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Total reflection Diode laser Gaussian beam Monomode and multimode fibre Numerical aperture Transverse and longitudinal modes Transit time Threshold energy Slope efficiency Velocity of light

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2261000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 291

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

Polarisation through quarter-wave plates

Base plate with carrying case

Principle Monochromatic light impinges on a micaplate, perpendicularly to its opticalaxis. If the thickness of the plate is adequate (l/4 plate), a phase shift of 90° occurs between the ordinary and the extraordinary beam when the latter leaves the crystal. The polarisation of exiting light is examined for different angles between the optical axis of the l/4 plate and the direction of polarisation of incident light. Measurement of the intensity of linearly polarised light as a function of the analyser's position (Malus' law). Measurement of the light intensity behind the analyser as a function of the angle between the optical axis of the l/4 plate and the analyser. Carrying out experiment (2) with two successive l/4 plates. Literature for this experiment as follows: Handbuch Laserphysik 1 01179-01 German Handbook Laser Physics I: Exp. with coherent light 01179-02 English

Function and Applications For the reception of magnetically-adhering optical components, with which experiments on the geometrical optics, wave optics, holography, interferometry and Fourier optics are capable of being set up. With carrying case: Protects the experimental setups against dust. Thanks to the slip-resistant, magnetic adhesion, complete experimental setups can also be transported. For the implementation of the experiment, the plate remains in the case bottom with vibrationdamped support. Equipment and technical data Base plate: ▪

P1217400

Advanced Optics, Holography package incl. manual, 230 V

▪ ▪

Flexurally-resistant, vibration-damped and corrosion-resistant metal plate with (5 cm x 5 cm) half-tone printing and slip-resistant rubber feet. Three fixed assembled stress points for laser and laser-shutter assemblies Dimensions (mm): 590 x 430 x 24 Weight: 7 kg

With case: Function and Applications A complete set to perform the following experiments using the experimental system "Advanced Optics" incl. handbook "Holography" with 11 described experiments: ▪ ▪ ▪

white light holography transmission holography transfer a hologram from a masterhologram

With the aid of a base plate and magnetic adhering holders, which can be positioned jolt-free, 1- and 2-dimensional setups can be quickly and reliably realised. By folding the lightpaths experiments with larger focal distances can be carried out on the working base. The high stiffness and vibration damping of the base plate allows sensitive holography arrangement to be set up.

▪ ▪ ▪

Additional vibration-damped support in the case bottom Attachable, lockable case lid Dimensions of the case (cm): 62 x 46 x 28 Total weight (plate + case): 13 kg

Optical base plate in exp.case 08700-01 Optical base plate with rubberfeet 08700-00

Si-Photodetector with Amplifier

Advanced Optics, Holography package incl. manual, 230 V 08700-55 Advanced Optics, Interferometry Package incl. manual, 230 V 08700-66 Handbook Laser Physics I: Exp. with coherent light 01179-02 Handbook Laser Physics II: Holography 01400-02 Handbook Laser Physics III: Interferometry 01401-02 Function and Applications Silicon diode with high signal-to-noise ratio for photometric measurements where there is a high degree of interference. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

excellence in science 292

Movable holder for diode on round mounting rod with lens for incoming light Removable slot filter

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1.5/m lead with diode plug for connecting to the required control unit Spectral range 390 nm...1150 nm Maximum sensitivity 900 nm Voltage when dark 0.75 mV Sensitivity (900 nm) 860 mV/µW/cm² Band width 65 kHz Slot filter d= 0.3 mm Mounting rod l=110 mm, diam.=10 mm

Si-Photodetector with Amplifier 08735-00 Control Unit for Si-Photodetector 08735-99

Exp.Set-Helium-Neon Laser

only a small number of additional components it is possible to build a Nd:YAG laser with this system. Equipment and technical data 1 Flat rail 500 mm with scale, 1 Laser diode 450 mW in X-Y adjustment holder on carrier, 1 Control electronics LDS 1200, 1 Beam shaping optics in holder on carrier, 1 Beam Focusing in holder on carrier, 1 Nd:YAG crystal in holder adjustable on carrier, 1 Filter holder on carrier with filter RG 1000, 1 Photo detector in holder on carrier and adjustment target, 3 BNC cables, 1 IR detector converter screen 800-1200 nm, 1 Set for optics cleaning, 1 User manual 08590-93

Accessories for the experiments "Optical pumping" and "Nd:YAG laser"

Required accessories for the experiments "Optical pumping" and "Nd:YAG laser".

Function and Applications Experimental Set-Helium-Neon Laser Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

6 mW-HeNe-capillary discharge tube with two 55.5°-Brewsterwindows ballast resistor and HV connectors 2 xy-variable holders on slidemounts for laser tube variable power supply 2...8 mA for laser tube two LCD-displays for HV and tube current 2 xy-adjustable holders for opt.components 2 holders for laser mirrors-set of 3 laser mirrors with dielectric HR-surfaces, HR-plano,HR-concave, OC-planoconcave; r = 140 cm, diam. 12.7/ 25.4 mm 0.8 mW-alignment laser, coaxialtype random polarized TEM00-mode 2 xy-adjustable holders on slidemounts for alignment laser power supply for 0.8 mW-laser 3 slide mounts for opt. profilebench for rods of diameter10-13 mm

Protection glasses HeNe-laser 08581-10 Cleaning set for laser 08582-00 Basic set optical pumping 08590-93 Nd-YAG laser cavity mirror/holder 08591-01 Laser cav.mirror frequ. doubling 08591-02 Frequ. doubling crystal in holder 08593-00 Filter plate, short pass type 08594-00 Sensor f. measurem. of beam power 08595-00

Experimental set Fibre optics 08662-93

Laser, He-Ne, 0.2 / 1.0 mW

Exp.Set-Helium-Neon Laser 08656-93 Univ. power supply for He-Ne laser 08701-99

Basic set optical pumping Function and applications The light from a lasersiode is used to excite neodymium atoms in a Nd:YAG crystal. Benefits The power emitted by the laser diode can be measured as a function of the supply current. , The fluorescence spectrum of the Nd:YAG crystal is analysed and the main absorption lines of the Nd-Atoms are verified., Finally the half-life of the 4F3/2-level is estimated., With

Function and Applications Helium-neon laser with power switchover, with integrated power supply unit. Benefits Protection Class 2 in accordance with DIN 58126/6, anodized aluminum casing with very short construction design, with key-operated

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 293

2.5 Optics 2.5.5 Advanced optics and laser systems

switch, neutral absorber and integrated power supply unit, thermionic valve with very high service life through glass soldering technology.

Equipment and technical data ▪

Equipment and technical data Wavelength 632.8 nm, at 08180-93 light power switchover-capable 0.2 / 1 mW, minimum polarization 500:1, power consumption 35 VA, beam diameter 0.5 mm, beam divergence < 2 mrad, service life (thermionic valve) > 18000 h, connection voltage 230 V, dimensions (mm) 210 x 80 x 40, incl. holder stem (diameter: 10 mm) Laser, He-Ne, 0.2/1.0 mW, 230 V AC 08180-93 Laser, He-Ne, 1.0 mW, 230 V AC 08181-93

Green Laser 0.2/1 mW; 532 nm

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diodelaser 0.2/1 mW; 635 nm 08760-99 Fixing unit for diode laser 08384-00

Helium-neon laser 5 mW and accessories

Function and Applications Diode pumped Yttrium-Vanadate(Nd:YVO4) solid state laser with frequency doubling. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The laser complies with the technical requirements of DIN 608251,laser class 2. It is equipped with a keyswitch, an indicator diode indicating the operating status and an electronic shutter to limit the laser output. It istherefore approved for being used at schools and universities. The human eye is specially sensitive for green light, therefore this green laser is more suitable for eperiments using laser light then a red laser.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Output power: 1/0.2 mW Wavelength: 532 nm Lifetime: > 18000 h Beam diameter: approx. 2 mm linear polarised two support rods (length 180 mm and 150 mm, diameter 10 mm), a power supply unit, and instruction manual

08762-99

Diode laser 0.2/ 1 mW; 635 nm

Laser Helium-neon laser 5 mW with fixed HV connecting lead with HV connector for connection to the laser power supply unit. Wavelength 632.8 nm, modes TEMOO, degree of polarization: 1:500, beam diameter: 0.81 mm, beam divergence: 1 mrad, power drift: max. 2.5%/8 h, service life: approx. 15,000 h, cylinder housing: Ø = 44.2 mm; l = 400 mm, including 2 support holders with 3-point support and 2 setting rings. Power supply and shutter Supply HV for 5 mW lasers (08701-00). With coding switch for time-related control of the corresponding shutters (among other things) for optional hologram illumination times of 0.1..99 sec. Three-digit LED display for preselected and expired shutter time, actuator button for start / stop and reset, HV socket pair for laser attachment, output voltage: 1000...2450 V DC, output current: 2.8...6.5 mA, max. output power: 17 W, ignition voltage: > 10 kV DC, supply voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz, plastic casings with handle, casing dimensions (mm): 184 x 140 x 130, including shutter on cylindrical stem. He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder 08701-00 Power supply for laser head 5 mW 08702-93

Function and Applications Diode laser approved for being used at schools.

excellence in science 294

2.5 Optics 2.5.6 Optical components

Law of lenses and optical instruments

Law of lenses Magnification Focal length Object distance Telescope Microscope Path of a ray Convex lens Concave lens Real image Virtual image

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2210200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 295

2.5 Optics 2.5.6 Optical components

Mercury high pressure lamp 80 W

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications Light source for investigating the mercury spectrum. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Opaque black glass bulb with aperture. Ligth density: 600 cd/cm2. Colour temperature: 4100 K. Voltage: 0.75 A /115 V. Backplate: E27. Aperture opening: 30 mm.

Metal casing with rear adjustment knobs for the height and lateral orientation of the lamp Aperture tube (with quartz glass safety lens) for positioning on the condensers. Two micro switches make the accessible leads to the lamp dipolar free of voltage on opening the casing. Casing with 10-mm round upright and fixed connection cable with 4-pin special jack for connection to the ballast Lamp starting voltage 230 V Lamp operating voltage 42 V Lamp current/ output 1.3 A/ 50 W Luminous flux 2000 Im Luminous intensity 230 cd Light density 30000 cd/cm2 Arc length 1 mm Casing (mm) 134×118×151

Lamp,f.50W Hg high press. lamp 08144-00 Mercury high pressure lamp 50W 08144-10 Power supply 230 V/ 50 Hz for 50 W-Hg-lamp 13661-97

Helium-neon laser 5 mW and accessories

Accessories ▪

Additionally needed: power supply for spectral lamps (13662.97) and lamp holder E 27, on stem (06176.00).

Mercury high pressure lamp 80W 08147-00 Lamp holder E 27, on stem 06176-00 Power supply for spectral lamps 13662-97

Hg high pressure lamp, 50 W

Function and Applications It can be universally used for experiments in optics and for projections. When used in connection with interference filters, an intensive monochromatic light source is available, e. g. for determining Planck's quantum of action and coherence lengths. Benefits ▪ ▪

The experiment light is fitted with a mercury vapour extra-high pressure lamp and serves as a light source with an extremely high intensity and light density. Due to the quartz glass bulb of the lamp and the quartz glass safety lens at the light aperture tube of the lamp, the light provides a high proportion of UV.

excellence in science 296

With coding switch for time-related control of the corresponding shutters (among other things) for optional hologram illumination times of 0.1..99 sec. Three-digit LED display for preselected and expired shutter time, actuator button for start / stop and reset, HV socket pair for laser attachment, output voltage: 1000...2450 V DC, output current: 2.8...6.5 mA, max. output power: 17 W, ignition voltage: > 10 kV DC, supply voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz, plastic casings with handle, casing dimensions (mm): 184 x 140 x 130, including shutter on cylindrical stem. He/Ne Laser, 5mW with holder 08701-00 Power supply for laser head 5 mW 08702-93

2.5 Optics 2.5.6 Optical components

Laser, He-Ne, 0,2 / 1,0 mW

Diode laser 0.2/ 1 mW; 635 nm

Function and Applications Helium-neon laser with power switchover, with integrated power supply unit.

Function and Applications

Benefits

Diode laser approved for being used at schools.

Protection Class 2 in accordance with DIN 58126/6, anodized aluminum casing with very short construction design, with key-operated switch, neutral absorber and integrated power supply unit, thermionic valve with very high service life through glass soldering technology.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Green Laser 0.2/1 mW; 532 nm

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diodelaser 0.2/1 mW; 635 nm 08760-99 Fixing unit for diode laser 08384-00

Function and Applications Diode pumped Yttrium-Vanadate(Nd:YVO4) solid state laser with frequency doubling. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

08762-99

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 297

2.5 Optics 2.5.6 Optical components

excellence in science 298

2 Physics 2.6 Modern Physics

Modern Physics 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6

X-ray Physics Quantum Physics Particle Physics Molecule and Solid State Physics Atomic and nuclear Physics Radioactivity

300 309 323 325 333 343

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 299

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

excellence in science 300

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 301

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

excellence in science 302

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set

▪ ▪ ▪

Accessories are always ready at hand Utensils are stored safely Dust-free storage

Equipment and technical data The set includes the following components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XR 4.0 X-ray expert unit, 09057-99 XR 4.0 X-ray plug-in unit with a tungsten X-ray tube, 09057-80 measure Xrm 4.0 X-ray Software, 14414-61 XR 4.0 X-ray slide mounts for the optical bench, 4 pieces, 09057-19 XR 4.0 X-ray fluoroscopic screen, 09057-26 XR 4.0 X-ray protective sheath, 09057-49

Recommended upgrade sets for various applications and topics

Function and Applications Basic set covering the fundamental principles and areas of applications of X-rays, e.g. fluoroscopy experiments and X-ray photography. It can be extended by upgrade sets for specific applications and topics. Benefits Safety concept complying with the applicable standards and regulations ▪ ▪

▪

The set complies with all of the German (X-ray ordinance, RÖV) and European regulations for radiation protection. Type approval by the German Federal Office for Radiation Protection (Bundesamt für Strahlenschutz, BFS) concerning the use of the unit at schools and universities in Germany (not subject to approval, but to reporting). (Type approval submitted.) Lead-enforced acrylic glass windows as a shield against the X-rays (breakproof in accordance with DIN/EN 61010)

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XRW 4.0 X-ray wireless demonstration upgrade set, 09115-88 XRP 4.0 X-ray solid state upgrade set, 09120-88 XRC 4.0 X-ray characteristics upgrade set, 09130-88 XRS 4.0 X-ray structural analysis upgrade set, 09140-88 XRI 4.0 X-ray imaging upgrade set, 09150-88 XRM 4.0 X-ray material analysis upgrade set, 09160-88 XRD 4.0 X-ray dosimetry and radiation damage upgrade set, 09170-88 XRT 4.0 X-ray Computer Tomography upgrade set, 09180-88

09110-88

XRP 4.0 X-ray Solid state physics upgrade set

S-Lock - PHYWE's safety lock ▪ ▪

Electro-mechanical system for maximum security Prevents door opening during X-ray emission by multiple safety circuits

MultiLINK ▪ ▪ ▪

External socket panel Easy and safe connection of PHYWE components, such as the X-ray energy detector (09058-30) and other standard devices, e.g. digital cameras USB 2.0, N2, BNC, XRED,...

Plug & measure ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Self-calibrating goniometer (option) safe and easy handling collision protected goniometer Protects expensive equipment: GM counter tube and X-ray energy detector (XRED)

Tube XChange Technology ▪ ▪ ▪

Quick-change technology for four different X-ray tubes (W, Cu, Mo, and Fe) adjustment free Complete protection against touching hot parts

Function and Applications Upgrade set as an extension of the XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set (09110-88). Particularly suitable for fundamental experiments in solid-state physics with X-rays and in the diffractometry of monocrystals. This set covers the following experiments and topics: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Benefits ▪

XXL Chamber ▪ ▪

Particularly spacious experiment chamber for sophisticated setups Integrated optical bench for the easy and reproducible set-up of experiments (can be extended to the outside)

3View ▪

Observation through windows on three sides; optimal for the transparent execution of experiments

Lockable tray for accessories

Fluoroscopy and X-ray imaging Debye-Scherrer analyses Fundamental principles of X-ray spectroscopy Bragg reflection Bremsspectrum /characteristic lines Determination of Planck's quantum of action X-ray diffractometry

▪ ▪ ▪

Goniometer as an essential part of the set with two independent stepper motors for rotating the sample and counter tube holders either separately or coupled in a 2:1 ratio. The counter tube holder of the goniometer with a slit diaphragm holder for absorption foils can be moved in order to change the angular resolution. Includes a light barrier system for limiting the permissible swivelling range as a function of the block position. Plug & measure: The goniometer can be connected during the operation and it will be automatically identified.

Equipment and technical data The set includes the following components:

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 303

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer, 09057-10 Geiger-Müller counter tube, type B, 09005-00 XR 4.0 X-ray LiF monocrystal in a holder, 09056-05 XR 4.0 X-ray potassium bromide (KBr) monocrystal in a holder, 09056-01

XRS 4.0 X-ray structural analysis upgrade set

09120-88

XRC 4.0 X-ray characteristics upgrade set

Function and Applications Upgrade set as an extension of the XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set (09110-88). This set is particularly suitable for the structural analysis of different types of samples in materials physics, chemical analysis, and mineralogy. The set covers the following experiments and topics:

Function and Applications Upgrade set as an extension of the XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set (09110-88). It is used for the characterisation of the radiation spectra of various different anode materials. It is particularly suitable for studying the fundamental principles of X-ray physics. The set covers the following experiments and topics: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fluoroscopy and X-ray imaging Debye-Scherrer analyses Fundamental principles of X-ray spectroscopy Bragg reflection Bremsspectrum K and L edges Characteristic lines of different anode materials Moseley's law Determination of the Rydberg constant Duane-Hunt's law Determination of Planck's quantum of action X-ray diffractometry

Benefits Plug & measure ▪ ▪ ▪

Quick change of the X-ray tubes in the set Connection of the goniometer during operation Automatic identification of the anode material of the X-ray tube - adjustment free.

The housings of the X-ray tubes have two safety contact pins that enable the tube operation only if the plug-in unit has been installed correctly. Equipment and technical data The set includes the following components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer, 09057-10 Geiger-Müller counter tube, type B, 09005-00 XR 4.0 X-ray LiF crystal in a holder, 09056-05 XR 4.0 X-ray diaphragm tube with Ni foil, 09056-03 XR 4.0 X-ray potassium bromide monocrystal in a holder for the Bragg reflection, 09056-01 XR 4.0 X-ray diaphragm tube with Zr foil, 09058-03 XR 4.0 X-ray plug-in unit with an iron X-ray tube, 09057-70 XR 4.0 X-ray plug-in unit with a molybdenum X-ray tube, 09057-60 XR 4.0 X-ray plug-in unit with a copper X-ray tube, 09057-50

09130-88

excellence in science 304

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Fluoroscopy and X-ray imaging Debye-Scherrer analyses and images Laue diffraction patterns Fundamental principles of X-ray spectroscopy Bragg reflection Bremsspectrum Determination of Planck's quantum of action X-ray diffractometry Texture analyses of grown materials Monochromatisation of X-rays Analysis of crystals with different crystal structures: cubic, hexagonal, tetragonal, diamond, BCC, and FCC

Benefits ▪ ▪

Material analyses with different techniques: diffractometric and photographic analyses Samples of different structures: monocrystalline and polycrystalline samples, powder crystallites

Equipment and technical data The set includes the following components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer, 09057-10 Geiger-Müller counter tube, type B, 09005-00 XR 4.0 X-ray LiF crystal in a holder, 09056-05 XR 4.0 X-ray NaCl monocrystals, set of 3, 09058-01 XR 4.0 X-ray set of chemicals for edge absorption, 1 set, 09056-04 XR 4.0 X-ray diaphragm tube with Ni foil, 09056-03 XR 4.0 X-ray potassium bromide monocrystal in a holder for the Bragg reflection, 09056-01 XR 4.0 X-ray diaphragm tube with Zr foil, 09058-03 XR 4.0 X-ray crystal holder for Laue images, 09058-11 XR 4.0 X-ray universal crystal holder for the X-ray unit, 09058-02 XR 4.0 X-ray sample holder for powder samples, 09058-09 XR 4.0 X-ray accessories for the structural analysis set, 09057-28

09140-88

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

XRM 4.0 X-ray material analysis upgrade set

Additional XR 4.0 X-ray upgrade sets

Function and Applications

Upgrade sets as an extension of the XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set (09110-80).

Upgrade set as an extension of the XRE 4.0 X-ray expert set (09110-88). This set is particularly suitable for the qualitative and quantitative X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy of metallic samples in physics and material science (non-destructive testing). The set covers the following experiments and topics: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Various different types of samples can be analysed: powders, solids, and liquids Material analyses of pure metals and multi-component alloys Compton effect - Moseley's laws energy-dispersive Bragg structure analysis K and L edge absorption Determination of the lattice constant of monocrystals Duane-Hunt's law of displacement X-ray fluorescence analysis for layer thickness determination Characteristics and the special resolving power of an X-ray energy detector

XRI 4.0 X-ray imaging upgrade set 09150-88 XRD 4.0 X-ray dosimetry and radiation damage upgrade set 09170-88 XRT 4.0 X-ray Computer Tomography upgrade set 09180-88 XRW 4.0 X-ray wireless demonstration upgrade set 09115-88

XR 4.0 X-ray expert unit

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

In combination with the XR 4.0 X-ray multi-channel analyser (13727-99), the entire X-ray energy spectrum (2-35 keV) of the analysed materials can be determined. The set includes a sensitive XR 4.0 X-ray energy detector (09058-30) with a resolution of FWHM < 400 eV, rate independent up to 20 kcps. The XR 4.0 X-ray energy detector is mounted directly and easily onto the XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer (09057-10) of the XR 4.0 X-ray unit (09057-99). Direct connection of the XR 4.0 X-ray energy detector (09058-30) via the internal and external socket panel to the multichannel analyser (13727-99) that also supplies the supply voltage. Immediately ready for use, as indicated by a standby LED

Equipment and technical data The set includes the following components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer, 09057-10 XR 4.0 X-ray energy detector, 09058-30 Multi-channel analyser, 13727-99 Software for the multi-channel analyser, 14452-61 XR 4.0 X-ray set of chemicals for edge absorption, 1 set, 09056-04 XR 4.0 X-ray lithium fluoride (LiF) monocrystal in a holder, 09056-05 XR 4.0 X-ray universal crystal holder for the X-ray unit, 09058-02 XR 4.0 X-ray sample holder for powder samples, 09058-09 XR 4.0 X-ray diaphragm tube with Zr foil, 09058-03 XR 4.0 X-ray Compton module, 09058-04 XR 4.0 X-ray accessories for the material analysis set, 09057-36 Balance, DENVER DLT-411, 400 g/0.1 g, 49061-00

Function and Applications School/full-protection device with X-ray tube quick-change technology for fluoroscopy and X-ray imaging, ionisation and dosimetry experiments, Laue and Debye-Scherrer images, X-ray spectroscopy, Bragg reflection, bremsspectrum/characteristic lines of various different anode materials, Moseley's law, determination of Planck's constant and Rydberg constant, Duane Hunt's law, material-thickness- and energydependent absorption, K and Ledges, contrast medium experiments, Compton scattering, and X-ray diffractometry. Benefits Safety concept complying with the applicable standards and regulations ▪ ▪

09160-88 ▪ ▪

The unit complies with all of the German (X-ray ordinance, RÖV) and European regulations for radiation protection. Type approval by the German Federal Office for Radiation Protection (Bundesamt für Strahlenschutz, BFS) concerning the use of the unit at schools and universities in Germany (not subject to approval, but to reporting). (Type approval submitted.) Lead-enforced acrylic glass windows as a shield against the X-rays (breakproof in accordance with DIN/EN61010) PHYWE safety lock technology (registered utility model)

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 305

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

S-Lock - PHYWE's safety lock ▪ ▪

measure XRm 4.0 X-ray Software

electro-mechanical system for maximum security Prevents door opening during X-ray emission by multiple safety circuits

MultiLINK ▪ ▪ ▪

External socket panel Easy and safe connection of PHYWE components, such as the X-ray energy detector (09058-30) and other standard devices, e.g. digital cameras USB 2.0, N2, BNC, XRED,...

Plug & measure ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Self-calibrating goniometer (option) safe and easy handling collision protected goniometer Protects expensive equipment: GM counter tube and X-ray energy detector (XRED)

Tube XChange Technology ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and application

Quick-change technology for four different X-ray tubes (W, Cu, Mo, and Fe) adjustment free Complete protection against touching hot parts

XXL Chamber ▪ ▪

Benefits

Particularly spacious experiment chamber for sophisticated setups Integrated optical bench for the easy and reproducible set-up of experiments (can be extended to the outside)

3View ▪

Observation through windows on three sides; optimal for the transparent execution of experiments

Lockable tray for accessories ▪ ▪ ▪

Accessories are always ready at hand Utensils are stored safely Dust-free storage

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Microprocessor-controlled basic unit with two independent safety circuits for the door position and two independent monitoring circuits for the door locking system Four different X-ray tubes (Fe, Cu, Mo, and W) can be plugged in and remain visible during operation Determination of the X-ray intensity via an integrated GeigerMüller counter tube connection with a variable counter tube voltage (0...700 V) and an integrated loudspeaker TFT colour display (dimensions 4,3"(95x54 mm), 16 Bit, 56.536 colours, 480x272 Pixel) for the manual control of the unit "Display Connect" interface for the connection of a large-scale display unit True-colour line-shaped interior LED lighting system High voltage 0.0...35.0 kV Emission current 0.0...1.0 mA Housing (mm): 682 (W) x 620 (H) x 450(D) Experiment chamber (mm): 440 (W) x 345(H) x 354 (D) Connection: 110/240 V~, 50/60 Hz Power consumption: 200 VA Mass: 55 kg PC control via USB 2.0

Required accessories When the unit is used for the first time, at least one X-ray tube, e.g. the tungsten X-ray tube 09057-80, is required. XR 4.0 X-ray expert unit 09057-99 XR 4.0 X-ray goniometer 09057-10

excellence in science 306

Software package of the "measure" series for controlling the XR 4.0 Expert Unit (X-ray unit). XRm 4.0 consists of a module for device control and measurement data recording and a module for measurement data processing (main program). AUTORUN ▪ ▪ ▪

Automatic identification of the connected devices of the XR 4.0 series Loading of predefined settings Working directly without the need for specialist knowledge

Double control ▪ ▪

Simultaneous operation of the XR 4.0 Expert Unit via manual control and via a computer No restrictions concerning the execution of experiments

Plug & measure ▪

The intuitive user concept considerably simplifies the operation of such a complex device and puts the experiment into the focus of attention.

Multilingual ▪

XRm 4.0 is available in more than 20 languages, among them German, English, French, Spanish, Arabic, and Russian. As a result, XRm 4.0 is also suitable for beginners' laboratory courses at universities and the secondary school level.

Reference experiments ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪

The comprehensive collection of reference experiments simplifies the selection of suitable experiments and can be used as a template for own experiment scripts/laboratory handbooks. All of the relevant topics concerning the characterisation and application of X-rays are documented. Experiment descriptions in PDF files with learning objectives, brief description, set-up picture, equipment list, experiment procedure, reference results with a reference to the theoretical background, and device and software settings that are specifically adapted to the experiment. All of the experiment-relevant settings can be loaded at the push of a button. The experiment descriptions include configuration files and example measurements. They are provided free of charge on the measure DVD.

System requirements ▪

PC with at least a Pentium 3 processor, 512 MB RAM, 1 GB free hard drive space, DVD drive, USB 2.0, Microsoft ®Windows XP or higher.

measure XRm 4.0 X-ray Software 14414-61

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

measure XRt 4.0 X-ray CT Software 14421-61

XR 4.0 X-ray Universal crystals and holder

XR 4.0 X-ray Plug-in tubes

Function and application Monocrystals mounted in holder. Function and Applications Factory adjusted tube in sheet steel housing ready for use in connection with XR 4.0 expert unit. Housing with plugs to accept the tubes operating quantities from the basic unit. With handle, mechanical lock and two switching pins, which only operate correspondingly security microswitches of the basic unit when the plug-in module is correcly inserted. Benefits Tube XChange Technology: ▪ ▪ ▪

Quick-change technology for four different X-ray tubes (W, Cu, Mo, and Fe) adjustment free Complete protection against touching hot parts

In connection with x-ray unit for Laue-experiments and for the analysis of x-ray energies by the Bragg-method. XR 4.0 X-ray Lithium fluorid crystal, mounted 09056-05 XR 4.0 X-ray Potassium Bromide Crystal, mounted 09056-01 XR 4.0 X-ray Univ. crystal holder for x-ray-unit 09058-02

XR 4.0 X-ray energy detector (XRED)

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Anode angle 19° Max. operation datas 1 mA/35 kV Test voltage 50 kV Mass 4.3 kg Dimensions 26.7 x 18.8 x 20.3 cm Incl. dust protection cover

XR 4.0 X-ray Plug-in Cu tube 09057-50 XR 4.0 X-ray Plug-in Mo tube 09057-60 XR 4.0 X-ray Plug-in Fe tube 09057-70 XR 4.0 X-ray plug-in unit W tube 09057-80

Function and Applications With the new X-ray energy detector you can directly determine the energies of single x-ray quanta. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

In connection with the multi-channel analyser (MCA) you can characterise the complete x-ray energy spectrum of the analysed material. Characteristic x-ray lines for all elements of the PSE included in the software. Directly mountable on the goniometer of the x-ray unit, without loss of functionality of the goniometer Directly connectable to MCA (USB) without any additional interface on Green Operation-LED Parallel observation of the signals in the oscilloscope (optional)

Typical application laboratory experiments in universities and high schools: ▪ ▪

Characterisation of X-rays of different anode materials (Cu, Fe, Mo) Fluorescence analysis of pure materials and alloys

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 307

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.1 X-ray Physics

▪ ▪

Determination of the composition of alloys Compton effect-Mosley's law-Energy dispersive Bragg structure analysis

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Energy range: 2 - 60 keV Resolution: < 400 eV Active detector surface 0,8 mm² Power supply included Rate independent resolution up to 20 Kcps (kilo counts per second) max. 4000 channels 2 or 3 point calibration

09058-30

XR 4.0 X-ray Specimen sets for X-ray fluorescence

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Analogue input: negative pulse impedance: 3.3 kilohms, 150 pF Amplification: three stages, 6, 12 and 24 digitally adjustable Pulse height: max. 4 V Analogue output: positive pulse 0 to 4 VPulse length: 15 µs offset approx. 12-bit digital resolution Maximum offset: 4 V (disable input/coincidence input) Logic input (TTL) for coincidence measurements at voltage outputs Diode socket: ± 12 V / max. 30 mA BNC socket (bias voltage): -33, -66, -99 V Plastic case with carrying handle Dimensions H × W × D (mm): 90 x 140 x 130 Mains voltage: 115/230 V~ Mains frequency: 50/60 Hz Weight: 1550 g

Accessories Multi-channel analyser software (required)

XR 4.0 X-ray Specimen set metals for X-ray fluorescence, set of 7 09058-31 Xr 4.0 X-ray Specimen set alloys for fluorescence, set of 5 09058-33 XR 4.0 X-ray Specimen set metals for fluorescence, set of 4 09058-34

Multi channel analyser - extended version suitable also for operation of the X-ray energy detector

Function and applications The multi-channel analyser is for analysing voltage pulses which are proportional to energy and for determining pulse rates and intensities in conjunction with an X-ray detector, alpha detector or gamma detector. The analogue pulses from the detector are shaped by the analyser, digitised and summed per channel according to pulse height. This results in a frequency distribution of detected pulses dependent on the energy of the radiation. Equipment and technical data The multi-channel analyser has an offset function for enhancing the energy resolution. It possesses the following features: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Analogue output for observing heights of the pulse spectrum on an oscilloscope, A USB output for connecting to a computer, Integrated power supply for alpha detector pre-amp Integrated power supply for X-ray energy detector Includes 1.5-m mains lead, USB cable type A/B Multi-channel analyser software (required) Resolution (per spectrum): up to 4096 channels (12 bit) Memory: unlimited Lag time: 60 µs Coincidence window: 1 µs

excellence in science 308

Multi channel analyser - extended version suitable also for operation of the X-ray energy detector 13727-99 measure Software multi channel analyser 14452-61

TESS expert Handbook Physics X-Ray Experiments

Experiments with X-rays and their use in physics, chemistry, biology, medicine, material science, and geology Description Comprehensive collection of reference experiments concerning the fundamental principles and use of X-rays in physics, chemistry, biology, medicine, material science, and geology with the XR 4.0 X-ray unit platform as a pool of ideas concerning the potential areas of application in demonstration and laboratory experiments. A clear matrix simplifies the orientation in terms of scientific fields and topics. Topics ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Characteristic X-radiation / atomic structure / quantum physics and chemistry X-ray absorption Compton scattering Dosimetry Crystal structures/structural analysis with X-rays/Debye-Scherrer experiments (counting tube goniometer) Transirradiation experiments/non-destructive testing

01200-02

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Quantum eraser

Principle A Mach-Zehnder interferometer is lit by a diverged laser beam. Ring-shaped interference patterns then appear on the screen behind the interferometer. If polarisation filters with perpendicular alignments are placed in the two arms of the interferometer, the interference patterns vanish. The quantum-mechanical interpretation of this is that the photons have been lent a property (polarisation), which helps to make it possible to see which of the two interferometer arms the photon has passed through. However, this “which path?” information is not compatible with a quantum-mechanical interpretation of interference. A third polarising filter behind the interferometer output works like a “quantum eraser”. Placing this filter in an alignment at 45° to both the other filters causes the interference pattern to return beyond it, i.e. the path information has been “erased”. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2220800

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 309

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Elementary charge and Millikan experiment

Principle Charged oil droplets subjected to an electric field and to gravity between the plates of a capacitor are accelerated by application of a voltage. The elementary charge is determined from the velocities in the direction of gravity and in the opposite direction. Tasks 1. 2.

Measurement of the rise and fall times of oil droplets with various charges at different voltages. Determination of the radii and the charge of the droplets.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Electric field Viscosity Stokes' law Droplet method Electron charge

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510100

excellence in science 310

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Specific charge of the electron e/m

Principle Electrons are accelerated in an electric field and enter a magnetic field at right angles to the direction of motion. The specific charge of the electron is determined from the accelerating voltage, the magnetic field strength and the radius of the electron orbit. Tasks 1.

Determination of the specific charge of the electron (e/m0) from the path of an electron beam in crossed electric and magnetic fields of variable strength.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cathode rays Lorentz force Electron in crossed fields Electron mass Electron charge

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 311

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Franck-Hertz experiment with a Hg tube

Principle Electrons are accelerated in a tube filled with mercury vapour. The excitation energy of mercury is determined from the distance between the equidistant minima of the electron current in a variable opposing electric field. Tasks 1. 2.

To record the countercurrent strength Ι in a Franck-Hertz tube as a function of the anode voltage U. To determine the excitation energy E from the positions of the current strength minima or maxima by difference formation.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪

Energy quantum Electron collision Excitation energy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510311

excellence in science 312

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Franck-Hertz experiment with a Ne tube

Principle Electrons are accelerated in a tube filled with neon vapour. The excitation energy of neon is determined from the distance between the equidistant minima of the electron current in a variable opposing electric field. Tasks 1. 2.

To record the counter current strength I in a Franck-Hertz tube as a function of the anode voltage U. To determine the excitation energy E from the positions of the current strength minima or maxima by difference formation.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Energy quantum Quantum leap Electron collision Excitation energy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510315

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 313

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Fine structure: one and two electron spectra

Principle The well-known spectral lines of He are used for calibrating the diffraction spectrometer. The wave-lengths of the spectral lines of Na, Hg, Cd and Zn are determined using the spectrometer. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Calibration of the spectrometer using the He spectrum and the determination of the constant of the grating. Determination of the spectrum of Na. Determination of the fine structure splitting. Determination of the most intense spectral lines of Hg, Cd and Zn.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diffraction spectrometer Spin Angular momentum Spin-orbital angular momentum interaction Multiplicity Energy level Excitation energy Selection rules Doublets Parahelium Orthohelium Exchange energy Angular momentum Singlet and triplet series Selection rules Forbidden transitions

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510600

excellence in science 314

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Balmer series/ determination of Rydberg's constant

Principle The spectral lines of hydrogen and mercury are examined by means of a diffraction grating. The known spectral lines of Hg are used to determine the grating constant. The wave lengths of the visible lines of the Balmer series of H are measured. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the diffraction grating constant by means of the Hg spectrum. Determination of the visible lines of the Balmer series in the H spectrum, of Rydberg's constant and of the energy levels.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Diffraction image of a diffraction grating Visible spectral range Single electron atom Atomic model according to Bohr Lyman-, Paschen-, Brackett and Pfund Series Energy level Planck's constant Binding energy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510700

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 315

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Atomic spectra of two-electron system: He, Hg

Principle The spectral lines of He and Hg are examined by means of a diffraction grating. The wavelengths of the lines are determined from the geometrical arrangement and the diffraction grating constants. Tasks 1. 2.

Determination of the wavelengths of the most intense spectral lines of He. Determination of the wavelengths of the most intense spectral lines of Hg.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Parahelium Orthohelium Exchange energy Spin Angular momentum Spinorbit interaction Singlet and triplet series Multiplicity Rydberg series Selection rules Forbidden transition Metastable state Energy level Excitation energy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510800

excellence in science 316

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Zeeman effect with a CCD camera including the measurement software

Principle The "Zeeman effect" is the splitting up of the spectral lines of atoms within a magnetic field. The simplest is the splitting up of one spectral line into three components called the "normal Zeeman effect". In this experiment the normal Zeeman effect as well as the anomalous Zeeman effect are studied using a cadmium spectral lamp as a specimen. The cadmium lamp is submitted to different magnetic flux densities and the splitting up of the cadmium lines (normal Zeeman effect 643.8 nm, red light; anomalous Zeeman effect 508,6nm, green light) is investigated using a Fabry-Perot interferometer. The evaluation of the results leads to a fairly precise value for Bohr's magneton. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Using the Fabry-Perot interferometer and a selfmade telescope the splitting up of the central line into different lines is measured in wave numbers as a function of the magnetic flux density. From the results of point 1. a value for Bohr's magneton is evaluated. The light emitted within the direction of the magnetic field is qualitatively investigated.

What you can learn about Bohr's atomic model, Quantisation of energy levels, Electron spin, Bohr's magneton, Interference of electromagnetic waves, Fabry-Perot interferometer Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511005

Zeeman effect with an electromagnet

P2511001

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 317

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Zeeman effect with a variable magnetic system and a CCD camera including the measurement software

Zeeman effect with a variable magnetic system

P2511006

excellence in science 318

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Stern-Gerlach experiment

Principle A beam of potassium atoms generated in a hot furnace travels along a specific path in a magnetic two-wire field. Because of the magnetic moment of the potassium atoms, the non-homogeneity of the field applies a force at right angles to the direction of their motion. The potassium atoms are thereby deflected from their path. By measuring the density of the beam of particles in a plane of detection lying behind the magnetic field, it is possible to draw conclusions as to the magnitude and direction of the magnetic moment of the potassium atoms. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Recording the distribution of the particle beam density in the detection plane in the absence of the effective magnetic field. Fitting a curve consisting of a straight line, a parabola, and another straight line, to the experimentally determined special distribution of the particle beam density. Determining the dependence of the particle beam density in the detection plane with different values of the non-homogeneity of the effective magnetic field. Investigating the positions of the maxima of the particle beam density as a function of the non-homogeneity of the magnetic field.

What you can learn about Magnetic moment, Bohr magneton, Directional quantization, g-factor, Electron spin, Atomic beam, Maxwellian velocity distribution, Twowire field Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511101

Stern-Gerlach experiment with a stepper motor and interface P2511111

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 319

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Electron spin resonance

Principle The g-factor of a DPPH (Diphenylpikrylhydrazyl) and the half-width of the absorption line are determined, using the ESR apparatus. Tasks With ESR on a DPPH specimen determination of

▪ 1. 2.

the g-factor of the free electron,and the half-width of the absorption line.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Zeeman effect Energy quantum Quantum number Resonance g-factor Landé factor

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511200

excellence in science 320

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Electron diffraction

Principle Fast electrons are diffracted from a polycrystalline layer of graphite: interference rings appear on a fluorescent screen. The interplanar spacing in graphite is determined from the diameter of the rings and the accelerating voltage. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To measure the diameter of the two smallest diffraction rings at different anode voltages. To calculate the wavelength of the electrons from the anode voltages. To determine the interplanar spacing of graphite from the relationship between the radius of the diffraction rings and the wavelength.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Bragg reflection Debye-Scherrer method Lattice planes Graphite structure Material waves De Broglie equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511300

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 321

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.2 Quantum Physics

Compton effect with Cobra3

Principle The energy of scattered gamma-radiation is measured as a function of the angle of scatter. The Compton wavelength is determined from the measured values. Tasks 1.

Calibrate the measuring set-up with the aid of a Cs-137 calibrating source (37 kBq), an Am-241 source (370 kBq) and a Na-22 source (74 kBq). Measure the energy of the Cs-137661.6 keV peaks scattered at different angles and calculate the Compton wavelength from the readings taken.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Corpuscle Scattering Compton wavelength g-quanta De Broglie wavelength Klein-Nishina formula

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524411

Compton effect with the multi-channel analyser

P2524415

excellence in science 322

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.3 Particle Physics

Visualisation of radioactive particles/ diffusion cloud chamber

Principle Radioactivity is a subject in our society which has been playing an important role throughout politics, economy and media for many years now. The fact that this radiation cannot be seen or felt by the human being and that the effects of this radiation are still not fully explored yet, causes emotions like no other scientific subject before. The high-performance diffusion cloud chamber serves for making the tracks of cosmic and terrestrial radiation visible so that a wide range of natural radiation types can be identified. Furthermore, the diffusion cloud chamber offers the opportunity to carry out physical experiments with the aid of artificial radiation sources. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Determination of the amount of background radiation Visualisation of alpha, beta, gamma-particles and mesons Visualisation of the Thorium (Radon) decay Deflection of beta-particles in a magnetic field

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

α,β,γ -particles β-deflection Ionising particles Mesons Cosmic radiation Radioactive decay Decay series Particle velocity Lorentz force

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2520400

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 323

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.3 Particle Physics

Diffusion cloud chamber 80 x 80 cm, PJ 80, 230 V

Diffusion cloud chamber, 45 x 45 cm PJ45, 230 V

Function and Applications Continuously working Large-Diffusion cloud chamber on box; the instrument can be set up by itself. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The Large-Diffusion cloud chamber with an 8O x 8O cm active observation surface are hermetically closed units. They each consist of a pedestal for the chamber on top of which lies the observation chamber. The Chamber's pedestal holds the refrigerating unit, power supply, a tank for alcohol, a pump for alcohol and a timer. On top of the pedestal, the observation chamber is installed. The top and the sides of the observation chamber are made of glass. Underneath the upper sheet of glass, thin heating wires are installed, which heat up this part of the chamber and thus keep the chamber from misting over. These wires simultaneously serve as high-voltage mesh to gather up ions.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Dimensions: Height: 126 cm, Width: 128 cm, Depth: 128 cm Height of pedestal: 10 cm Active observation surface: (8O × 8O) cm Weight: approx. 450 kg Power input: approx. 2.0 kVA

09043-93

excellence in science 324

Function and Applications Continuously working Large-Diffusion Cloudchamber on pedestal; handles on side help to transport the instrument. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Dimensions:Height: 60 cm, Width: 64 cm, Depth: 64 cm Active observation surface: (45 × 45) cm Weight: approx. 80 kg Power input: approx. 0.9 kVA Power supply: 230 V; 50/60 Hz

09046-93

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Electron spin resonance

Principle The g-factor of a DPPH (Diphenylpikrylhydrazyl) and the half-width of the absorption line are determined, using the ESR apparatus. Tasks With ESR on a DPPH specimen determination of

▪ 1. 2.

the g-factor of the free electron,and the half-width of the absorption line.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Zeeman effect Energy quantum Quantum number Resonance g-factor Landé factor

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 325

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Hall effect in p-germanium (with the teslameter)

What you can learn about Semiconductor, Band theory, Forbidden zone, Intrinsic conductivity, Extrinsic conductivity, Valence band, Conduction band, Lorentz force, Magnetic resistance, Mobility, Conductivity, Band spacing, Hall coefficient Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2530101

Hall effect in p-germanium (with Cobra3) P2530111 Hall effect in n-germanium (with the teslameter) P2530201 Hall effect in n-germanium (with Cobra3) P2530211

excellence in science 326

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Band gap of germanium

Principle The conductivity of a germanium test piece is measured as a function of temperature. The energy gap is determined from the measured values. Tasks 1. 2.

The current and voltage are to be measured across a germanium test-piece as a function of temperature. From the measurements, the conductivity s is to be calculated and plotted against the reciprocal of the temperature T. A linear plot is obtained, from whose slope the energy gap of germanium can be determined.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Semiconductor Band theory Forbidden band Intrinsic conduction Extrinsic conduction Impurity depletion Valence band Conduction band

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2530401

Band gap of germanium (with Cobra3) P2530411

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 327

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Hall effect in metals

Principle The Hall effect in thin zinc and copper foils is studied and the Hall coefficient determined. The effect of temperature on the Hall voltage is investigated. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

excellence in science 328

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Paschen curve/ plasma physics

Principle The electric breakthrough voltage in air is measured in dependence on electrode distance and gas pressure. The results are compared to the Paschen curve which is a result of Townsend electric breakdown theory which assumes the product pd of electrode distance d and gas pressure p to be the similarity parameter describing the electric breakdown behavior of a gas. Tasks 1.

Measure the voltage between plane parallel electrodes at which electric breakthrough occurs in dependence on electrode distance d at different gas pressures p in the hPa range. Create plots of the break through voltage over electrode distance d and over product of electrode distance and pressure pd (Paschencurve).

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Glow discharge Electron avalanches Free path length Townsend breakdown theory Paschen curve

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2531100

Surface treatment/ plasma physics P2531000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 329

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Atomic Resolution of the graphite surface by STM (scanning tunnelling microscope)

Principle Approaching a very sharp metal tip to an electrically conductive sample by applying a electrical field leads to a current between tip and sample without any mechanical contact. This so-called tunneling current is used to investigate the electronic topography on the sub nanometer scale of a fresh prepared graphite (HOPG) surface. By scanning the tip line-by-line across the surface graphite atoms and the hexagonal structure are imaged. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Prepare a Pt-Ir tip and the graphite (HOPG) sample and approach the tip to the sample. Investigate the topography of clean terraces and the step height between neighboring terraces in constant-current mode. Image the arrangement of graphite atoms on a clean terrace by optimize tunneling and scanning parameters. Interpret the structure by analyzing angles and distances between atoms and atomic rows and by using the 2D and 3D graphite model. Measure and compare images in the constant-height and constant-current mode.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Tunneling effect Hexagonal Structures Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM) Imaging on the sub nanometer scale Piezo-electric devices Local Density Of States (LDOS) Constant-Height and Constant-Current-Mode

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P2532000

excellence in science 330

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Investigate in surface atomic structures and defects of diffrent samples by STM

Principle Approaching a very sharp metal tip to anelectrically conductive sample byapplying a electrical field leads to acurrent between tip and sample withoutany mechanical contact. This so-calledtunneling current is used to investigatethe electronic topography on the subnanometer scale of a fresh preparedgraphite (HOPG) surface. By scanning thetip line-by-line across the surfacegraphite atoms and the hexagonalstructure are imaged. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Prepare a Pt-Ir tip and the graphite (HOPG) sample and approach the tip to the sample. Investigate the topography of cleanterraces and the step height betweenneighboring terraces in constant-currentmode. Image the arrangement of graphiteatoms on a clean terrace by optimize tunneling and scanning parameters. Interpret the structure by analyzing angles and distances between atoms and atomic rows and by using the 2D and 3D graphite model. Measure and compare images in the constant-height and constant-current mode.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P2532500

Nanoscale workfunction measurements by scanning tunneling spectroscopy P2533000 Nanoscale electrical charakteristics of different samples by STS P2533500 Application and visualisation of quantum mechanical effects by STM P2535000

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 331

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.4 Molecule and Solid State Physics

Roughness and nanomorhology of different metal samples using by STM Principle Approaching a very sharp metal tip to anelectrically conductive sample byapplying a electrical field leads to acurrent between tip and sample withoutany mechanical contact. This so-calledtunneling current is used to investigatethe electronic topography on the subnanometer scale of a fresh preparedgraphite (HOPG) surface. By scanning thetip line-by-line across the surfacegraphite atoms and the hexagonalstructure are imaged. Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Prepare a Pt-Ir tip and the graphite(HOPG) sample and approach the tip tothe sample. Investigate the topography of cleanterraces and the step height betweenneighboring terraces in constant-currentmode. Image the arrangement of graphiteatoms on a clean terrace by optimizetunneling and scanning parameters.Interpret the structure by analyzingangles and distances between atoms andatomic rows and by using the 2D and 3Dgraphite model. Measure and compare images in theconstant-height and constant-currentmode.

What you can learn about Tunneling effect, Hexagonal Structures, Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM), Imaging on the sub nanometer scale, Piezo-electric devices, Local Density Of States (LDOS), Constant-Height and Constant-Current Mode Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 English P2537000

excellence in science 332

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Fine structure: one and two electron spectra

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510600

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 333

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Balmer series/ determination of Rydberg's constant

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2510700

excellence in science 334

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Electron spin resonance

Principle The g-factor of a DPPH (Diphenylpikrylhydrazyl) and the half-width of the absorption line are determined, using the ESR apparatus. Tasks With ESR on a DPPH specimen determination of 1. 2.

the g-factor of the free electron,and the half-width of the absorption line.

What you can learn about Zeeman effect, Energy quantum, Quantum number, Resonance, g-factor, Land茅 factor Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2511200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 335

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Rutherford experiment with the multi-channel analyser

Principle The relationship between the angle of scattering and the rate of scattering of alpha-particles by gold foil is examined with a semiconductor detector. This detector has a detection probability of 1for alpha-particles and virtually no zero effect, so that the number of pulses agrees exactly with the number of alpha-particles striking the detector. In order to obtain maximum possible counting rates, a measurement geometry is used which dates back to Chadwick. It is also possible in this case to shift the foil and source in an axial direction (thus deviating from Chadwick's original apparatus), so that the angle of scattering can be varied over a wide range. In addition to the annular diaphragm with gold foil, a second diaphragm with aluminium foil is provided in order to study the influence of the scattering material on the scattering rate. Tasks 1. 2.

The particle rates are measured at different angles of scattering between about 20° and 90°. The measurements are compared with the particle rates calculated by means of the Rutherford theory for the measurement geometry used. The particle rates are measured in the case of scattering by aluminium and gold with identical angles of scattering in each case. The ratio of the two particle rates is compared with the particle rate calculated from Rutherford's scattering equation.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Scattering Angle of scattering Impact parameter Central force Coulomb field Coulomb forces Rutherford atomic model Identity of atomic number and charge on the nucleus

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522115

excellence in science 336

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Fine structure of the alpha spectrum of Am-241 with the multi channel analyser

Principle The alpha-spectrum of an open 241Am-emitter is measured with a semiconductor a-detector, maximum use being made in this case of the resolution capacity of the pulse height analyzer. Use is made for this purpose of the "Zoom" function, which is an additional amplification stage having in the effect that only that proportion of the pulses exceeding the threshold voltage of 5 V undergoes further processing. The pulse peaks above this threshold are amplified 5 times and restricted to a maximum of 10 V. Tasks 1. 2.

The spectrum of an open 241Am-emitter is recorded with the xyt recorder at the maximum resolution capacity of the measurement layout, using automatic window movement. The energy of the two peaks preceding the principal peak is calculated. The principal peak, corresponding to a particle energy of 5.486 MeV, is used for calibration purposes. The resolution capacity of the measurement layout is measured from the half-life width of the principal peak.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Energy level diagram (decay diagram) Transition probability Excited nuclear states γ-emission Connection between the fine structure of the α-spectrum and the accompanying γ-spectrum

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522215

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 337

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Energy loss of alpha particles in gases with the multi channel analyser

Principle A study is made of the connection between the energy E of alpha-particles and the path x travelled by them in air at standard pressure. The measurements recorded enable the differencial energy loss dE/dx to be calculated as a function of x. Tasks 1.

The spectrum of a covered 241Am source is measured at a fixed distance s as a function of the pressure p. The distance s is selected in such a way as to correspond to the maximum range at the highest pressure measurable with the manometer used. The energy corresponding to the central points of the individual spectra are determined (after calibration of the measurement layout with an open 241Am-emitter, see 3.) and plotted as a function of the distance x converted to a 1013 hPa basis. Using this function, the differential energy loss (dE/dx) is then calculated as a function of x and again plotted on the graph. The spectrum of the source used in 1.is measured initially under the same geometric conditions under vacuum and subsequently with the vessel filled with helium, nitrogen or carbon dioxide, in each case under identical pressures. The different energy loss values are compared with the electron concentration in the particular gas. The mean energy with which the alpha-particles leave the covered americium source is determined by calibration against the open americium emitter (E = 5.485 MeV). (This value is required for the evaluation in 1.)

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Range Range dispersion Mean free path length Mean ionization energy of gas atoms Mean energy loss of a-particles per collision Differencial energy loss Bethe formula Electron concentration in gases

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522415

excellence in science 338

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Beta spectroscopy

Principle The radiation of beta-unstable atomic nuclei is selected on the basis of its pulses in a magnetic transverse field, using a diaphragm system. The relationship between coil current and particle energy is determined for calibration of the spectrometer and the decay energy of the beta-transition is obtained in each case from the beta--spectra. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Energy calibration of the magnetic spectrometer. Measurement of the beta-spectra of 90Sr and 22Na. Determination of the decay energy of the two isotopes.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

b--decay b+-decay Electron capture Neutrino Positron Decay diagram Decay energy Resting energy Relativistic Lorentz equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2523200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 339

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Compton effect with Cobra3

Principle The energy of scattered gamma-radiation is measured as a function of the angle of scatter. The Compton wavelength is determined from the measured values. Tasks 1. 2.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Corpuscle Scattering Compton wavelength g-quanta De Broglie wavelength Klein-Nishina formula

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524411

excellence in science 340

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

Photonuclear cross-section/ Compton scattering cross-section with the multi channel analyser

Principle The radiation of 137Cs and 22Na is measured with a scintillation detector and the energy spectrum determined with a pulse height analyzer. The fractions of the spectra caused by Compton scattering and those caused by the photoelectric effect are determined on the basis of their areas. The results are used for determining the ratio of the effective cross-sections and examining its energy dependence. Tasks 1. 2.

Measurement of the g-spectra of 22Na and 137Cs, using a scintillation detector. Determination of the ratio of the specific effective cross-sections due to the Compton effect and the photoelectric effect in photons having energy values of 511, 662 and 1275 keV.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

g-radiation Interaction with material Photoelectric effect Compton effect Pair formation Detection probability Scintillation detectors

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524615

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 341

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.5 Atomic and nuclear Physics

X-ray fluorescence and Moseley's law with the multi channel analyser

Principle The irradiation of strontinum (sulphate), cadmium, indium, iodine and barium (chloride) with soft gamma-radiations gives rise to Ka radiations characteristics of these elements. The X-rayspectra are recorded with a gamma spectrometer consisting of a scintillation counter, a pulse height analyser and a recorder. After calibration of the spectrometer, the Rydberg constant is determined from the energies of the X-ray lines, using Moseley's law. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

Calibration of the gamma-spectrometer in the low energy range, using the Ba-resonance line 137Cs emitter (32 keV) and the gamma-line of 241Am at 59.6 keV. Recording of the X-ray fluorescence spectra (Ka-lines) of different elements and determination of the corresponding energies. Plotting of the measured X-ray energies according to Moseley's law against (Z-1)2 and determination of the Rydberg constant R; from the slope of the resulting lines.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Binding energy Photoelectric eftect Shell structure of electron shells Characteristic X-ray radiation g-spectrometry X-ray spectral analysis

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524715

excellence in science 342

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium

Principle The half-life of a Ba-137 m daughter substance eluted (washed) out of a Ca-137 isotope generator is measured directly and is also determined from the increase in activity after elution. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To record the counting rate as a function of the counter tube voltage (counter tube characteristic) when the isotope generator activity is constant (radioactive equilibrium). To measure the activity of the isotope generator as a function of time immediately after elution. To measure the activity of a freshly eluted solution of Ba-137 m as a function of time.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Parent substance Daughter substance Rate of decay Disintegration or decay constant Counting rate Half life Disintegration product

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2520101

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 343

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Half-life and radioactive equilibrium with Cobra3

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Parent substance Daughter substance Rate of decay Disintegration or decay constant Counting rate Half life Disintegration product

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2520111

excellence in science 344

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Poisson's and Gaussian distribution of radioactive decay with Cobra3 (influence of the dead time of the counter tube)

Principle 1) The aim of this experiment is to show that the number of pulses counted during identical time intervals by a counter tube which bears a fixed distance to along-lived radiation emitter correspond to a Poisson´s distribution. A special characteristic of the Poisson´s distribution can be observed in the case of a small number of counts n < 20: The distribution is unsymmetrical, i. e. the maximum can be found among smaller numbers of pulses than the mean value. In order to show this unsymmetry the experiment is carried out with a short counting period and a sufficiently large gap between the emitter and the counter tube so that the average number of pulses counted becomes sufficiently small. 2) Not only the Poisson's distribution, but also the Guassian distribution which is always symmetrical is very suitable to approximate the pulse distribution measured by means of a long-lived radiation emitter and a counter tube arranged with a constant gap between each other.A premise for this is a sufficiently high number of pulses and a large sampling size. The purpose of the following experiment is to confirm these facts and to show that the statistical pulse distribution can even be be approximated by a Guassian distribution, when (due to the dead time of the counter tube) counting errors occur leading to a distribution which deviates from the Poisson's distribution. 3) If the dead time of the counter tube is no longer small with regard to the average time interval between the counter tube pulses, the fluctuation of the pulses is smaller than in the case of a Poisson's distribution. In order to demonstrate these facts the limiting value of the mean value (expected value) is compared to the limiting value of the variance by means of a sufficiently large sampling size. What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Poisson's distribution Gaussian distribution Standard deviation Expected value of pulse rate Different symmetries of distributions Dead time Recovering time and resolution time o fa counter tube

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2520311

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 345

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Visualisation of radioactive particles/ diffusion cloud chamber

What you can learn about α,β,γ -particles, β-deflection, Ionising particles, Mesons, Cosmic radiation, Radioactive decay, Decay series, Particle velocity, Lorentz force Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2520400

excellence in science 346

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Alpha energies of different sources with the multi-channel analyser

Principle An Alpha-spectrometer, consisting of a photodetector, a preamplifier, a pulse height analyser and a recording device for registration of the spectra is calibrated by means of an open Alpha-emitter of known Alpha energy (241Am). The energy spectrum of a radium source which is in equilibrium with its decay products, is recorded and evaluated. The Alpha- Energies found in this way are allocated to the corresponding nuclides of the radium decay series. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

The Alpha-spectrum of the 226Ra is recorded with Multi Channel Analyzer The calibration spectrum of the open241Am Alpha-emitter is recorded at the same settings. The Alpha-energies corresponding to the individual peaks of the Alphaspectrum of the radium are calculated and compared to the values in the literature.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Decay series Radioactive equilibrium Isotopic properties Decay energy Particle energy Potential well model of the atomic nucleus Tunnel effect Geiger-Nuttal law Semiconductor Barrier layer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522015

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 347

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Rutherford experiment with the digital counter

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Scattering Angle of scattering Impact parameter Central force Coulomb field Coulomb forces Rutherford atomic model Identity of atomic number and charge on the nucleus

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522101

Rutherford Experiment with Cobra3 P2522111 Rutherford experiment with the multi-channel analyser P2522115

excellence in science 348

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Fine structure of the alpha spectrum of Am-241 with Cobra3

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Energy level diagram (decay diagram) Transition probability Excited nuclear states γ-emission Connection between the fine structure of the α-spectrum and the accompanying γ-spectrum

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522211

Fine structure of the alpha spectrum of Am-241 with the multi channel analyser P2522215

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 349

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Study of the alpha energies of Ra-226 with Cobra3

Principle An alpha-spectrometer, consisting of a silicon surface barrier layer detector, a preamplifier, a pulse height analyser and a recording device for registration of the spectra is calibrated by means of an open alpha-emitter of known alpha-energy (241Am). The energy spectrum of a radium source which is in equilibrium with its decay products, is recorded and evaluated. The alpha-energies found in this way are allocated to the corresponding nuclides of the radium decay series. Tasks 1.

The alpha-spectrum of the 226Ra is recorded, the settings of the pulse analyzer (amplification) and recorder (x and y input sensitivity) being selected so as to make best possible use of the recording width. The calibration spectrum of the open 241Am-emitter is recorded at the same settings. The alpha-energies corresponding to the individual peaks of the alpha spectrum of the radium are calculated and, on the assumption of a constant energy loss in the source covering, the alpha-active nuclides of the radium decay series corresponding to the individual peaks are determined on the basis of the values in the literature.

2. 3.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

decay series radioactive equilibrium isotopic properties decay energy particle energy potential well model of the atomic nucleus tunnel effect Geiger-Nuttal law semiconductor barrier layer

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522311

Study of the alpha energies of Ra-226 with the multi-channel analyser P2522315

excellence in science 350

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Energy loss of alpha particles in gases with Cobra3

2. 3.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Range Range dispersion Mean free path length Mean ionization energy of gas atoms Mean energy loss of a-particles per collision Differencial energy loss Bethe formula Electron concentration in gases

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2522411

Energy loss of alpha particles in gases with the multi channel analyser P2522415

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 351

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Electron absorption

Principle The attenuation of an electron particle stream passing through a material layer depends both on the thickness of the layer and on the mass coverage, resp. the "mass per unit area". It will be shown that the particle flux consisting of electrons of a particular energy distribution decreases with the "mass per unit area". As electron source, a radioactive sample of Sr90 is used. Tasks 1. 2.

The beta-counting rates are measured as a function of the absorber thickness using different absorbing materials such as aluminium (AL), glass (GL), hard paper (HP), and typing paper (TP). The attenuation coefficients are evaluated for the four absorbing materials and plotted as a function of the density.

What you can learn about Density, Counter tube, Radioactive decay, Attenuation coefficient, Mass coverage Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2523100

excellence in science 352

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Beta spectroscopy

Energy calibration of the magnetic spectrometer. Measurement of the beta-spectra of 90Sr and 22Na. Determination of the decay energy of the two isotopes.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

b--decay b+-decay Electron capture Neutrino Positron Decay diagram Decay energy Resting energy Relativistic Lorentz equation

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2523200

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 353

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Inverse-square law and absorption of gamma or beta rays with the Geiger-M端ller counter

Principle The inverse square law of distance is demonstrated with the gamma radiation from a 60Co preparation, the half-value thickness and absorption coefficient of various materials determined with the narrow beam system and the corresponding mass attenuation coefficient calculated. Tasks 1. 2. 3.

To measure the impulse counting rate as a function of the distance between the source and the counter tube. To determine the half-value thickness d1/2 and the absorption coefficient of a number of materials by measuring the impulse counting rate as a function of the thickness of the irradiated material. Lead, iron, aluminium, concrete and Plexiglas are used as absorbers. To calculate the mass attenuation coefficient from the measured values.

What you can learn about Radioactive radiation, Beta-decay, Conservation of parity, Antineutrino, Gamma quanta, Half-value thickness, Absorption coefficient, Term diagram, Pair formation, Compton effect, Photoelectric effect, Conservation of angular momentum, Forbidden transition, Weak interaction, Dead time Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524101

Inverse-square law and absorption of gamma or beta rays with Cobra3 P2524111

excellence in science 354

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Energy dependence of the gamma absorption coefficient with the multi-channel analyser

Principle The intensity of gamma-radiation decreases when it passes through solid matter. The attenuation can be the result of Compton scattering, the photo effect or the pair production. An absorption coefficient can be attributed to each of the three phenomena. These absorption coefficients, as well as the total absorption, are highly energy-dependent. The energy dependence of the total absorption coefficient for aluminium in the range below 1.3 MeV is verified. Tasks 1.

For each of the emitting isotopes Na22, Cs137 and Am241 the gamma-spectrum is traced and a threshold energy, E, just below the photo-peak in the high energy range determined. Using the scintillation counter in conjunction with the pulse height analyser as a monochromator, the gamma-intensity is measured as a function of the thickness of different aluminium layers.The three gamma- emitting isotopes are used successively as the source, assuming that the energy of the emitted gamma-radiation is known.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Compton scattering Photo effect Pair production Absorption coefficient Radioactive decayg-spectroscopy

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524215

Energy dependence of the gamma absorption coefficient with Cobra3 P2524211

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 355

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Internal conversion in 137m Ba with the multi-channel analyser

Principle: The radiation emitted during the decay of the 137Cs isotope is measured with a scintillation detector and the energyspectrum determined with a pulse height analyzer. The spectrum contains fractions due to a gamma-transition and fractions originating from a characteristic X-ray radiation. The areas of the fractions in question are determined and the conversion factor obtained from them. Tasks: 1. 2.

Measurement of the g-spectrum of 137Cs using a scintillation detector. Determination of the conversion factor of the 137mBa excited nucleus.

What you can learn about: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

g-radiation Nuclear transitions Transition probability Duration Metastable states Isotopic spin quantum Numbers Rules governing selection Multipole radiation Isomeric nuclei Photonuclear reaction Conversion electron Characteristic X-ray radiation Scintillation detectors

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524515

Internal conversion in 137m Ba with Cobra3 P2524511

excellence in science 356

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

Photonuclear cross-section / Compton scattering with Cobra3

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

g-radiation Interaction with material Photoelectric effect Compton effect Pair formation Detection probability Scintillation detectors

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524611

Photonuclear cross-section/ Compton scattering cross-section with the multi channel analyser

P2524615

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 357

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

X-ray fluorescence and Moseley's law with the multi channel analyser

2. 3.

What you can learn about ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Binding energy Photoelectric eftect Shell structure of electron shells Characteristic X-ray radiation g-spectrometry X-ray spectral analysis

Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English P2524715

X-ray fluorescence and Moseley's law with Cobra3 P2524711

excellence in science 358

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

The deflection of beta radiation in a magnetic field

TESS Physics set Radioactivity RE1

Prinzip Auf Beta-Teilchen, die sich senkrecht zur Feldrichtung eines Magneten bewegen, wirkt die Lorentzkraft. Bei konstanter Geschwindigkeit und Magnetstärke bewegen sich die Beta-Teilchen im Feldbereich auf einer Kreisbahn, deren Bahnradius von ihrer Geschwindigkeit und der magnetischen Feldstärke abhängt. Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS Physik Handbuch Radioaktivität 01155-01 German TESS Physics manual Radioactivity 01155-02 English P1305600

Level control

Function and Applications Student experiment set for the performance of 15 experiments in the following subjects: ▪

Examination of naturally occurring radioactive substances (5 exp.)

▪

Types of radiation and their characteristics (8 exp.)

▪

Technical applications of radioactive rays (2 exp.)

Equipment and technical data The sets consists of 14 items, storage box with foam included. ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Absorptive material, students Shot, 120 g Petri dish, d = 40 mm Wide neck bottle, 100 ml Syringe, Luer Mineral columbit Deflecting magnet, 2 pcs. Gas mantle, 4 pcs.

13260-88

TESS Physics manual Radioactivity

01155-02 Principle

Geiger-Müller-Counter

The stream of particles emitted from a radioactive source diminishes over time. A radioactive substance decays according to certain physical laws. In the special case of a radioactive substance comprising only one irradiating component, the quantity of material diminishes exponentially over time. Literature for this experiment as follows: Phys.Demovers.Radioakt./Hafttafel 01156-01 German Phys.-Exp.,Magnet Board,Radioact. 01156-02 English P1315800 Function and Applications Demonstration and student use unit in connection with Geiger Müller counting tubes for experiments on radioactivity. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

4-digit LED display, 20mm high. 4 standard measurement times 1/10/60/100 s

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 359

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Automatic measurement sequence with memory 10 s Freely selectable measuring time BNC-socket for counting tube 500V 4-mm-bushes for event counting with TTL signals Mains 100-230 V/50-60 Hz Shock proof casing with carrying handle Dimensions 190 x 140 x 130 mm

Geiger-Müller-Counter 13606-99 Counter tube, type B 09005-00 Counter tube, GM, 45 mm 09007-00 Counter tube, type A, BNC 09025-11 Screened cable, BNC, l 750 mm 07542-11 Radioactive sources, set 09047-50

Demo Physics Magnet board Radioactivity, basic set

Pulse rate meter

Function and Applications For experiments in radioactivity in connection with a counting tube. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Meas.ranges: 100...10000 Imp / s. Time constants: 0.5; 1.5; 3; 10 s. Range selection via push-button with diode display. Input (BNC socket): 150...550 V. Parallel to 4 mm sockets 1:1000 reduced for voltage measurement. Analog output: 0...10 V. Output (BNC socket): TTL compatible. All outputs short-circuit safe. Loudspeaker can be turned off. Power supply voltage: 230 V. Shock proof plastic housing with carrying handle and stand base. Dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168.

13622-93

Equipment set for carrying out experiments on the Physics demonstration board consisting of 18 components: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Counter tube, GM, 45 mm

Components with magnetic attachments, such as various holders for a Geiger counter Various preparations Absorption plates Ruler for measuring length Protractor Absorption materials Some weak natural radioactive sources Diverting magnets Storage case with lid and foam padding.

Additionally required: ▪ ▪ ▪

Demo Physics board (02105-00) Geiger tube and counter Radioactive sources for specific radiation types.

09200-55 Function and Applications Equipment set radioactivity board 09200-77 Demo Physics board with stand 02150-00 Phys.-Exp.,Magnet Board,Radioact. 01156-02

excellence in science 360

Highly sensitiv counter tube, especially suitable to investigate weakly radioactive samples. Because of the large active area experiments with natural beam sources deliver very good results. Benefits In the implementation of student experiments a radioactive source is no longer necessary. Equipment and technical data

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Self-quenching halogen triggered tube with chrome-iron jacket and mica window, for investigating alpha-, beta- and gammarays. Handle for attachment included. Including a grill protecting the counter tube. Mica: 2 ...3 mg / cm2 Working voltage: 500 V Plateau length: 200 V Plateau increase: 0,04 % / V Dead time: about 100 µs Zero effect: aboout 45 pulses / min Case diameter: 22 mm Diameter of counter tube: 45 mm Length of counter tube: 80 mm Weight: 320 g

Counter tube, type B

Counter tube, GM, 45 mm 09007-00 Screened cable, BNC, l 750 mm 07542-11 Function and Applications

Counter tube type A

Self recovering Halogenid countertube for detection of Alpha-,Betaund Gamma-radiation. Benefits ▪ ▪

mounted in metal cylinder with fixed 500 mm long BNC-cable Including protection cap for countertube

Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications Self-extinguishing halogen pulse ionization tube for the verification of alpha, beta and gamma radiation. Benefits ▪

Mounted in ferro-chrome jacket with BNC socket

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Mica window Density of Mica window:2...3 g/cm² Operation voltage: 500 V Plateau length: 200 V Plateau slope: 0,04%/V Death time: approx. 100 µs Zero rate: approx. 15 Pulse/min Diameter of housing: 22 mm Diameter of counter tube: 15 mm Counter tube length: 76 mm Mass: 103 g

09005-00

Ground allocation of the mica window: 1.5...2 mg/cm² Working voltage: 500 V Plateau length: 200 V Plateau rise: 0.04 %/V Dead time: approx. 100 μs Zero effect: approx. 15 Imp/min Jacketing diameter: 22 mm Including protective cap

Counter tube, type A, BNC 09025-11 Screened cable, BNC, l 750 mm 07542-11

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 361

2.6 Modern Physics 2.6.6 Radioactivity

excellence in science 362

6 Additional material

Additional material 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5

Software measure Cobra4 Cobra3 Power supply units Small to medium voltage power supply units Stabilised and regulated power supply units High-voltage power supply units Signal generators Measurement instruments Hand-held measuring instruments - electricity Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity Oscilloscopes, recorders Measuring amplifiers Time measuring instruments, counters

901 904 926 949 950 952 955 956 959 960 963 967 968 970

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 899

6 Additional material

6.5.6 Meteorological instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments 6.5.9 Oxygen, lux and pressure measuring instruments 6.5.10 Radioactivity, sound level and gas measuring instruments 6.5.11 Photometers, spectroscopes, polarimeters, refractometers 6.5.12 General - measurement instruments 6.6 Microscopes

excellence in science 900

973 974 981 987 989 991 994 995

6 Additional material 6.1 Software measure

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 901

6 Additional material 6.1 Software measure

excellence in science 902

6 Additional material 6.1 Software measure

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 903

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

excellence in science 904

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 905

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

excellence in science 906

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 907

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

The following views can be selected individually by measuring channel: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ All Cobra4 devices are listed in the following order: • Basic units • Sensors • Accessories • Sets for all disciplines.

▪ ▪

1. Digital measuring value window 2. Analogue measuring value window 3. Graphs 4. Additional measuring graphs with a free choice of scale application 5. AS WITH MICROSOFT® PRODUCTS: Open the correct application window by doubleclicking or using the right mouse button 6. All modifications can also be made DURING THE MEASUREMENT.

LOAD EXPERIMENTS:

You will find further information on articles, manuals and experiments in the respective chapters and on the PHYWE website website.

Software Cobra4 - Single user and school licence

▪ ▪

Numerous experiments examples are easily loadable. In addition to a comprehensive experiments description in pdf format with structure image, material list, experimental set-up and results, the parameters required for this experiment are loaded automatically.

These are the details: ▪ ▪

1. Sensor settings 2. Illustrations - multi-graph / virtualdevice

AND EVEN BETTER: ▪

all experiment descriptions, configuration files and sample measurements are included on the "measure Cobra4" CD-ROM for FREE.

KEY WORDS IN SAMPLE EXPERIMENTS: ▪ ▪ ▪

For each sample experiment, all associated key words are displayed automatically. A single click on a keyword will immediately display help with detailed explanations. This makes it possible to carry out all experiments very easily, quickly and reliably.

System requirements: ▪ Funktion und Verwendung The "measure Cobra4" measuring software leaves nothing to be desired. As soon as a Cobra4 sensor is connected to a PC,irrespective of whether by Cobra4 Wireless or Cobra4 USB, the "measureCobra4" software opens completely automatically and shows the connected sensors, the required measuring windows and the current measuring data. Measurement recording is then started with a single CLICK. This all takes under 40 seconds! Vorteile: Embedded experiments with online documentation and measurement examples and automatic configuration NAVIGATOR On the left hand side of the software EVERYTHING ALWAYS IN VIEW. In theNAVIGATOR, you can: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪

1. Automatically see all connected sensors 2. See / change the condition of the sensors (activated, deactivated) 3. Change all sensor parameters by double clicking 4. Add calculated channels that allow e.g. the online conversion of measuring values (e.g. °C to K) or the calculation of measured values from different measuring channels (e.g. calculation, illustration of the resistance from current and voltage) 5. Easily load measuring examples- experiments descriptions, parameter settings, displays and graphs come automatically 6. Easily load configuration files. You will automatically have the optimum setting for your application

MEASURING WINDOW: All measuring values are displayed immediately.

excellence in science 908

PC with min. Pentium 3, 512 MB RAM, 1 GB free space on the hard disk, CD- ROM drive, USB 2.0, Microsoft ® Windows 2000 or higher.

14550-61

TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Function

Cobra4 Wireless-Link

Impressive experimental descriptions from the fields of physics, chemistry and biology that pays attention in particular to the advantages of the radio-controlled transmission of measured values with the Cobra4 system. In total more than 120 demonstration and student experiments are described in detail. Experiments on the interdisciplinary topic "everyday life phenomena" are contained. Contents ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Physics: Mechanics, Thermodynamics, Electricity Chemistry: Chemical equilibrium, Electrochemistry Biology: Ecology, Physiology, Biochemistry and Plant physiology Everyday science: Home, Outdoors, Hobby, Technics, Transportation

Equipment and technical data Arch file size A4, 350 color print pages 01330-02

Function and Applications Interface module for the radio-based transmission of sensor measuring values in conjunction with the Cobra4 wireless manager.

Cobra4 basic units

Benefits: ▪

How do you want to measure? All Cobra4 sensor units can be connected to basic units through a secure plug-latch insert, and are identified automatically by the system.

▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 Wireless Manager

▪ ▪ ▪

All Cobra4 Sensor-Units can be quickly connected using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. All Cobra4 measuring sensors are easy to plug in and automatically detected The radio network with the Cobra4Wireless Manager is established automatically and is extremely stable, as it uses its own radio protocol Up to 99 Cobra4 Wireless-Links can be connected to one Cobra4 Wireless-Manager No more cable mess, thanks to radio measuring With radio transmission, moving sensors offer completely new experimentation options, e.g. the measurement of acceleration of a student on a bicycle etc. The use of high performance batteries means that no external power supplyis required.

Cobra4Wireless is particularly suitable for: ▪

Function and Applications USB device for radio-based communication with the Cobra4 WirelessLink. Benefits: Simply connect the device to the computer's USB port. Up to 99 measuring sensors can be connected to one computer Automatic detection of all connected measuring sensors. Equipment and technical data: Power consumption: < 100 mA, Connection voltage (via USB): 5 V, Radio output power: 1 mW, Max. data rate (burst):125,000 values/s, Range with no obstacles: 20 m , max.number of Cobra4 Wireless-Links in the network: 99, Dimensions L x B x H: 75 x 25 x 10 mm, Weight: 20 g, incl. CD-ROM with drivers and demo version of the "measure Cobra4" measuring software , incl. FREE evaluation software, experiments description and configuration settings for experiments, operating manual

▪ ▪

Computer aided student's experiments using only one teacher's computer (max. 99 sensors on one computer) convenient experimentation without annoying cables Experiments with moving sensors, e.g. freefall acceleration etc.

Equipment and technical specifications: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage supply: 2 x Mignon batteries Power consumption: < 300 mA Radio output power: 1 mW max.data rate (burst): 125,000 values/s Range with no obstacles: 20 m Dimensions L x B x H: 125x65x35 mm Weight: 200 g 2 high performance 2,700mAh batteries operating manual

12601-00

12600-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 909

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

The Cobra4 Junior-Link is an interface module for the transmission of sensor measuring data to a PC via an USB connection. It is specially designed for the use in simple student experiments with only one Sensor-Unit. All Cobra4 Sensor-Units can be connected to the Cobra4 Junior-Link using a stable plug-in / lockable connection.

Cobra4 USB-Link

Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

the Cobra4 Junior-Link shows the following features: the Cobra4 Junior-Link can be connected to a PC (via USB port on the PC) automatic detection of all Cobra4 Sensor-Units power supply from USB connection, no additional external power supply required

In particular, it is ideally suited for student experiments (if a PC is available for each work group). Equipment and technical data Function and Applications The Cobra4 USB-Link is a highly efficient interface module for the transmission of sensor measuring values to a PC via a USB connection. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

All Cobra4Sensor-Units can be connected to the Cobra4 USB-Link using a stable plug-in / lockable connection. Up to 400,000 measuring values/sec Several Cobra4 USB links can be connected to one PC (via USB portson the PC or by USB hub) Automatic detection of all Cobra4Sensor-Units Power supply from USB connection, no additional external power supply required.

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

power supply via PC < 300 mA max. data rate: 10,000 datas/sec dimensions L x B x H: 125x65x35 mm weight: 100 g delivery incl. USB cable, operating manual and CD-ROM with drivers and demoversion of the "measure Cobra4" measuring software incl. FREE evaluation software, experiments descriptions and configuration settings for experiments

12615-00

Cobra4 Remote-Link

ideally suited to the following applications: ▪ ▪ ▪

Especially fast measurements(acoustic, electrical etc.) Demonstration experiments Student's experiments (if one PC is available for each work group).

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Power supply via PC: < 300 mA Max. data rate (burst):400,000 values/sec Dimensions L x B x H: 125x65x35 mm Weight: 100 g Delivery incl. USB cable operating manual and CD-ROM with drivers and demoversion of the "measure Cobra4" measuring software incl. FREE evaluation software, experiments descriptions and configuration settings for experiments. Function and Applications

12610-00

The Cobra4 Remote-Link can be used to control the measuring value recording of an experiment constructed using a radiobased Cobra4 network.

Cobra4 Junior-Link

Benefits: ▪ ▪

The measuring value recording start and stop commandis transmitted by radio to the Cobra4Wireless Manager on the PC. Optimum application, e.g. in student experiments, freefall with an acceleration sensor etc.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications

excellence in science 910

Voltage supply: 2 x Mignon batteries Power consumption < 200 mA Radio output power: 1 mW Range with no obstacles: 20 m Dimensions L x B x H: 125x65x35 mm Weight: 200 g 2 high performance batteries operating manual

12602-00

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

bra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Cobra4 sensor units What do you want to measure? The Cobra4 sensor units are connected directly to basic units, and are identified automatically by the system.

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Temperature, semiconductor -20...110 °C

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Temperature measuring range: -200..+1200 °C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used Data flow rate: 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Weight: 85 g

12641-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics, pressure abs. 2 bar and 2 temperature NiCr-Ni

Funktion and Applications Cobra4 -20..110°C Sensor-Unit Temperature-semiconductor Benefits ▪

can be connected directly to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Sensoatar jacket: stainless steel Measuring range: -20..+110°C Absolute accuracy: ± 0.5°C Resolution: 0.05°C Time constant: 7 s Data flow rate: 200 Hz Connecting port: sub-D-15-pole Sensor length / diameter: 200 mm, 6 mm Cable length: 120 cm Weight: 125 g

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics is a measuring recorder for pressure and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪

12640-00 ▪

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 2 x Temperature, NiCr-Ni

It canbe fitted with two NiCr-Nithermoelements (type K), in order to measure up to two temperatures and one absolut pressure value simultaneously The unit can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/ lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -200..+1200°C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used

Pressure: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0...2000 hPa Resolution 0.1 hPa Measuring accuracy: ± 0,5% Data flow rate: max. 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62mm x 63mm x 35mm Weight: approx. 190 g

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 2 x Temperature NiCr-Ni is a measuring recorder for temperature measurements, which is controlled by microcontroller.

12638-00

Benefits ▪ ▪

It canbe fitted with two NiCr-Ni thermoelements (type K), in order to measure up to two temperatures simultaneously or to measure a temperature difference The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 2 x Temperature NiCr- Ni can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Co-

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 911

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCr-Ni

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connection is a measuring recorder for pH and potential measurements, which is controlled by microcontroller. Benefits ▪ ▪

It can be fitted with a pH probe or Redoxmeasuring chain, in order to measure pH or potential values The unit can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technicla data pH: ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH and 2 x temperature NiCr-Ni is a measuring recorder for pH, potential and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

It can be fitted with two NiCr-Ni thermoelements (Type K) and a pH probe or Redox measuring chain, in order to measure up to two temperatures and one pH or potential value simultaneously The unit can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/lockable connection.

Measuring range: 0...14pH Resolution: 0.01K Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5%

Potential: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -2000...+2000 mV Resolution: 0.1 mV Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5% Data flow rate: 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Weight: 70 g

12631-00

Electrodes with BNC plug

Equipment and technical data Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -200..+1200 °C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used

pH: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0...14 Resolution 0.01K Measuring accuracy: ± 0,5%

Potential: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range -2000..+2000 mV Resolution: 0.1 mV Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5% Data flow rate: 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Weight: 95 g

12630-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connector

These electrodes with a BNC plug may be connected to both Cobra4 Sensor units Chemistry and pH. pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temperature (Pt1000)

Function and Applications Function and Applications

excellence in science 912

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity /Temperature (Pt1000) is a measuring recorder for conductance measuring sensors with a cell constant of K = 1.00/cm and which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪

The Cobra4 sensor may be connected directly to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data Conductivity: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring

range 1: 0.0...approx. 2,500.0 µS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.15 µS/cm range 2: 0...approx. 45,000 µS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±3 µS/cm range 3: 0.00...approx. 1,100 mS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.05 mS/cm

Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0 to 100°C Measuring accuracy: ± 0.8°C Resolution: 0.1°C Data flow rate: 1 Hz Connecting port: sub-D-15 pole Measuring electrode length, diameter,electrode spacing: 7 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm Cable length: 60 cm Weight: 85 g

12633-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Units Force ± 4 N and ± 40 N

Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring accuracy: -20.0°C...150.0°C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: ±0.5K (in the range 0...100°C)

Measuring cycle: 0.8...2s (adjusted automatically) Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temperature (Pt1000) 12632-00 Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 13701-01

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity, with stainless steel electrodes

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Units Force ± 4 N and ± 40 N contain a bending beam (DMS technology), which converts the mechanical load into an electrical signal. Benefits: ▪

▪ ▪ ▪

Depending on the type of application, the force sensor can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. On the top of the casing, a plate can be plugged in for measuring weights that are placed on it. On the bottom of the device, there is a hook on which weights may be hung. On the mechanically secure in take of the Cobra4 sensor unit, force from above or below is applied using a drop rod with a M6 thread.

Equipment and technical data: Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity/Temperature with stainless steel electrodes can be connected directly to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Benefits ▪

Particularly good application for school and outdoor experimentation, as the measuring gauge is already firmly connected.

Equipment and technical data Conductivity: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0.2 µS/cm...200 mS/cm Measuring accuracy: 6% of the measuringvalue ± 0,2µS/cm Resolution: 0.1 µS/cm, 1 µS/cm, 10µS/cm, 100 µS/cm

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

100 mm long rod with M6 thread Weight plate Weight hook Operating manual Measuring range: -4...+4 N Maximum sampling rate: 16 Hz Measuring accuracy: 0.2 mN Dimensions (L x B x H): 64 x 70 x 35 mm Weight: 100 g

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Force ± 4 N 12642-00 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Force ± 40 N 12643-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 913

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electricity, current ± 6 A/ voltage ± 30V

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Current /Voltage ±30 V ± 6 A is a secured measuring sensor, which can be connected to theCobra4 WirelessLink, the Cobra4 Mobile Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection, depending on the application type. Benefits ▪ ▪

The sensor has a voltage difference input. Simultaneous measurement of current and voltage is possible.

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Power supply via 4 mm sockets or wall power supply with hole socket Operation temperature: 5...40°C Relative humidity: < 80% Gain/amplification: 1.0 Input resistance: > 10000 GOhm Input current: < 0.5 pA Input capacitance: < 50 pF Input voltage: Amplifier (socket 1): ± 10 V2. input (socket 2): 1 kV Power supply: 12 V AC/25 mA hole socket: 2.1/5.5 mm or External power source: 12 V AC25 mA 4 mm sockets or: Cobra3 interface: ± 15 V RS232 socket Output voltage: ± 10 V Output current: 1 mA Output resistance: < 500 Ohm Dimensions H × W × D (mm):65 × 113 × 35 Weight: 150 g

Electrometer Amplifier 13621-00 Power supply 12V AC/500 mA 11074-93

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Energy electricity, voltage, power, capacity

Equipment and technical data Measuring range: ▪ ▪

Voltage: -30...30 V Current: -6...6 A

Resolution: ▪ ▪

Voltage: 15 mV Current: 3 mA

Internal resistances: ▪ ▪ ▪

Voltage: 1 MOhm Current: 33 mOhm Weight: 100 g

12644-00

Function and Applications

Electrometer Amplifier

The Cobra4 Sensor Unit Energy is used for the measurement and direct indication of measurement variables of the electrical power and energy in direct-current and alternating current circuits (current, voltage, effective and apparent power, angular phase shift, frequency, electric work). Benefits

Operational amplifier with high resistance input for quasi-static voltage measurement and measurement of very small charges.

Through the direct measurement of alternating current and directcurrent sizes numerous basic as well as application-oriented experiments are possible, e.g. for the charactersitic of alternating current resistances or for the investigation of the energy demand of consumers. The Cobra4 Sensor Unit Energy can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless Link, the Cobra4 Mobile Link or the Cobra4 USB Link through a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. The data can be measured and displayed in student or demonstration experiments with or without PC.

Benefits

Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications

Suited for experiments with electrostatics, e.g. charge measurement, capacity measurement of sphere-capacitor, measurement of direct voltages, quasi-static measurements and measurement of small currents. Equipment and technical data

excellence in science 914

▪ ▪

measuring range and resolution 30 V (0.3 mV), 6 A (0.3 mA) frequency range: up to 2 kHz

12656-00

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Timer/Counter

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration, ± 2 g, ± 6 g

Funktion and Applications

Function and Application Sensor-Unit of the Cobra4 family. Interface-module with timer and counter functionality for up to four light barriers, one measuring microphone, movement sensor, falling sphere apparatus or other devices with TTLcompatible signals. Optionally anexternal trigger device can be used (switch, starter system for motion track, ...). The measured values of the sensor can be transmitted with the Cobra4 Wireless manager and the Cobra4 Wireless-Link by radio or with the USB-Link to the PC. All Cobra4 sensor-units are quickly connectable through a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Some applications: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

linear Motion incl. laws of collision with motion and air track free fall with picket fences or falling ball apparatus oscillations rotational motion frequency of acoustical signals

Benefis ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

With the aid of the intuitive softwaremeasure for Cobra4 the singleapplication scenarios can be started comfortably with 10 preset modes All relevant attempts with timemeasurement and counting are covered The simultaneous observation of thesignal level facilitates the understanding of the measured values of light barriers Investigation of complex contexts through combination with other sensors from the Cobra4 family Thanks to radio measurement NO disturbing cable anymore - NEW didactic possibilities through radio transmission (not depending on the location of the PC, moving sensors)

Depending on application type, theCobra4 Sensor-Unit 3D-Acceleration, ± 2g, ± 6 g can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Benefits ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring ranges: -2g...+2g or -6g...+6g Resolution: 1 mg or 5 mg Presentable channels: x, y and z Max. data rate: 160 Hz per channel Weight: 80 g

12650-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Tesla

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Power supply: by the Cobra4 WirelessLink or another Cobra4 basic device, from 3 light barriers with enclosedexternal power supply Current consumption: < 300 mA resolution: 1 microsecond Dimensions: (LxBxH) 125x65x35 mm Weight: 200 g Accessories (included): Adapter for light barriers,external power supply

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Light barrier, compact (up to 4 lightbarriers) Cobra4 adapter for Sensor-Unit Timer/Counter to connect a light barrier Measuring microphone Falling sphere apparatus Movement sensor with cable

12651-00

lFunction Function and Applications Sensor-Unit to measure the magnetic field strength in DC and AC fields. Hall probes may be connected via a diode plug. Tecnical data Measuring ranges DC field ▪ ▪ ▪

± 1 T (1 mT), ± 100 mT (100 µT), ± 10 mT (10 µT) every range can be compensated up to the maximum value of the measuring range Accuracy approx. ± 2 % of the maximum value of the measuring range

Measuring ranges AC field ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency: 15 Hz...1 kHz 1 T (1 mT), 100 mT (100 µT), 10 mT ( 10 µT) AC field measurements are of RMS type - no compensation

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 915

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

▪

Accuracy approx. ± 5 % of the maximum value of the measuring range

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit CO2

General ▪ Maximum data rate: 5 Hz ▪ Dimensions (L x W x H in mm): 60 x 70 x 35 ▪ Weight (g) 100 Cobra4 Sensor Tesla, Set with 2 hall probes 12652-88 Cobra4 Sensor Tesla, ± 1 Tesla 12652-00 Hall probe, axial 13610-01 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather: Humidity, Air pressure,Temperature, Light intensity, Altitude Function and Applications Sensor of the Cobra4 family for the measurement of the CO2 concentration in the air. The measured data of the sensor can be transferred with the Cobra4 Wireless Link by radio to the PC in connection with the Cobra4 Wireless Manager. All Cobra4 Sensor Units are quickly connectable through a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications Depending on application type, the Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/ lockable connection. Benefits ▪ ▪

At the same time, the following measuring parameters may be recorded: airpressure, relative humidity, airtemperature, brightness, height Ideal for use in outdoor experiments, on classtrips or for project or school hikingdays.

Equipment and technical data

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

measuring range: 0... 6000 ppm resolution: 50 ppm data transfer rate: 1 Hz dimensions (L x W x H): 60 mm x 70 mm x 30 mm weight: 60 g

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 Wireless Link (12601-00) and Cobra4 Wireless Manger (12600-00) and/or alternative: Cobra4 USB Link (12610-00) to the connection to a PC Software measure Cobra4, individual position and school license (14550-61) for the realization, representation and evaluation of the measurements Cobra4 Mobile Link (12620-00) for the measuring without PC

12671-00

Relative Humidity: ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 100 % accuracy +/- 5 %

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Pulse, Heart rate

Air Pressure: ▪ ▪

measurement range 10 - 1100 mbar accuracy +/-5 %

Air Temperature: ▪ ▪

measurement range -40 - +125 °C accuracy +/- 0.5 °C

Brightness: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 10,000 lx accuracy +/- 5 % calculation using air pressure Data transfer rate for each sensor: 1 Hz Dimensions (L x B x H): 64 x 70 x 31 mm Weight: 60 g Function

12670-00

Sensor of the Cobra4 family for measuring the heart rate on the ear or finger. Measurement of the signal amplitude and the heart rate.

excellence in science 916

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

All Cobra4 sensors can be connected directly to the Cobra4 WirelessLink, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/ lockable connection. Technical specifications: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Range 40...240 pulses/minute Accuracy 2 % Including ear clip (cable length: 1 m) Digital and graphical display of the heart rate Dimensions: 60 x 70 x 35 mm Weight: 100 g

Crocodile clips for disposable electrodes, 3/pkg 12673-02

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Spirometry

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Pulse, Heart rate, incl. ear clip 12672-00 Ear clip for Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Pulse 12672-10

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electrophysiology

Function and Application The Cobra4 Sensor Unit Spirometry is used for the measurement of the breath-dependent pulmonary volume. Benefits Through the possibility of the recording of measurement one receives a diagram by means of which different function varaibles of the breath volume can be determined. The Cobra4 Sensor Unit Spirometry can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless Link, the Cobra4 Mobile Link or the Cobra4 USB Link through a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. The data can be measured and displayed in student or demonstration experiments with or without PC. Equipment and technical data To perform electrophysiological, noninvasive measurements of heart, eye and muscle activities. The measurement electrodes are connected to 3,5-mm jacks using three separate and shielded measurement cords. The sensor can be connected to a PC wireless or to a USB-port. Requires measurement cords and ECG and/ or EMG/ EOG electrodes. Technical specifications: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measurement mode: permanent measurement Operation with three separate and shielded measurement cords Maximum data throughput: 1000 Hz Signal filter: ECG filter: 0.03 Hz to 20 Hz with 450-fold magnification EMG filter: 80 Hz to 5000 Hz with 1600-fold magnification EOG filter: 0.03 Hz to 10 Hz with 800-fold magnification Galvanic separation with 4000 V Dimensions: 62 mm x 110 mm x 35 mm Weight: 0.3 kg

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electrophysiology, set incl. cords and ECG electrodes 12673-77 Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electrophysiology: EKG, EMG, EOG 12673-00 ECG electrodes, 3/pkg 65981-01 EMG electrodes, 3 off 65981-02 Electrode Gel, tube 65981-06 Electrodes for ECG Sensor, 100 pcs. 12559-01 Shielded leads for electrophysiology, color-coded, 3/pkg 12673-01

▪

measuring range (accuracy): -15... +15 l/s (3 %)

12675-00

Cobra4, Accessories Accessories for all Cobra4 Basic units and Sensor units, respectively

Accessories for the Cobra4 Sensor-Unit

Cobra4 drop counter With the drop counter, in combination with a Cobra4 timer/counter sensor unit, drops are recorded which drop from a burette into a container below. Advantages The drop counter makes possible a semi-automatic implementation of quantitative titration in a simple way.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 917

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Equipment and technical data The drop counter consists of a metal body with a photoelectric barrier in an elongated hole, 2 receptacles for electrodes up to a diameter of 12 mm and a V-shaped centering aid for drip tips; Length: 185 mm, width: 50 mm, height: 30 mm, length of the mount bar: 90 mm, diameter of the mount bar: 10 mm, diameter of the 2 electrode receptacles: 13 mm, dimensions of the elongated hole: 25 mm x 15 mm, length of the connection cable: 90 cm, connection: 3.5 mm jack plugs.

Fast Charging System for up to 4 MeH Accumulators

Function and Applications

Forked photoelectric barrier compact

For 1-4 Mignon AA or Micro AAA.

Infrared photoelectric barrier with stem, which can be screwed into 4 different positions. With receptacle device for incremental wheel for the determination of path sections. Inside dimensions (mm): 40 x 40, supply voltage: 5 V, including incremental wheel.

Benefits

Adapter for forked photoelectric barrier Up to 4 forked photoelectric barriers can be connected conveniently and without a cable tangle with the timer-counter sensor unit. The adapter has a multipolar cable of 1 m length. Wind sensor For the measurement of the wind speed. Measuring range: 1 ... 40 m/s and 4 ... 140 km/h, dimensions (mm): 112 x 162 x 140. Movement recorder Incremental encoder with extremely high resolution for the recording of rotation and linear movements. Resolution: 512 steps/rotation. With signal output for rotation direction, cord grooves 6 mm and 12 mm, plastic casing with holder stem and connection cables, dimensions (mm): 72 x 34 x 113.

Adjustable charging current by a switch "Fast charge/ Standardcharge" (2100 mA/ 850 mA for Mignon AA cells and 850 mA/ 350 mA for Micro AAA cells), Multiple over charging protection by deltaV detection, temperature control and safety timer, Trickle charging, faulty cell and Alkaline detection, Reverse polarity protection, Cooling of the batteries by a fan, Battery status is displayed by LED per charging slot Equipment and technical data External power supply with wide range input 100-240 VAC and 12 V car adapter 07930-99

Ni-MH accu, Mignon, 1.2 V, 2000 mAh, Eneloop Type, 4 pcs. 07930-03

Stand for Cobra4

Microphone Electret converter on 25 cm sensor tube, with amplifier for the pointmeasuring of sonic fields. Directly connectable, low power consumption, high resolution in location and intensity. Frequency range 15 Hz... 40 kHz, sensitivity 6 mV/ Pa at 1kHz, adjustable amplification 50 ... 5000, dimensions (mm): Housing 115 x 70 x 35, probe 250 x 8. Cobra4 Drop Counter 12635-00 Light barrier, compact 11207-20 Cobra4 adapter for Sensor-Unit Timer/Counter to connect one light barrier 12651-01 Cup anemometer for Cobra3 12124-00 Movement sensor with cable 12004-10 Measuring microphone 03542-00

excellence in science 918

Supporting stand of aluminum with a tiltangle of about 30째 to place Cobra4Mobile-links and Cobra4 USB-Links ondesks. The devices are fixed by aspecific hook and loop fastener on thestand. A 50 cm long stripe of this selfadhesive hook and loop fastener isdelivered together with the stand. Toattach the devices to the stand, acorrespondingly suitable small piece ofthe self-adhesive hook and loop fasteneris stuck onto the back of this devices. 12681-00

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 sets Complete solutions for your experiments! The sets include all necessary accessories for dealing with various topics, or for certain areas of application.

TESS Applied Sciences Cobra4 Environment and outdoors

▪

experimental descriptions and configuration settings for experiments

TESS Applied Sciences Cobra4 environment and outdoors, for 4 work groups 12622-88 TESS Cobra4 Environment and outdoors, with 1 measurement instrument and german handbook, in aluminum case 12619-88 TESS advanced Applied Sciences manual Cobra4 environment and outdoors 12622-02

TESS Biology Set Electrophysiology

Function and Applications This device set is ideally suited to shared-work experiments with schoolgroups. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Whether in the classroom, outdoors or on project days: in this robust aluminium case, you will always find the right device for carrying out fascinating experiments with schoolgroups. Up to 4 work groups can work on and investigate interesting topics in parallel. All data are saved on SD memory cards. Evaluation of the data can be carried out e.g. at home, as homework. The measure evaluation software is included for FREE and may, of course, be used privately by each pupil.

Function and Applications Complete instrument set and accessories to perform computer-assisted experiments in human and animal physiology of heart, muscle, eye. Equipment and technical data ▪

TIP This device is also ideal for use e.g.in the context of a school hiking day: here, a topografic profile can easily be produced with the weather sensor. In Geography lessons, the data can be evaluated and interpreted together. If the height is then set against the temperature, humidity relative to the path, or temperature relative to the time of day, great discoveries can be made, which are both practical and fun. Equipment and technical data: The highly stable aluminium case contains the following materials: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4 x Cobra4 Mobile-Link 1 x Cobra4Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connection 1 xCobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather: air pressure, humidity, ambient temperature, brightness 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit, Temperature-Semiconductor 20...110 °C 1x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity with permanently connected stainless steel 1x pH plastic, gel-filled electrode 1 x100 red pH 4 buffer trays 1 x 100 green pH 10 buffer trays 1 x 460 ml calibration solution for conductance electrode 1 x protective case for GL 25pH electrode 1 x 120 labels, 4 x 100 ml square flange (HDPE) 2 x 250 ml PP laboratory beaker 4 x 1 GB 20 MB/sec SDmemory card for Cobra4 Mobile-Link 1 x110...240 V Charger for metal hybrid batteries 2 x Mignon 1.2 V 2700 mAh spare batteries - set of 4 operating manual plus CD-ROM with drivers and demo version of the "measure Cobra4" measuring software, incl. FREE evaluation software

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Wireless transmitter and receiver units to connect to the electrophysiology sensor to a PC, can also be used for other sensors to measure parameters common in physics, chemistry, biology and medical education electrophysiology sensor-unit for ECG, EMG and EOG with connectors for three measurement leads three separate and shielded leads, color-coded (red, yellow, green) with 3.5 mm phone jacks to connect to the sensor-unit and 2 mm jacks to connect to reusable and disposable electrodes three reusable stainless steel ECG electrodes, contact area 30 x 80 mm with connector for leads three reusable EMG electrodes with cable and 2 mm connectors disposable electrodes (100/pkg), three crocodile clips for disposable electrodes, electrode gel to improve contact between electrodes and skin software for wireless and wired data acquisition, for data analysis,automatic sensor recognition, automatic setup of measurement parameters and integrated experiment instructions 68-page manual in English language with experimental literature storage box for instrument set and accessories.

TESS Biology Set Electrophysiology EP 12673-89 TESS advanced Biology manual Cobra4 Electrophysiology: ECG, EMG, EOG 12673-12

Cobra4 Basic set Biochemistry and plant physiology Function and Applications

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 919

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Instrument set with the wireless computer interface Cobra4 to perform the following 10 experiments: Photosynthesis (2 methods), Transpiration of leaves, Glycolysis (2 methods), Ionic permeability of the cell membrane, Determination of the Michaelis constant, Enzyme inhibition, Substrate inhibition of enzymes, Enzymatic activity of catalase.

Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪

Scope of delivery ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 wireless computer interface for data acquisition Sensors for temperature, pH, conductivity, light intensity, pressure Lamp socket with reflector, diameter 20 cm, and 120 W filament lamp special glassware special stand material for the experiment setup experiment manual, English language (56 pages, in color)

The measure Cobra4 software (single user and school license) is not part of the scope of delivery. Standard lab equipment and chemicals required additionally. The Standard labware set consists of: balance 210g/ 0.01g with RS232 interface, lab-lifting apparatus (160 x 130 mm), magnetic stirrer, diverse lab glassware and small items, diverse lab consumables, microliter syringe (100 µl) mortar and pestle, bunsen burner with safety gas tubing. The Chemicals set consists of: sodium hydrogen carbonate, 250 g; Tartrazin (E102), 25 g; Patent blue V (E131), 25g; buffer solution pH 4.01, 460 ml; buffer solution pH 10.01, 1000 ml; hydrochloric acid, 1.0 mol/l, 1000 ml; sodium hydroxide solution, 1.0 M, 1000 ml; Urea, pure, 250 g; urease solution in 50% glycerol, 10 ml; silver nitrate, pure, 15 g; water, distilled, 5 l; glycerol, 99 %, 100 ml; hydrogen peroxide, 30 %, 250 ml. Basic set Cobra4 Biochemistry and Plant physiology 65982-89 Standard labware set for Biochemistry & plant physiology, 230 V 65980-77 Chemicals set Biochemistry & plant physiology 65980-10 Software Cobra4 - Single user and school licence 14550-61 Demo advanced Biology Manual Cobra4 Biochemistry & plant physiology 01331-02

With the radio-based recording of values, experiments can conveniently be carried out The optimum use of this device set is in the area of demonstration experiments. Furthermore, moving sensors offer completely new experimentation options, e.g. the measurement of acceleration of a school child on a bicycle, measuring the acceleration of a body in freefall etc.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

1 x Cobra4 WirelessManager 1 x Cobra4 Wireless-Link 1 xCobra4 Sensor-Unit Temperature Semiconductor, 20...110°C 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Current/ Voltage 1 xCobra4 3D Sensor-Unit Acceleration,+-6 g 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Force, 40 N 1 x "measure Cobra4" software, individual work station and school licence. Delivery incl. CD-ROM with all drivers and the full version of the "measureCobra4" measuring software incl. 130 experiment descriptions and configuration settings for experiments plus 2 high performance batteries for the Cobra4 Wireless-Link and an operating manual.

Cobra4 Wireless, Basic Set Physics, incl. Software and aluminium case 12605-89 Cobra4 USB, Basic Set Physics incl. Softwareand plastic case 12611-88 TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02

Cobra4 Wireless, Basic Set Chemistry

Cobra4 Wireless, Basic Set Physics

Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to computer-aided experiments in the field of Chemistry. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to computer-aided experiments in the field of physics.

excellence in science 920

▪

With the radio-based recording of values, experiments can conveniently be carried out. The optimum use of this device set is in the area of demonstration experiments. Furthermore, with modern radio transmission, moving sensors offer completely new experimentation options. With this system it is possible now, that experiments can to be carried out far away from the PC.

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

▪

Therewith it is surely set that the PC is not endangered by liquids or similar things.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The stable case contains the followingdevices: 1 x Cobra4 Wireless Manager 1 x Cobra4 Wireless-Link 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCrNi 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temp. (Pt1000) 1 x pH-electrode, plastic, refillable BNC plug 1 x Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 2 x Protection sleeve for electrodes 1 x "measure Cobra4" software, individual workstation and school licence Delivery incl. CD-ROM with all drivers and the full version of the "measureCobra4" measuring software incl. experiments descriptions and configuration settings for experiments 2 high performance batteries for the Cobra4 Wireless-Link operating manual

Cobra4 Wireless, Basic Set Chemistry, incl. Softwareand english handbook in case 12606-89 Cobra4 USB, Basic Set Chemistry incl. Softwareand english Handbook, in case 12612-89 TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02

Cobra4 Display-Connect

▪

Case for storage

Cobra4 Display-Connect, Basic Set with digital large-scale display, Mobile Link, weather sensor and English handbook, 12607-89 TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02

Cobra4 Mobile-Link

Function and Applications This attractive device set serves excellently for use as a digital multimeter set for numerous measurements. Benefits This set is ideal for use in: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Student experiments without a PC Outdoor experimentation Project days, school hiking days, trips, etc. With this set, simply choose your Cobra4 Sensor-Units and compile your own personal set of equipment. Sufficient extra space has been left in the case for storing the sensors The "measure" evaluation software can also be used by pupils at home for FREE.

Equipement and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Complete device set for the wireless transmission of measurements from Mobile-Link to a digital large-scale display. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 Display-Connect (set of sender and receiver for the use of the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with a digital large-scale display) Cobra4 Mobile-Link, incl. accumulators SD memory card Fast battery charger for up to 4 Metal-hydride-Accumulators, 110...240V Digital large display with RS 232 interface Cobra4 Sensor Unit weather: air pressure, air humidity, temperature, light intensity, altitude Software, CD-ROM Manual Cobra4: Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday life phenomena

▪

8 x and 4x Cobra4 Mobile-Link incl. SD memory cards, respectively 4 x spare Mignon 1.2V 2700 mAh batteries, set of 4 1 x battery charger. operating manual plus CD-ROM with drivers and demo version of the "measure Cobra4" measuring software incl. FREE evaluation software, experimental descriptions and configuration settings for experiments

Cobra4 Mobile, for 8 work groups, incl. aluminium case 12621-88 Cobra4 Mobile, for 4 work groups, incl. plastic case 12621-44

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 921

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 Supplementary set TESS, Wireless or USB: Mechanics, Electric Building Blocks, Heat

TESS and Demo advanced Manual Cobra4 Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Everyday Science 01330-02 English TESS advanced Physik Handbuch Cobra4 Mechanik, Wärme, Elektrik / Elektronik 01332-01 German TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02 English P1042260

Cobra4 Mobile-Link

Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to perform computer assisted student experiments from the PHYWE TESS experiment sets Mechanics ME 1/2, Electric Building Blocks system EB 1/2 and Heat WE 1/2. Benefits This set enables the easy and convenient performance of more than 20 experiments (see manual 01332-02). Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

2 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Temperature, semiconductor -20...110°C 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Electricity Current/ Voltage 6 A, 30 V 1 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Force 4 N

Wireless version: 1 x Cobra4 Wireless-Link, 1 x Cobra4 Wireless Manager USB version: 1 x Cobra4 USB Link Required accessories 1 x "measure Cobra4" measuring sofware incl. data analysis software "measure", experimental descriptions and configuration settings for experiments (14550-61) Cobra4 Wireless, Student set TESS Mechanics, Heat, Electricity 12604-88 Cobra4 USB, Student set TESS Mechanics, Heat, Electricity 12604-66 TESS advanced Physics Manual Cobra4 Mechanics, Heat, Electricity/ Electronics 01332-02

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Mobile-Link is a modern, high performance hand measuring device for mobile data recording, to which all Cobra4 Sensor-Units can be connected via secure plug-in/lockable connection. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The Cobra4 MobileLink is ideal for use in: ▪

Thermal equilibrium

Up to 1,000 measuring values/sec. Data can be saved on an SD memory card Automatic detection of all Cobra4 Sensor-Units Foolproof navigation with central navigation cross "measure" evaluation software can be used for FREE Water-resistant and reliable for outdoor work.

▪ ▪

Students experiments with no computer (as a digital multi-meter for numerous measuring parameters) Outdoor experiments with student groups Project days, trips, schoolhiking days etc.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Why do tea or coffee get cold onstanding, but never hot? Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS und Demo advanced Handbuch Cobra4Physik, Chemie, Biologie, Alltagsphänomene 01330-01 German

excellence in science 922

▪

Power supply: 2 x Mignon batteries Power consumption: < 300 mA Data storage: Max. 2 GB SD card Data rate: 1,000 values/s Dimensions: L x B x H: 155x65x35 mm Weight: 200 g 2 Mignon 2,700 mAh batteries 1 GB SD memory card operating manual plus CD-ROM with drivers and demo version of the "measureCobra4" measuring software FREE evaluation software, experiments descriptions and configuration settings for experiments

Cobra4 Mobile-Link set, incl. rechargeable batteries, SD memory card, USB cable and software "measure" 12620-55

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 Mobile-Link 12620-00 SD memory card for Cobra4-Mobile-Link, 2 GB, 20MB/sec 12620-01 SD card reader 12620-03

Cobra4 Display-Connect, Set of transmitter and receiver for using the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with largescale displays

Large-scale display, digital, RS-232 port 07157-93 Data cable for cobra probes 12150-07 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00

Thermocouples NiCr-Ni (type K)

Thermocouples, that can be connected to Cobra4 Sensor Units 2 x temperature, Thermodynamics and Chemistry. Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Function and Applications Device combination from a sender and a receiver for the radio-based communication between a Cobra4 Mobile Link and up to 2 digital large displays. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The system works with 5 switchable send channels at a carrier frequency of 433 MHz. With this set it is possible to represent the measured values wellreadable for a big auditory in a classroom or lecture hall. For this purpose must the transmit unit only be inserted between an any Cobra4 SensorUnit and the Cobra4 Mobile-Link. The receiver unit is pluged into the input socket of the digital large display. The current supply of the sender and receivers occurs in each case via the devices at those ones these are connected. A parallel write-out of a series of measurements to the SD-Card of the Mobile-Link is possible.

Cobra4 Display-Connect, Set of transmitter and receiver for using the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with large-scale displays 12623-88 Cobra4 Display-Connect TX, transmitter for using the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with large-scale displays 12623-00 Cobra4 Display-Connect TX, receiver for using the Cobra4 Mobile-Link with large-scale displays 12623-01

Comming soon

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Light

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Light is a measuring recorder for light intensity measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

It can be fitted with different luxmeter probes. The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Light can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link, the Cobra4 Junior-Link or

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 923

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Equipment and technical data ▪ measuring range: 300 lx ...300 klx ▪ Resolution: max. 0.15 lx ▪ Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Dissoved oxygen is a measuring recorder for oxygen in solutions, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

Accessories ▪ ▪

Luxmeter probe (12107-01) Lux immersion probe, 10 m cable (07137-01)

It can be fitted with an oxygen probe. The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Dissoved oxygen can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link, the Cobra4 JuniorLink or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data 12660-00

▪ ▪

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Radioactivity

O2-concentration: 0…30 mg/l Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm

(available from 2012) 12676-00

Cobra4 JUNIOR-Link, Basic Set Physics for 5 groups, incl. Software, Handbook and aluminium case

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Radioaktivity is a measuring recorder for radioactive radiation, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

It can be fitted with different Geiger-Müller counter tubes. The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Radioacitivity can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link, the Cobra4 JuniorLink or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. pulse frequency: 4x105 pulses per minute Counter tube voltage: variable 100 … 650 V Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm

Accessories ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to computer-aided student experiments in the field of physics and containes all needed devices for 5 working groups. Benefits ▪ ▪

By recording values with the help of the Cobra4 Junior-Link, experiments can conveniently be carried out. The optimum use of this device set is in the area of student experiments.

Equipment and technical data

Counter tube, type A (09025-11) Counter tube, type B (09005-00) Counter tube, GM, 45 mm (09007-00)

12665-00

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Dissolved oxygen

▪

5 x Cobra4 Junior-Link 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Force ± 40 N 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Energy 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics,pressure abs. 2 bar and 2 temperature NiCr-Ni 5 x Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 1 x "measure Cobra4" software, individual work station and school licence. Delivered in a stable aluminium case

12616-89

excellence in science 924

6 Additional material 6.2 Cobra4

Cobra4 JUNIOR-Link, Basic Set Chemistry for 5 groups, incl. Software, Handbook and aluminium case

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather: Humidity, Air pressure, Temperature, Light intensity, Altitude 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Pulse, Heart rate, incl. ear clip 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Spirometry 1 x "measure Cobra4" software, individual work station and school licence. Delivered in a stable aluminium case

12618-89

Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to computer-aided student experiments in the field of chemistry and containes all needed devices for 5 working groups. Benefits ▪ ▪

By recording values with the help of the Cobra4 Junior-Link, experiments can conveniently be carried out. The optimum use of this device set is in the area of student experiments.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

5 x Cobra4 Junior-Link 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCrNi 5 x Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 5 x pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity, with stainless steel electrodes 1 x "measure Cobra4" software, individual work station and school licence. Delivered in a stable aluminium case

12617-89

Cobra4 JUNIOR-Link, Basic Set Biology for 5 groups, incl. Software, Handbook and aluminium case

Function and Applications This attractive device set is ideally suited to computer-aided student experiments in the field of bgiology and containes all needed devices for 5 working groups. Benefits ▪ ▪

By recording values with the help of the Cobra4 Junior-Link, experiments can conveniently be carried out. The optimum use of this device set is in the area of student experiments.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

5 x Cobra4 Junior-Link 5 x Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Temperature, semiconductor -20...110°C

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 925

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

excellence in science 926

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 927

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

temperature, pressure, pH/potential, light intensity, cardiac and vascular sounds, heart rate, voltage. Equipment and technical data: Cobra3 Biology Set contents: All Cobra3 devices are listed in the following order: • Sets • Literature • Basic units • Software modules • Measuring modules and accessories • General accessories You will find further information on articles, manuals and experiments in the respective chapters and on the PHYWE website.

computer interface with 7 measuring inputs, of which 5 are analog inputs and 2 are digital inputs, sampling rate 500kHz, analog output with a voltage range of +/-10V, voltage output (5V at 0.2A), USB, incl. USB cable, External power supply, Software Universal Recorder, Software Temperature, Software Pressure, Software pH/potential Pressure measuring module pH/potential measuring module, pH electrode, polythene-sheathed, Photo diode, in G1 housing, 2 temperature sensors, -20...110°C, Acoustic measuring probe, with FET amplifier, Handbook Chemistry/Biology, computerassisted experiments 12173-77

Sets As well as the classical sets consisting of a basic unit and a selection of sensors for the different specialist departments, there exists a selection of sets which include everything to cover whole project areas. For example, gas laws, basics of electrics/electronics, calorimetry, neurobiology or plant physiology.

Fundamentals of electricity and electronics, 10 experiments with FG module

Cobra3 Physics set

Function and Applications

The Physics Set consist of: Cobra3 BASIC-Unit, Power Supply 12 V/ 2A, Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole, Software Cobra3 Universal recorder, Software Cobra3 Timer/ Counter, Software Cobra3 Translat./ Rotation, Software Cobra3 Temperature, Software Cobra3 Fourier analysis, Ligth barrier comact, Photo diode, G1, Wire resistor, 0.2 Ohm, 2 W, G1, Temperature sensor, -10...120 °C, Beam stopper, Measuring microphone with amplifier, Handbook Physics, computer assisted experiments with Cobra3 12171-77

Cobra3 Biology set

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

12111-88

Function and Applications Analog/ digital computer interface including all components necessary to take measurements of the following parameters:

excellence in science 928

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Set calorimetry, 230 V

Set gas laws with glass jacket, 230 V

Equipment and Technical Data It will be delivered complete with tripod material and all necessary small hardware items. ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Calorimeter, transparent Heating coil with sockets Magnetic stirrer Work and power meter Universal power supply Small hardware items- CD with literature

Not included are temperature measuring instruments. Accessory data acquisition set with Cobra3 Basic Unit for recording the temperature by means of a PC. 43030-88

Cobra3 Data acquisition set for set calorimetry Function and Applications This set allows the computer-assisted measuring and evaluation of temperature in a comfortable way for experiments with the "Set calorimetry".

Function and Applications With this set, experiments on the following topics can be carried out: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Gas law of Boyle-Mariotte Gas law of Gay-Lussac Gas law of Amonton (Charles) Determination of molar masses according to the vapor density method

Benefits This set allows to execute the measurements in a didactical clear and easy understandable way: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

clear set-up easy to understand completely mercury-free quickly to execute short preparation time

Equipment and technical data It will be delivered complete with tripod material and all necessary small hardware items: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Glass jacket Gas syringe Heater Tripod material Small hardware items CD with literature

Not included are measuring instruments as thermometers or manometers. Accessories Data acquisition set with Cobra3 Basic unit for recording the measured data by means of a PC. 43003-88

Advantages Because the temperature data are recorded with a PC it is very easy to analyse and represent the results fast and graphically. Equipment and Technical Data

Cobra3 Data acquisition set for set gas laws 43003-30

The set is completely supplied with all small hardware items which are required to mount the temperature probe in the calorimetric vessel. Scope of delivery: Cobra3 BASIC-UNI USB, Power supply unit 12 V DC/ 2 A, Software Cobra3 Temperature, Measuring module, Temperature Pt100, Temperature probe, immersion type, Pt100, Small hardware items 43030-30

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 929

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Cobra3 Set automatic titration, 230 V

This set allows to execute themeasurements in a didactical clear andeasy way:- small costs- easy to understand for the students- quickly to execute- because the measured values arerecorded with an interface thetitration curves can be representedeasily Equipment and technical data It will be delivered complete withtripod material and all necessary smallhardware items:- Cobra3-ChemUnit- Software measure- pHelectrode- Immersion temperature probe, Teflon- Drop counter- Magnetic stirrer- Small hardware items- CD with literature Accessories Conductivity-probe for the recordingof conductivity titration 43050-88

Function and Applications

Electrophysiology Lab, 230 V

With this setup titrations can be carried out completely automatised, e.g. quantitative analyses, determination of concentrations, determination of dissociation constants of weak bases and acids. Benefits This set allows to execute measurements in a didactical clear and easy way: All system components are visible and thus easily identifiable, Precise, reproducible results, Because measured values are recorded with an interface the titration curves can be presented easily Equipment and technical data Tripod material and all necessary small hardware items., Cobra3-Chem Unit, Software "measure", pH-electrode, Immersion temperature probe, Teflon, Motor piston burette, Magnetic stirrer, Small hardware items, CD with literature

Function and Applications

Accessories

Equipment and technical data

Conductivity-probe for the recording of conductivity titrations

computer interface with USB port, seven measurement inputs (5 analog and 2 digital), voltage output (5V and 0.2A) for 4mm connectors, data transfer rate 500 kHz, online frequency analysis, Bio-Amplifier with 100x and 1000x signal amplification and measurement settings for ECG, EMG and EOG, radial reflex hammer for the mechanical triggering of an inpulse to be connected directly to the computerinterface, with radial switch in the hammer head to start measurement, incl. 2 m long cable and two 4 mm plugs, electrode collecting cable to connect ECG and EMG electrodes, with color-coded cables (red, yellow, green), three stainless steel ECG electrodes, contact area 30 x 80 mm with connectors for electrode collecting cable, three EMG electrodes with cable and 2 mm-miniature connector, electrode gel to improve contact between electrodes and skin, storage box for accessories.

43040-88

Cobra3 set pH titration with drop counter, 230 V

Complete instrument set to perform computer-assisted standard experiments covering human and animal physiology: heart, muscle, eye, nerve.

65981-66

Cobra3 Basic set Biochemistry and plant physiology

Function and Applications With this set titrations can be carriedout, at which the volume of addedreagent is determined with a dropcounter. This kind of application isfaster and more comfortable than amanual application. Possiblemeasurements are e.g. quantitativeanalyses, determination ofconcentrations, determination ofdissociation constants of weak basesand acids.

Function and Applications

Benefits

Instrument set to perform the following experiments:

excellence in science 930

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Photosynthesis Transpiration of leaves Glycolysis Ionic permeability of the cell membrane Determination of the Michaelisconstant Substrate inhibition of enzymes Enzyme inhibition Enzymatic activity of catalase

Equipment and technical data The instrument set consists of ▪ ▪ ▪

Computer interface for data acquisision with 7 measurement inputs (5 analog and 2 digital inputs), one voltage output (5V and 0.2A) with 4mm sockets Sampling rate 500 kHz Online frequency analyser

Sensors for ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Temperature -20...110°C pH/ potential Conductivity Pressure Software for data analysis Lamp socket with reflector (diameter 20 cm) and 120 W filament lamp Special glassware Special stand material for the experiment setups

Neuron unit ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Simulates a generalised nerve cell with an apical dendrite and its synaptic contacts, a cell body (soma) and a nerve fibre (axon) with myelin sheathes and a Ranvier's ring. The dendrite comprises exciting, inhibiting, presynaptic and Hebbian synapses which are marked by the corresponding colours of the sockets. Here the axons end in presynaptic buttons. These are represented together with a part of the (afferent) fibre providing the signal. The connection between the (efferent) axon of a neuron unit which leads away or the stimulus output socket of the operating unit and a synapse is established by means of a white cable which is inserted into the desired synapse socket. The yellow sockets serve for the derivation of the state of excitement of the simulated neuron. They are connected to a computer interface. The action potentials can be made audible with the aid of the integrated acoustic monitor. The turning knob "S" serves for setting the "firing threshold" of the neuron.

Neurobiology Lab, 230 V 65963-11 Additional nerve cell 65963-10

Required Accessories ▪

Standard lab equipment and chemicals

Basic set Biochemistry and plant physiology (Cobra3) 65980-88 Standard labware set for Biochemistry & plant physiology, 230 V 65980-77

Cobra3, literature The diverse possibilities which the Cobra3 family offers are combined into extensive experiment collections. This includes, for example, more than 140 demonstration experiments and more than 120 experiments for college practical training in scientific specialist departments.

Cobra3-Set Neurobiology

Function and Applications Complete instrument set consisting of neuron unit, operating unit, computer interface, measure software for data acquisition and analysis, various cables and manual. Benefits ▪ ▪

With this instrument set 13 experiments covering the topic "nerve cell" can be performed. Optional upgrade available to perform additional experiments about nerve cell interactions and neuronal networks.

Handbook Cobra3, Physics Computer-assisted experiments with Cobra3 01310-02 Demo advanced Chemistry / Biology Manual Cobra3 (C3BT) 01320-02 Neurosimulator Handbook 01191-02 TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16508-02 TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments CHEMISTRY 16504-12 Labortory Experiments Biol., L.V. 16506-02

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Computer interface: 7 measurement inputs (5 analog and 2 digital inputs) One voltage output (5V and 0.2A) with 4 mm sockets Sampling rate 500 kHz and online frequency analyser.

Operating unit ▪

4 output channels which generate "muscle and sense signals", also serves as supply power to operate up to 4 neuron units.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 931

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Cobra3, basic units There are four basic units, of which up to 8 items can be cascaded. As well as the COM-UNIT, which replaces the computer, and the DISPLAY UNIT, which can be used as a demo-display unit in connection with the other basic units, the BASIC UNIT and the CHEM UNIT play a central role as actual basic units for data acquisition.

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Interface: USB Data transfer rate: 115200 bit/s Memory: 12000 values Dimensions (mm): 190 x 135 x 90 Fail-safe plastic housing with support feet, several fixation possibilities and lateral docking option for further units.

Included accessories ▪

USB Cable

Required accessoires:

Cobra3 Basic-Unit, USB

▪

Cobra3 Power supply (12150-99)

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99

Cobra3 Chem-Unit

Function and Applications Computer interface for measurement and control in naturalscience education (physics, chemistry and biology). Benefits ▪ ▪

Operation either with PC (USB port) or with special operation unit (COM-Unit). Upgrade for measurement of non-electrical quantities by use of plug-in modules.

Equipment and technical data 3 analog input channels ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Module port: ± 10 V Connection type: 25-pole Sub-D Sensor port 1: ± 30/ 10 V Connection type: 4 mm socket 9-pole Sub-D Input: grounded Input resistance: 500 kOhm Sensor port 2: ± 30/10/3/1/0.3/0.1 V Connection type: 4 mm sockets 9-pole Sub-D Difference potential input: Input resistance: 1 MOhm

For all analog inputs ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maximum sampling rate: 500 kHz Online sampling rate: 5 kHz Burst-mode: 5 Hz...500 kHz Resolution: 12 bit Voltage protection: 230 V AC Trigger: adjustable

Timer/Counter 1 ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 32 bit Resolution: 800 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets

Timer/Counter 2 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 40 bit Resolution: 200 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets Analog control output: ± 10 V Resolution: 12 bit Connection type: 9-pole Sub-D

General data ▪

Supply voltage: 12 V DC/ 6 W

excellence in science 932

Function and application Allows to measure all important measuring quantities in chemistry and biology. Advantages You can run the Chem-Unit with a computer (via serial interface) or without a computer (combined with the Com-Unit). Equipment and specification: Inputs: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

pH/potential: 0...14 pH (0.01 pH); -2.2...+2.2 V (+/- 1 mV) 10 Giga-Ohm, BNC Conductivity: 6 ranges of measurement: 0...1000 mS/cm; pH/ Potential and conductivity are electrically isolated Temperature: NiCr-Ni thermoelement T1, T2, T3; -100...1500°C Temperature: Pt1000 sensor T4; measuring range -100...850°C Temperature sensor in housing T0; measuring range 0...85 °C. Analog In: 3 measuring ranges +/-3.2V; 32V; 81V TTL In/Out for drop counter or motor piston burett Voltage output: 5V / 0.2 A e.g.for drop counter Connections RS232-D-Sub-9 jack-Bit rate up to 115200 bit/s Voltage supply 12V/ 6W Shock-resistant plastic housing with support bases, a wide range of fixing possibilities and two lateral connectors for cascading further units

Cobra3 Chem-Unit 12153-00 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Cobra3 Display-Unit

Cobra3, software modules As well as the free software measure, with the aid of which all measured data can be evaluated securely and reliably, and interconnections represented rapidly, there are specially-coordinated software modules for every application. The selection is oriented either to the measurement variable or the project area of the experiment, or the universal applicability of the Cobra3 measuredvalue recording system.

Further Cobra3 software modules Function and Applications For large display of electrical and nonelectrical measured values and their units in combination with: ▪

Cobra3 Basic-Unit and Com-Unit with modules

▪

Cobra3 Chem-Unit and Com-Unit, hand-held measuring devices and electronic balances

Cobra3 Display Unit 12154-00 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99

Cobra3 Com-Unit

Function and Applications: For using the Cobra3 Basic-Unit without a computer. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Easy connection to the Basic-Unit by plugging it into the lateral edge connector. LCD display with background lighting for selecting and presenting the measurement data. It is possible to connect large-format displays for demonstration purposes. Selection wheel for a comfortable use of the menu and for entering data.

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61 Software COBRA3 Temperature 14503-61 Software Cobra3, Oxygen 14505-61 Software Cobra3 Radioactivity 14506-61 Software Cobra3, Lux 14507-61 Software Cobra3 Conductivity 14508-61 Software Cobra3 pH and potential 14509-61 Software Cobra3, Pressure 14510-61 Software Cobra3 Timer/Counter 14511-61 Software Cobra3-Force/ Tesla 14515-61 Softw. Cobra3 translat./rotation 14512-61 Software Cobra3 - Fourier analysis 14514-61 Software Cobra3 - gas laws 14516-61 Software Cobra3-Weather station 14518-61 Software Cobra3-hall effect 14521-61 Software package Cobra3 for BASIC- and CHEM-UNIT 14540-61

Power supply (12151-99) required. Cobra3-Com-Unit 12152-00 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 933

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Cobra3, measurement modules and accessories All necessary units for the recording of different measurement variables, and/or for different subject areas: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Current/ Voltage Current, voltage, frequency Arbitrary voltage signals Movement Force Charging Acoustics, heart and vascular sound processing Temperature Pressure Gas laws Meteorological data Light strength/ light intensity Magnetic field Radioactivity Hall effect pH-value and potential Conductance Titration Scales Dissolved oxygen Nerve physiology

▪ ▪

Limiting frequency: 20 kHz Continuity resistance: < 0.01 Ohm

Cobra3 current probe 6A 12126-00 Cobra3 current probe 30A 12127-00

Cobra3 Industry-Sensor-Adapter

Function and Applications

Measurement context: Voltage and current

The Industry sensor adapter is used to adapt commercially available industrial sensors with 2-, 3- and 4-conductor technology to the Cobra3 interfacesystem. Benefits:

Cobra3 Current probes

▪

All sensor signals are converted into the Cobra3-typical 0...10 V signal.

Equipment and technical data: ▪

Supply voltage output: 24 V DC/50 mA

max. Signal input: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2-conductor 4...20 mA: R_i = 500 Ohm 3-conductor 0...20 mA: R_i = 500 Ohm 4-conductor 0...10 mA: R_i = 130 kOhm Signal output (Cobra3):0...10 V or 2...10 V DC Resolution 5 mV (corresponds to 10 mA sensor signal)

12132-00 Function and Applications These galvanically separated sensors serve for measurements of direct and alternating currents. Equipment and technical data Plastic housing with 4-mm safety sockets. 350-mm data cable enabling the connection to the appropriate interface. Dimensions of sensors: 97 x 42 x 25 (mm). Weight: approx. 0.12 kg. Current probe 6 A: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 6 A, 0.6 A Continuous current: max. 6 A Accuracy: +/- 1.5 % Resolution: 0.1 % (of end value of measuring range) Limiting frequency: 20 kHz Continuity resistance: < 0.02 Ohm

Current probe 30 A: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 30 A, 3 A Continuous current: max. 25 A Accuracy: +/- 1.5% Resolution: 0.1 % (of end value of measuring range)

excellence in science 934

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61 Software Cobra3 - Fourier analysis 14514-61

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measurement context: Current, voltage, frequency programmable voltage and current source

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Arbitrary voltage signals Cobra3 Measuring module function generator Measuring devices with analogue output

Function and Applications Plug-in measurement module for generating sinusoidal, square-wave and triangular-wave signals, direct voltages and frequency- or voltage-ramps. Benefits: The module can be used as a voltage or current source: ▪ ▪ ▪

If it is used as a voltage source, the actual frequency and current can be displayed and measured during operation If it is used as a current source, the actual frequency and voltage can be displayed and measured. In addition, up to 2 measurement quantities can be recorded and evaluated with the help of an interface.

Equipment and technical data:

Meter for Stirling engine, pVnT 04371-97 Control Unit for Si-Photodetector 08735-99 Control unit gas chromatograph 36670-99 Biological amplifier 65961-93

Frequency ranges: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Range 1: 200 Hz-20 kHz Interval: 10 Hz Range 2: 2 Hz-200 Hz Interval: 1 Hz Signal form: Sinusoidal, square-wave, triangular-wave signals, direct voltages and frequency- or voltage-ramps

Stirling engine with Cobra3

Voltage source: ▪ ▪ ▪

Amplitude: 0 V...10 V Interval: 5 mV Offset voltage: -10 V...10 V(adjustable)

Current source: ▪ ▪ ▪

Amplitude: 0 mA...100 mA Interval: 5 mA Offset current: 100 mA...100 mA

12111-00

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 935

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

ined with the assistance of the pV diagram. The efficiency of the Stirling engine can be estimated.

Light barrier, compact

Tasks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

What you can learn about First and second law of thermodynamics, Reversible cycles, Isochoric and isothermal changes, Gas jaws, Efficiency, Stirling engine, Conversion of heat, Thermal pump Literature for this experiment as follows: TESS expert Handbook Laboratory Experiments Physics 16502-32 English

Function and Applications Universal fork-type light barrier to measure short and long shadowingperiods. Benefits:

P2360415

▪

Measurement context: Movement

▪

An incremental wheel with a string groove which can be attached to the fork of the light barrier allows to measure paths by counting the ribs of the incremental wheel. Areas of application: track experiments, freefall, pendulum experiments, leaf springoscillations, drop counters, volumetric measurements concerning the gas laws.

Equipment and technical data:

Movement sensor with cable

▪ ▪

Dimensions: 40 x 40 mm Supply voltage: 5 V

11207-20

Softw. Cobra3 translat./rotation

14512-61

Falling sphere apparatus

Function and Applications Low-friction incremental decoder with a high resolution to detect rotary movements and linear movements. Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

String grooves Ø6 mm, 12 mm. dimensions: (72x34x113) mm Plastic housing with mounting shaft and cable Resolution 512 steps / revolution

Function and technical data Determination of the gravitational acceleration of the earth with great precision.

12004-10

Benefits: ▪

excellence in science 936

The exclusively mechanical retention of the falling body allows to avoid mistakes caused by residual magnetism from electromagnetic retention systems for precision measurements of the falling times of a free falling ball.

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

▪ ▪ ▪

Release unit with ball for timely defined local release of suited bodies, e.g. balls, falling rods,etc. Impact switch release and impacts witch are fixed to a support by means of clamps. This allows to determine the falling trajectory arbitrarily.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪

Release unit with ball Impact switch

02502-88

Measuring ±4 mN, ±40 mN, ranges ±400 mN, ±4 N Resolution 0.0035 mN,0.035 mN, 0.35 mN, 3.5 mN Compensation± 4 N in every measuring range. Dimensions: (100x50x40) mm

12110-00

Software Cobra3 Timer/Counter 14511-61 Light barrier, compact 11207-20 Beam stopper 02504-00

Newton sensor

Measurement context: Force

Cobra3 Measuring module Newton

Function and Applications For connecting to the COBRA3 force measurement module. Metal casing with load-bearing hooks for tension forces and load plate for handling compression forces. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

With mounting rod and fixed mains lead End limit sensors for overload protection Lifting range 0.4 mm/N approx. Measuring range: max. +/- 4 N Resolution: max. +/- 0.0035 mN Compensation: +/- 4 N Dimensions (mm): 62 x 40 x 120

12110-01

Cobra3 newton sensor +/- 50N

Function and Applications

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 937

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Force sensor with 4 strain gauges in full bridge circuit, with tare function, load hooks and fixing screw for assembly to stands.

Equipment and technical data ▪

Benefits: ▪ ▪

With 1.9 m fixed cable between sensor and probe Including 350 mm data cable 2 x Sub-D, 9-pin type.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: ± 50/15/5/1/0.5 N Resolution: 0.1% of upper limit of effective range Max. loading: 120 N Limiting frequency: 500 Hz Tare: possible in every measuring range max. 50 N Dimensions (mm): 70 x 50 x 15 Weight (only sensor): 80 g

12125-00

Software Cobra3-Force/ Tesla

14515-61

Measurement context: Charge

Electrometer Amplifier

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Power supply via 4 mm sockets or wall power supply with hole socket Operation temperature: 5...40°C Relative humidity: < 80% Gain/ amplification: 1.0 Input resistance: > 10000 GOhm Input current: < 0.5 pA Input capacitance: < 50 pF Input voltage: Amplifier (socket 1): ± 10 V2. input (socket 2): 1 kV Power supply: 12 V AC/25 mA hole socket: 2.1/5.5 mm or External power source: 12 V AC25 mA 4 mm sockets or: Cobra3 interface: ± 15 V RS232 socket Output voltage: ± 10 V Output current: 1 mA Output resistance: < 500 Ohm Dimensions H × W × D (mm): 65 × 113 × 35 Weight: 150 g

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61 Electrometer Amplifier 13621-00 Data cable for cobra probes 12150-07

Measurement context: Acoustics, heart and vascular sound processing

Measuring microphone

Function and Applications With an integrated amplifier and three selectable output modes: level, signal,TTL-level. Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Continuously adjustable amplification. Amplifier with minimum current requirements. Powered by a battery. Automatic shutdown after about 90 min if powered by a battery. Reactivation by means of a push-button.

Equipment and technical data: Function and Applications Operational amplifier with high resistance input for quasi-static voltage measurement and measurement of very small charges.

▪

Frequency range: 30 Hz...20kHz, (15...30 Hz and 20...40 kHz) with a reduced reception 25 cm sensor tube (d = 8 mm) ensuring an interference-free measurement of soundfields Flexible shielded cable (l = 2m), BNC plug threaded rod for secure fastening

Benefits

▪ ▪

03542-00

excellence in science 938

▪

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measuring microphone w.amplifier

Software Cobra3 Timer/Counter 14511-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Temperature

Cobra3, sensor -20..110 C

Function and Applications Electret capsule with 1.5 m long cable suitable for special investigations, e.g. point shaped plotting of soundfields. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Frequency range 30 Hz ... 20 kHz Sensitivity 6.0 mV/Pa at 1 kHz Gain 0 ... 1000 in phase with sound signal Signal output 4V max. at 3 Ohm Dimensions: (mm) 120 x 25 x 60

Required accessory ▪

9 V battery

03543-00

Acoustic probe for COBRA3

Function and Applications To be connected directly to the sensorports of the Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT. Equipment and techical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Sensor sheathing: stainless sationsteel Diameter: 6 mm Sensor length: 200 mm Measuring range: -20°C...+110°C Resolution: 0.2°C Total length incl. cable: 1.5 m

12120-00

Cobra3 Measuring module, temp. NiCrNi, 330°C

Function and Applications Highly sensitive miniature microphone for measuring cardiac and vascular sound and for determining the heartbeat rate. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Electret microphone with FET amplifier Including a 1.5 m cable with 9-pin Sub-Dplug Frequency range: 50 Hz...20 kHz

03544-00

Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring temperatures by means of NiCr-Ni thermocouples in the range of -50. 330°C. Benefits ▪

Can be combined with the pressure measuring module,e.g. to record vapour-pressure diagramsor to compensate the influence of thetemperature on the electric conductivity or the pH value in solutions together with the corresponding modules and sensors.

Equipment and technical data Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 - Fourier analysis 14514-61

▪ ▪

Measuring range -50...333°C Resolution: 0.2°C.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 939

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measuring module, Temperature NiCr-Ni, 330°C 12104-00 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05

Measuring mod.,Temperature PT100

Temperature sensor Pt1000 with 4 mm plug connectors (for CHEM UNIT)

Function and Applications For temperature measurement and for automatic temperature compensation of the pH and conductance measurement, with the employment of measurement cells, without built-in temperature sensor. Connection: 4 mm plug connector. Temperature probe Pt-1000 13702-01 Temp. probe Pt-1000, 10m cable 07139-01

Software COBRA3 Temperature 14503-61 Software Cobra3 - gas laws 14516-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61

Measurement context: Pressure Function and Applications Plug-in module for a high-resolution measurement of temperatures using Pt 100 sensors. Benefits ▪ ▪

Cobra3 Pressure sensors

Two sensors can be connected simultaneously (multiplexing). Measurement of the temperature difference with a resolution of 0.01 K.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -60...350°C Resolution: 0.01 K

Measuring mod.,Temperature PT100 12102-00 Temp. probe, immersion type, Pt100, stainless steel, -20...+300°C 11759-01 Surface temperature probe PT100, -20...+300°C 11759-02 Temp.probe, imm., PT100, -20...+300°C, teflon 11759-04 Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00

Function and Applications Absolute and differential pressure sensors for overpressure and vacuum systems. Can be used in combination with a Pc and the Cobra3 Basic-Unit or without a PC combined with the Cobra3 Basic-Unit and the Cobra3 Com-Unit. Benefits ▪ ▪

With hose connector and hose section for connecting the module to any type of peripheral equipment. Including data cable for Cobra3 sensors.

Equipment and technical data

excellence in science 940

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

35 cm data cable Measuring range: 80 mbar and 2.0 bar, respectively Autorange: (80-8-2,4) mbar and (0.6-2.0) bar, respectively Max. pressure: 750 mbar and 10 bar, respectively Accuracy: 5 % and 1.5 %, respectively Resolution: 0.05 % Dimensions (mm): 75 x 42 x 25

Cobra3 press. sensor 2.0 bar abs. 12128-00 Cobra3 press. sensor 80 mbar diff. 12130-00 Cobra3 press. sensor 2.0 bar diff. 12129-00

Software Cobra3, Pressure 14510-61 Software Cobra3 - gas laws 14516-61 Software Cobra3-Weather station 14518-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Benefits ▪ ▪

▪

With hose connector and hose section for connecting the module to any type of peripheral equipment (the vacuum rubber tubing no.39288.00 is recommended for extension purposes). The measuring module replaces mercury manometers or crusher gauges normally used for studying the gas laws, for recording vapour-pressure diagrams or for measuring the barometric pressure. Pressure sensor integrated in the measuring mod.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range 0...2000 hPa Resolution 0.5 hPa Overload capacity up to 4000 hPa Response time ≤1 ms Suitable media: non-aggressive gases and liquids

Measuring module, pressure 12103-00 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Modulconverter COBRA3-mea.unit 12150-04

Cobra3 Measuring module Temperature NiCr-Ni, 330°C

Measurement context: Gas laws

Cobra3 Measuring module, pressure

Function and Applications Plug-in module for Cobra3 interface. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -50...+330°C Resolution: 0.2°C. Dimensions (mm): 100 x 50 x 40

Measuring module, Temperature NiCr-Ni, 330°C 12104-00 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Cobra3, sensor -20..110 C 12120-00

Software Cobra3 - gas laws

Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring pressures or pressure differences.

14516-61

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 941

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measurement context: Meteorological data

Humidity sensor for Cobra3

Software Cobra3-Weather station

14518-61

Measurement context: Light strength/ light intensity

Photo diode, G1

Function and Applications Measurement of relative humidity (RH), absolute humidity and temperature with Cobra3 Basic-UNIT. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Humidity Range: 5-95% RH (non-condensing) accuracy: ± 5% RH at 25°C response rate: approx. 15 seconds in moving air at 25°C repeatability: ± 0.5% RH temperature range: 40°C.+85°C accuracy: ± 1°C at 25°C resolution: ± 0.1°C.

Cup anemometer for Cobra3

Function and Applications Wind sensor with large speed measurement range of 4 to 140 km/h for fitting to masts or support rods or poles. Benefits Can be screwed onto the tripod rod/pole (M6) or attached to any mast or jib using the fixing angle supplied. Equipment and technical data Operating temperature: o...+70°C Measuring range: 1...40m/s resp. 4....140km/h max. switching capacity: 0.6V weight: 0.3kg dimensions: 112 x 162 x 140 mm

12124-00

excellence in science 942

Photo diode, G1 Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪

12121-00

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications

Plastic housing (37 x 18 x 32 mm) with 4mm plugs in 19 mm spacing Open circuit voltage 380 mV at 1 klx Short circuit current: approx. 35μA at 1klx

Photo diode, G1 39119-01 resistor 470 Ohm, 1W, G1 39104-15

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Cobra3 Measuring module lux

Measurement context: Magnetic field

Cobra3 Measuring module, Tesla

Function and Applications

Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring the illuminance. Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪

Measuring range selectable with the aid of the software. Measuring Range, resolution: 300 Lx 0.15 Lx; 3 kLx1.5 Lx; 30 kLx 15 Lx; 300 kLx 150 Lx

Measuring module lux 12107-00 Luxmeter probe 12107-01 Lux immersion probe, 10m cable 07137-01

Software Cobra3, Lux 14507-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Plug-in module for a precise measurement of magnetic DC and AC fields. Advantages ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measurements possible from 5 µT to 1T. Detection of the field direction (sign) in the case of DC fields. Software-controlled zero adjustment and compensation of interference fields up to ± 1 T. Readily calibrated, i.e. no calibration magnet necessary. Use of the Hall probes of the teslameter no. 13610.93. Measuring ranges: ± 10 mT, ± 100 mT, ± 1 T. Max. resolution: 5 µT (12 bit). Compensation ± 1 T in all measuring ranges.

Measuring module, Tesla 12109-00 Hall probe, axial 13610-01 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02 Software Cobra3-Force/ Tesla 14515-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 943

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measurement context: Radioactivity

Cobra3 Counter tube module

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Self-quenching halogen triggered tube with chrome-iron jacket and mica window, for investigating alpha-, beta- and gammarays. Handle for attachment included. Including a grill protecting the counter tube. Mica: 2 ...3 mg cm2 Working voltage: 500 V Plateau length: 200 V Plateau increase: 0.04 %/ V Dead time: about 100 µs Zero effect: aboout 45 pulses/ min Case diameter: 22 mm Diameter of counter tube: 45 mm Length of counter tube: 80 mm Weight: 320 g

09007-00

Counter tube holder on fix. magn.

Function and Applications Counter tube module 12106-00 Counter tube, type A, BNC 09025-11 Counter tube, type B 09005-00

Counter tube, GM, 45 mm

Function and Applications Highly sensitiv counter tube, especially suitable to investigate weakly radioactive samples. Because of the large active area experiments with natural beam sources deliver very good results. Benefits In the implementation of student experiments a radioactive source is no longer necessary.

excellence in science 944

For base plate (09200-00) or Physics demonstration board (02120-00). For attaching counting tubes with 22 mm casing diameter. Equipment and technical data Painted. Metal holder with placement marks and magnet with sturdy non-slip foil. Adhesive force 10 N. Counter tube holder on fix.magn. 09201-00 Holder f.counter tube large 09206-00 Screened cable, BNC, l 250 mm 07542-10 Screened cable, BNC, l 750 mm 07542-11

Software Cobra3 Radioactivity 14506-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Measurement context: Hall effect

Cobra3 Measuring module pH/ potential

Hall effect module

Function and applications Hall module with central power supply to provide an adjustable constant current for the sample and for the integrated sample heater. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

digital LED display (3 digits, 9 mm) to show either the sample current or the sample temperature sample heater with fully automatic temperature control system to avoid damage to the samples electronic compensating circuit for Hall voltage offset compensation RS 232 interface to connect an interface for comfortable data capturing, display and evaluation using a PC Different boards can be plugged easily and safely into the Hall module which requires only a 12 V AC power supply. The Hall module provides all operating parameters for the samples and displays the sample.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Max. current of probe: +/- 60 mA Max. temperature of probe: 175 °C Power supply: 12 V AC/ max. 3.5 A Dimensions: 16 x 10.5 x 2.5 cm Weight: 0.25 kg

Hall effect module 11801-00 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Hall effect,n-Ge,carrier board 11802-01 Hall effect,p-Ge,carrier board 11805-01 Intrins.conduct.Ge,carrier board 11807-01 Measuring module, Tesla 12109-00 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02 Software Cobra3-hall effect 14521-61

Measurement context: pH-value and potential

Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring pH values and potentials. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪

Front DIN-socket for pH probe. Temperature probe calibration and compensation are software controlled. Plastic housing with D-sub-25-plug on the back .

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Range -2... +2 V Resolution 1 mV Input impedance 10 ohms exp. 12 Impact-resistant plastic housing Dimensions: 100 x 50 x 40 mm

Measuring module pH/potential 12101-00 pH electrode, sterilisable 18456-00 pH-electrode, shock resistant 18452-00 pH-electrode, polythene sheathed 18450-00 Reference electrode, AgCl 18475-00 Platin.electrode in prot.tube,8mm 45206-00 pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 945

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Conductance

Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Titration

Motor piston burette, univer.

Cobra3 Measuring module Conductivity

Function and Application For uniform portioning and reproducible titrations - microprocessor controlled and with remote control. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Plug-in module for conductivity measurements. Benefits ▪

Can be connected to the module port and/or sensor port 1 or 2 (with moduleconverter and data cable)

Display: LCD matrix (64 x 128 pixels) Dispensing accuracy: +/- 0.15 % Burette volume: 50 ml Display accuracy: 0.01 ml Glass cylinder: DURAN® Line voltage: 230 VAC

Motor.piston burette,univer.50ml 36499-93 Cable Chem-Unit/Motor piston burette 36501-01 Cable Basic-Unit/Motor piston burette 36501-03

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4 Measuring ranges 0...0.2/2/20/200mS/cm Measuring frequency approx. 4 kHz dimensions: (100x50x40) mm cell constant: 0,85...1,15/cm Plastic housing with rear D-sub-25-plug

Light barrier, compact

Measuring module Conductivity 12108-00 Conductivity probe K1 18151-02 Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 13701-01 Software Cobra3 Conductivity 14508-61 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61 Function and Applications

excellence in science 946

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Universal fork-type light barrier to measure short and long shadowingperiods.

scaling. Integrated application programs: Counting, %-weighing, net total/recipe; animal weighing; switchover between 2 units

Benefits:

Equipment and technical data Readability: 1 mg, weighing range: 620 g, weighing scale pan diameter: 110 mm (stainless steel), Adjustable feet for level installation, integrated bi-directional serial interface (RS232) for simple data transfer, casing dimensions (mm): 213 x 342 x 153, included power supply unit included in the scope of delivery, mains power connection voltage: 230 V~, including measure software for weighing scales.

An incremental wheel with a string groove which can be attached to the fork of the light barrier allows to measure paths by counting the ribs of the incremental wheel., Areas of application: track experiments, freefall, pendulum experiments, leaf springoscillations, drop counters, volumetric measurements concerning the gas laws. Equipment and technical data: Dimensions: 40 x 40 mm, Supply voltage: 5 V 11207-20

Set of Precision Balance Sartorius CPA 623S and measure software, 230 V 49224-88 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Balance adapter, 25/9 pins 14601-01 Converter USB - RS232, active 14602-10

Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61 Software Cobra3 Conductivity 14508-61 Software Cobra3 pH and potential 14509-61

Measurement context: Scales

Set composed of Sartorius weighing scale and software

Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Dissolved oxygen

Cobra3 Measuring module,oxygen

Function and Applications Set composed of Sartorius CPA623S weighing scale, with built-in RS232 interface and the measure software for weighing scales. (The series-connection cables for the connecting of the weighing scale with the PC are not included in the scope of delivery.) The Sartorius weighing scales of the CP series offer many technical advantages, which ensure the permanent operation of the weighing scales with maximum measurement accuracy: Monolithic weighing system technology, robust, precise, reliable - for years! Benefits Four digital filter stages; with these the weighing scale can be adapted optimally to the environmental conditions at the installation location. Internal, motor-operated adjustment weight: Highest weighing scale precision by simple key press. Calibration and adjustment function isoCAL: It guarantees the constant high precision of the weighing scale through a regular, fully-automatic adjustment. Exceptional read-off, back-lit display with particularly large characters (16.5 mm). Simple operation; all keys with perceptible pressing point; clear operator panel. Functional wind protection; detachable side disks for precise dosing. Perfect purity. Large scale pan: For more convenient

Function and Applications Plug-in module for oxygen measurements.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 947

6 Additional material 6.3 Cobra3

Benefits: ▪ ▪

Neurosimulator

Simultaneous measurement of the oxygen concentration and the temperature using the oxygen/ temperature probe no.12105.01. If there is also a pressure measuring module or a conductivity measuring module these can be connected to a free sensor port for correcting the atmospheric pressure or the salt content.

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring ranges O2-concentration 0.30 mg/l O2-saturation 0.2% Temperature 0.5 °C Accuracy O2 2% of the measured value Temperature automatic compensation (0.5 °C) Atmospheric pressure correction: manual or automatic using the pressure module Salt content correction manual or automatic using the conductivity module Electrode in air saturated calibration water or in the air.

Measuring module,oxygen 12105-00 Oxygen/Temperature probe 12105-01 Software Cobra3, Oxygen 14505-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Measurement context: Neurophysiology

Biological amplifier

Function and applications The neurosimulator simulates a generalised nerve cell with an apical dendrite, a cell body and a nerve fibre. Neuro-simulator 65963-00 Neuro-simulator, power supply 65963-93 Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Software Cobra3 PowerGraph 14525-61

Further information You will find further information on the possibilities of computerassisted recording of neurophysiological data in the respective chapters.

Accessories

With the aid of this biological amplifier a wide range of electrophysiological experiments can be carried out on human beings (ECG, EMG, EEG, EOG, ENG) and animals. Biological amplifier 65961-93 Reflex hammer, triggering 65981-10 ECG electrodes, 3/pkg 65981-01 EMG electrodes, 3 off 65981-02 Electrode commoning cable 65981-03

excellence in science 948

Modulconverter COBRA3-mea.unit 12150-04 Converter USB - RS232, active 14602-10 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99

Data cable for cobra probes 12150-07 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Data cable USB, plug type A/B, 1.8 m 14608-00 USB 2.0 4 Port Hub, incl. Power supply 14612-00 Data cable, socket/socket, null modem, 9 pole 14603-00

6 Additional material 6.4 Power supply units

Power supply units 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4

Small to medium voltage power supply units Stabilised and regulated power supply units High-voltage power supply units Signal generators

950 952 955 956

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 949

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.1 Small to medium voltage power supply units

Multitap transformer, 14 VAC/ 12 VDC, 5 A

Variable transformer, 25 VAC/ 20 VDC, 12 A

Function and Applications Power supply unit for low voltage supplies DC and AC voltages in2 V steps. Equipment and technical data Galvanic isolation for all outputs, free-of-ground, Selection of voltage output via one side fixed 4 mm bridge plug, AC output: 2/4/6/8/10/ 12/14 V/5 A, DC output: 2/4/6/8/10/12/14 V/5 A, Max. current (short term): 10 A, Max. power: 80 VA, Fuses: 10 A , SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 230 V AC, DIMENSIONS (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 13533-93

Function and Application Standard heavy duty power supply unit for low voltage. Supplies unit for continuously adjustable DC and AC voltages & 2 frequently required fixed voltages Equipment and technical data AC output: 0...25 V/12 A, DC output: 0...20 V/12 A, Max. current (short term): 13 A, Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A, Max. current (short term): 10 A, Max. power: 375 VA, Fuses: one 13 A and two 10 A, supply voltage: 230 V AC, dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 234 13531-93

Power supply variable 15 VAC/ 12 VDC/ 5 A Variable transformer 25 VAC /20 VDC, with display

Function and Applications Standard heavy duty power supply unit for low voltage. Supplies unit for continuously adjustable DC and AC voltages & 2 frequently required fixed voltages Equipment and technical data AC output: 0...15 V/5 A, DC output: 0...12 V/5 A, Max. current (short term): 10 A, Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A, Max. current (short term): 10 A, Max. power: 150 VA, Fuses: one 6 A and two 10 A, Supply voltage: 230 V AC, dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 13530-93

Function and Applications Standard heavy duty power supply unit for low voltage. Supplies continously adjustable DC and AC voltages & 2 frequently requiredfixed voltages. Equipment and technical data AC output: 0...25 V/12 A, DC output: 0...20 V/12 A, Max. current (short term): 13 A, Add. fixed voltages: 6 V AC/6 A12 V AC/6 A, Max. current (short term): 10 A, Max. power: 375 VA, Fuses: one 13 A and two 10 A , Displays: 2 analogue meters for current voltage, supply voltage: 230 V AC, dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 234

13532-93

excellence in science 950

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.1 Small to medium voltage power supply units

Variable transformer 36 VAC/ 30 VDC, 18 A

Function and Applications Supplies a continuously adjustable DC and alternating current; with two ironvane instruments for voltage and current, switch between DC and alternating voltage; start-up current attenuation. Equipment and technical data Galvanically isolated from the mains and non-grounded; protected also with an over current circuit-breaker. U, Imax (continuous), 0.36 V~, 18 A, 0.30 V-, 18 A, U, Imax (short term) 30 V-/36 V~, 20 A, Protection devices (secondary, automatic) 1 Circuit breaker, Power input 750 VA, Mains voltage 230 V~/50.60 Hz, Housing dimensions (mm) 370×235×234 13537-93

Transformer 3 phase 3-23/40V,3A

Variable transformer/ display 250/ 230 VAC/ DC

Function and Applications Heavy duty variable transformer with particularly high load capacity. Equipment and technical data Outputs galvanically isolated from the mains and non-grounded; overload and short circuit protected through overload safety switch (circuit breaker); protection class 2 (protective insulation, VDE 0550); startup current attenuation avoids circuit breaker tripping when switched on; DC and alternating current is continuously variable. 2 iron vane instruments for exact display (effective value) of output voltage and current.-output: 0-250 V~/ 6 A; 4-mm-safetyplugs; parallel 2 pole plug; 0.230 V-/ 6A; bridge rectifier-protection: through overload safetyswitch (circuit breaker)-start up current attenuation: start up sequence max. 3/min for mains voltages, voltages with Bor L- characteristic fuses-mains voltage: 230 V~/50.60 Hz-power consumption: 1500 VA-housing dimensions: 370×236×234 mm 13535-93

Lamp transformer, 220 V - 6-12V AC/ 90 VA

Function and Applications Low-voltage three-phase transformer for star and delta circuits. Equipment and technical data Switchable output voltages: 10/17 V~ (3-phase) and 23/40 V~ /max. 3 A, Star point withstands full loading, 3 x 3-A automatic circuit breakers, Floating outputs, 4-mm safety sockets, Mains switch and indicator lamp, Mains lead with Cekon three-phase earthed plug, Mains connection (three phase): 230/400 V, Impact-resistant, stackable plastic case with carrying handle and stand, Dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 13665-96

Function and Applications Safety transformer,primary & secondary windings separated spatially & electrically. Equipment and technical data Output voltage available on 4 mm plugsecurity sockets.Output: 6 V AC / 5 APower supply voltage: 230 V ACCasing dimensions (mm):70 x 85 x 60 07473-93

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 951

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.2 Stabilised and regulated power supply units

Power supply, 5V/ 1A, +/-15 V

Power supply, universal

Function and Applications 3 DC voltage outputs; useful for electronic experiments.

Function and Applications

Equipment and technical data

Versatile heavy duty power supply which can also be used as a constant current supply in schools, laboratories or workshops.

Output voltage ± 15 V/ 0.2 A; 5 V/ 1.0 A; 4-mm safety plugs; residual ripple < 5 mV; power consumption approx. 35 VA; mains voltage 230 V/ 50.60 Hz; housing dimensions 194 × 140 × 130 mm. 13502-93

Power supply 0...12 V DC / 6 V, 12 V AC, 230 Volt

Equipment and technical data Direct current source: Stabilised, regulated output direct voltage, continuously adjustable from 0...18 V, Adjustable current limit between 0...5 A, LED display for constant current operationn, Permantely short-circuit proof &protected against exterior voltages, Alternative voltage output:, Multitap transformer 2...15V, outputs galvanically separated from mains grid, Full load capacity (5A), even if direct current is supplied simultaneously, Short-circuit protection through overcurrent circuit breaker, All output voltages available at 4 mm safety plug sockets. 13500-93

Power supply, universal, analog display

Function and Applications High quality power supply specially suitable for student experiments in electricity and electronics as well as for demonstration. Equipment and technical data Stabilised, Shortcircuit proof , Output voltage: 1...12 V DC 6 VAC, 12 VA, Crated current: 2 A/ 5 A, Ripple: approx. 1 MV, Resistance: 1 mOhm, Mains voltage: 230 V, Housing dimensions: 194 x 140 x 130 mm

Function and Applications Same as 13500-93. Equipment and technical data

13505-93

Additionally along with an analog display instrument with measuring ranges of 0.18 V and 0-5 A and a commutating switch for voltage/current measurement. 13501-93

excellence in science 952

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.2 Stabilised and regulated power supply units

Power supply -2op-, 2x15V/2A

Function and Applications Specially suited for electronics experiments. Equipment and technical data Output voltage 2x0...15Vnominal current 2A / 1Acurrent regulation 0...2Ainternal resistance <= 10mOhmmains voltage 230V / 50...60Hzpower consumption 170 VAhousing dimensions 230x236x168mm 13520-93

Power supply 0-30VDC/20A,stabil

Power supply, 0...600 VDC

Function and Applications Power supply with 5 output voltages especially designed for experiments with tubes, fine beams and conducting the Frank-Hertz experiment. Benefits Electronically stabilised DC voltages, short-circuit protected, galvanically isolated from one another so that they can be possible to connected in series, featuring LED current-limiting indicator and protection against polarity reversal, AC voltage with automatic circuit breaker, All outputs are floating and isolated from the mains and use 4-mm safety sockets. Equipment and technical data Output 1: 0...12 V-/0.5 A, Stability: < 0.1 %, Residual ripple: < 5 mV, Output 2: 0...50 V-/50 mA, Stability: < 0.01 %, Residual ripple: < 5 mV, Outputs 3/4: 300 V-/0...300 V-/50 mA, Stability: < 0.01 %, Residual ripple: < 20 mV, Output 5: 6.3 V~/2 A, Power consumption: 100 VA approx., Mains voltage: 230 V~, Impact-resistant, stackable plastic case with carrying handle and stand, Dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 13672-93

Power supply 12V AC/500 mA

Function and Applications Heavy duty power supply with stabilised output voltage, low residual ripple and with constant current operation. Equipment and technical data Two moving coil instruments for simultaneous display of voltage and current. LED display of constant voltage and current operation. Output voltage: 0...30 VDC Nominal current: 0.2...20 A Residual ripples: 30 mV Required power: 900 V AInterior resistance: 40 mOhm Output is earth and mains-free, 4mm safety bushes. Power supply voltage: 230 V Impact resistant, stackable plastic housing with carrying handle and fold-away stand. Dimensions: 370 x 236 x 234 mm 13536-93

Function and Applications Power supply for AC output voltage with output safety plug, to be use for e.g. electrometer amplifier 13621-00. Equipment and technical data Output: 12 V AC/500 mA Supply voltage: 230 V AC Dimensions [mm]: 70 x 50 x 40Mass: 500 g 11074-93

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 953

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.2 Stabilised and regulated power supply units

Pow.suppl.3/4,5/6/7,5/9/12V 0.25A

Power supply 5 V DC/2.4 A with 4 mm plugs

Function and Applications Short circuit proof plug-in powersupply unit. Equipment and technical data Function and Applications Plug-in power supply for powering small appliances. Equipment and technical data 6-position sliding switch for selecting various output voltages, Fixed output lead with end socket to accommodate 7 different adapter plugs with polarity labelling, Output: 3 / 4.5 / 6 / 7,5 / 9 / 12 V DC, 250 mA, Mains voltage: 230 V~

With built-in 1.3 m connection cord and 4 mm plugs. Output: 5 V DC / 2.4 AInput voltage: 110...230 V AC 11076-99

Power supply 12V / 2A

11078-93

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A withDC-socket 2.1 mm

Function and Applications Small switching power supply with safetey class 2. Benefits Stabilised output voltage and short circuit resistant., Including power supply cable., Recommended for use with Cobra3. Function and Applications

Equipment and technical data

Power supply 5 VDC/2.4 A withDC-socket

Supply voltage: 100...230 V AC, Supply frequency: 50...60 Hz

Equipment and technical data Power supply with plug and 1.3 m line cable and 2 m cable on secondary output side., Output side: DC-socket 2.1 mm, Input voltage: 100...260 V AC, Frequency: 50...60 Hz, Output voltage: 5 V DC, Output current: 2.4 A, Output plug:Outer diameter: 5 mm and Inner diameter: 2.1 mm, Dimensions (mm): 40 Ă&#x2014; 41 Ă&#x2014; 120 mm, Weight: 345 g 13900-99

excellence in science 954

12151-99

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.3 High-voltage power supply units

High voltage supply unit, 0-10 kV

▪

Special safety sockets protect the user from unwanted spark discharges.

Equipment and technical data ▪

Continuously adjustable DC voltage of 0.25 kV

13671-93

Function and Applications For electrostatic experiments and for operation of spectral and gas discharge tubes. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13670-93

Power supply, high voltage, 0-25 kV

Function and Applications High voltage source, particularly suited for electrostatic experiments requiring a very high and exactly adjustable DC voltage. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

While operating gas discharge tubes, the drop voltage is to be checked at the integrated digital display, which should not rise above 5 kV for protection against radiation. Voltage stabilised through electronicregulation Demonstrative voltage display on at three digit LED-display Earthing socket allows the positive or the negative outputs to be grounded Gas discharge tubes can be operated without protective resistor

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 955

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.4 Signal generators

Power frequency generator, 10 Hz - 1 MHz

Function generator, 0.1 Hz - 100 KHz

Function and Applications Sinus and rectangular signal generator with signal and power output for optimal adaptation to different experimental circuits. Benfits Large frequency range, frequencies can be continuously adjusted to five decade areas, Output for sinus and regtangular signals, Power output for sinus Equipment and technical data Demonstative frequency display with 4 digit LED display, Supplementary headphone and loudspeaker connector jack Signal output: Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 6 V, Power: 1 W, Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm, Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.2%)

Function and Applications Versatile sine wave, triangle wave and square wave signal generator for student experiments, practical work and demonstration. Short circuit proof output. Constant output amplitude over the complete frequency range. Strong power output enables direct connection to a loudspeaker Equipment and technical data Frequency range: 0.1 Hz...100 kHz, Signal shape: Sine, triangle and square, Signal output: 20 V (open), 10 V Ra = 50 Ohm, Output power: approx. 0.25 W, Nominal terminal resistance: 50 Ohm, Distortion factor (typical): < 1 %, Power consumption: max. 5 VA, Mains voltage: 230 V/ 50...60 Hz, Housing dimensions (mm): 194 Ă&#x2014; 140 Ă&#x2014; 130

Power output: Max. output voltage Upp: approx. 18 V, Power: 10 W, Nominal final resistor: 4 Ohm, Distortion factor: < 1% (typically < 0.3%) Input: Input voltage range: Up = 0...1V, Electric strength: Up < 30V, Input resistance: 50 kOhm, Required power: max. 70 VA, Dimensions (mm): 370 x 236 x 168

13652-93

Sine wave generator, 10 Hz - 20 KHz

13650-93

Function and Applications For generation of sine wave signals for audiometry und acoustics. Benefits Connection for head phone (jacksocket) and loud speaker (4 mm output sockets), 4-digit digital display, Cut-off switch for the headphone Equipment and technical data 3 Frequency ranges: 10...200 Hz100...2000 Hz1...20 kHz, Max. output voltage:0...6 V for 4 Ohm0...10 V for > 20 Ohm, Output power: 1 W for 4 Ohm, Distortion factor (typical):< 1% for 1 kHz, Supply voltage:230 V AC/50...60 Hz 65960-93

excellence in science 956

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.4 Signal generators

Digital Function Generator, USB

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13654-99

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 957

6.4 Power supply units 6.4.4 Signal generators

excellence in science 958

6 Additional material 6.5 Measurement instruments

Measurement instruments 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 6.5.9 6.5.10 6.5.11 6.5.12

Hand-held measuring instruments - electricity Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity Oscilloscopes, recorders Measuring amplifiers Time measuring instruments, counters Meteorological instruments Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers pH and conductivity measuring instruments Oxygen, lux and pressure measuring instruments Radioactivity, sound level and gas measuring instruments Photometers, spectroscopes, polarimeters, refractometers General - measurement instruments

960 963 967 968 970 973 974 981 987 989 991 994

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 959

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.1 Hand-held measuring instruments - electricity

Digital multimeter for pupils, AmpSafe, electronic overload protection

▪ ▪ ▪

Peak-Hold Auto power off Safety: IEC-1010-1; CAT II 1000 V

Accessories included ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

holster carrying case test leads typ-K- thermocouple probe battery and manual

07128-00

DMM with NiCr-Ni thermo couple Function and Applications Multimeter for measurement of voltages, current and resistance. Benefits Protected by an electronic relay this multimeter is completely overload protected., Ergonomically designed for pupils use, safe, with integrated shockabsorbing frame, Measurement of AC/DC voltage and current, resistance and contactless AC voltage detection via LED., Auto Power off.Built in pocket lamp (LED)., Overload protected by relay neverreplace a fuse again! Equipment and technical data Measurement ranges:, DC voltage: 0...600 V, AC voltage: 0...600 V~, DC current: 0...200 mA, AC current: 0...200 mA~, Resistance: 0...20 MOhm, Supply voltage:2 × 1,5 V AAA batteries, Dimensions H × W × D (mm):120 × 55 × 40, Mass: 160 g, 4 mm safety sockets- 12 mm , 3 1/2-digit LCD with maximum display, value: 2000- Autorange , DataHold function, Compliant to safety rules: IEC-1010-1, CAT III 1000 V Accessories included 2 × batteries AAA, 1 pair test probes, manual

Function and Applications Hand-held instrument for measurement of voltages, currents, resistances,capacitance, frequency and temperature; Benefits with continuity check function and diode test, auto power off,display illumination and measurement value hold function. Equipment and technical data

07127-00

Digital multimeter 2010

Overload protection by diodes and fine fuses for 0.2 A and 20 A., Plastic housing with rubber frame and 4 mm safety sockets., Thermocouple socket type K., 3 1/2-digit LC-display: 38 mm, Voltage:0...0.2/ 2/20/200/1000 V DC0...2/20/200/700 V AC, Current AC/DC: 0...0.2/2/ 20/200 mA0...20 A, Resistance: 0...200 Ohm0...2/20/200 kOhm/2/20 MOhm, Temperature: -20...760°C, Frequency: 0...20 kHz, Impedance: 10 MOhm, Dimensions (mm): 92 × 195 × 38, Mass: 380 g, Including test leads, 9 V batteryblock, NiCr-Ni thermocouple type K and manual. 07122-00

DMM, auto range, NiCr-Ni thermocouple

Function and Applications 3 ½ digit Steady performance digital-multimeter. Benefits ▪ ▪

provides an overload protection and the functions of measuring like DCV,ACV, DCA, ACA, resistance, capacitance,frequency, diode, continuity test with buzzer and temperature; ideal for the education- and service-fields.

Equipment and techical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

3 ½-dgt. LCD display, 28 mm, with backlight manual range selection low battery indicationh FE-Test

excellence in science 960

Function and Applications

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.1 Hand-held measuring instruments - electricity

Hand-held instrument for measurement of voltages, currents, resistances, capacitance, frequency and temperature with autorange. Benefits With continuity check function and diode test, auto power off, display illumination,°C/°F selection, battery tester, high current adapter and measurement value hold function. Overload protection by diodes and fine fuses for 0.4 A and 20 A. Equipment and technical data Plastic housing with rubber frame and 4 mm safety sockets. Thermo couple socket type K.3 3/4-digit LC-display: 38 mm Voltage:0...0.4/ 4/40/400/1000 V DC0...4/40/400/700 V AC Current AC/DC: 0...0.4/4/40/ 400 mA0...4/20 A With high current adaptor:0...400 A AC/DC Resistance: 0...400 Ohm0...4/40/400 kOhm/4/40 MOhm Capacitance:0...40/ 400 nF/4/40/100 µF Temperature: -20...760°C Frequency:0...5/50/500 Hz/5/50/500/5000 kHz Impedance: 10 MOhm Dimensions (mm): 92 × 195 × 38 Mass: 380 g Including test leads, 9 V battery block, NiCr-Ni thermo couple type K and manual.

testPeak detectDATA-, MAX-, MIN-HOLDRelative functionAuto and manual range selectionAuto power off and low batteryindicationSaftey: EN 61010-1/EK-1, CAT III 1000V/CAT IV 600VAccessories: test leads, carrying case,USB-interface cable, software forWindows98/ 2000/NTXP/VISTA/Win7 32bit/64bit,batteries and manualDCV 220 mV/ 2,2/22/220/1000 V; 0,1 mV; +/- 0,05 % + 3 dgt.ACV 220 mV/2,2/22/ 220/700 V; 0,1 mV; +/0,8 % + 4 dgt. / Frequency range: 40... 400 HzDCA 220/2200 µA/22/220 mA/10 A; 0,01 µA;+/- 0,8 % + 4 dgt.ACA 220/2200 µA/22/220 mA/10 A; 0,01 µA;+/- 1,0 % + 3 dgt. / Frequency range:40 ... 400 HzOhm 200 Ohm/2,2/22/220 kOhm/2,2/22/220MOhm; 0,01 Ohm; +/- 0,8 % + 2 dgt.Cap. 22/220nF/2,2/22/220µF/2,2/22/ 220nF;1nF; +/- 2,5 % + 3 dgt.Freq. 22/220 Hz/2,2/22/220 kHz; 0,01 Hz;+/- 0,2 % + 3 dgt.Operating voltage 4 x 1,5 V (AA) Batt. Dimensions (WxHxD) 102 x 205 x 58 mm. Weight 390 g 07121-01

Voltmeter 5/ 15 V DC

07123-00

DMM with USB interface, auto range

Voltmeter 5/15 V DC, moving coil instrument,. Two ranges: 0 - 5 V DC, 0 - 15 V DC, class: 1.5. Scale length: 78 mm.

Function and Applications New constructed and GS-approved high class digital multimeter with 4 1/2digit multifunciton display (max.22000), 46-segment analogue bargraph and integrated USB-interface for easy connection with computer to realize macro recording, monitoring and capture of transient dyncamic data. Full input protection, backlight, and easy operating for choosing several measurement functions with the help of the clear view push button section. The True RMS AC voltage and current readings are other most important features of this new constructed multimeter. Equipment and technical data 21 mm, 4 1/2-digit LCD-display,backlight and 46-segement bargraph; max.display: 22000True RMS measurement for ACV and ACAUSB 2.0interface to transmit measuringdata to the PCDiode-, continuity-

Voltmeter 5/15 V DC 07037-00 Ammeter 1/5 A DC 07038-00 Voltmeter,0.3-300VDC,10-300VAC / 07035-00 Ammeter 1mA...3 A 07036-00 Galvanometer -3.5...0...3.5mil-A 07039-00 Multi-range meter, centre zero 07027-01 Multi-range meter/overl.prot.B 07026-00 Protect.sleeve f.meter, h 55mm 07026-01 Multi-range meter w.overl.prot. 07021-01

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 961

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.1 Hand-held measuring instruments - electricity

Multi-range meter, analogue

Function and Applications Moving coil instrument for measuring direct or alternating voltage or current, and also for measuring resistance. Low resistance current measurement ranges through current converter. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Overload protected by fuses Voltage: 100 mV...300 V~/ 10 V...300 V~ Current: 50 µA...3 A~/ 3 mA...10 A~ Resistance: 1 Ohm...500 kOhm Internal resistance: 20/ 6.7 kOhm/V~ (DC/ AC) Ohm/V~ Accuracy class: 2.5 Overload protection: with fuses and diodes Dimensions: 100 × 140 × 35 mm

Multi-range meter, analogue 07028-01 Multirange meter,zero left/centre 07041-00

excellence in science 962

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.2 Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity

Multimeter ADM1

Multimeter ADM2, demo., analoque

Function and Applications Electronic analogue multimeter for measuring direct and alternating voltage and current, and for measuring resistance. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Switchable, overload protected moving coil instrument for measuring direct and alternating voltage and current. Passive instrument. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Equipement and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Accuracy Class 1.5 for DC, Class 2.5 for AC. Frequency range 10 Hz...10 kHz. Overload Voltage measuring ranges min. 230 V. Current measuring ranges: 1 A in measuring ranges to 0.3 A, 15 A in measuring ranges to 10 A. Dimensions (mm): 320 × 130 × 385 Weight approx. 5 kg

Multimeter ADM1, demo., analog 13810-00 Current transformer/Clamp Ammeter adaptor 07091-10 Fuse f 10 G, pkg of 10 07503-01 Fuse F 0.63H, pkg. of 10 07503-60 Battery cell 1.5 V, Mono, R20/UM-1, type D 07922-10 Fuse F 0.63H, pkg. of 10 07503-60 Fuse f 10 G, pkg of 10 07503-01 Current transformer/Clamp Ammeter adaptor 07091-10 Probe 10/1, cable length 1500 mm 17044-00 High voltage probe 40 kV, 1000:1 07029-20

▪ ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

13820-00

Moving coil instrument

Function and Applications Moving coil instrument for interchangeable range multipliers. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Plastic case with 4 mm sockets Case dim. approx. 260 x 105 x 290mm Overload protection by builtin protective devices

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 963

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.2 Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity

▪ ▪ ▪

Zero correction and setting of the pointer to scale center by setting wheel on the underside Scale length 187 mm readable from both rear- and front-side.

Electrostatic voltmeter, 7.5kV

11100-00

Accessories for moving coil instrument Range multiplier + 300 deg.C 11106-05 Range multiplier, 1 V DC 11104-31 Range multiplier, 1-0-1 mA DC 11102-71 Range multiplier, 10 mA DC 11102-11 Range multiplier, 10 V AC 11105-41 Range multiplier, 10 V DC 11104-41 Range multiplier, 100 mA DC 11102-21 Range multiplier, 100 mV DC 11104-21 Range multiplier, 100 micro-A DC 11102-81 Current transformer/Clamp Ammeter adaptor 07091-10 [deleted] Range multiplier, 3 V AC 11105-33 Range multiplier, 3 V DC 11104-33 Range multiplier, 30 V AC 11105-43 Range multiplier, 30 V DC 11104-43 Range multiplier, 300 mA DC 11102-23 Range multiplier, 300 V AC 11105-53 Range multiplier,30 mic.V-10 mV 11110-01 Range multiplier, 300 mV DC 11104-23 Probe 10/1, cable length 1500 mm 17044-00 Fuse F 0.63H, pkg. of 10 07503-60 Storage rack f. range multipliers 11101-01 Fuse f 10 G, pkg of 10 07503-01 Instrument fuse F 2 H, pkg.of 10 07503-02

Function and Applications For wattless measurement of direct and alternating voltages in the range1...7.5 kV, or 3...26 kV and 3...18- kV~ (eff.) Benefits ▪ ▪

For measuring charge in combination with a Faraday cup. Electrostatic measuring system, shielded against exterior electricfields.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Practically load-free measurements from 1 kV to 26 kV, because of the high input resistance > 1014. Insulation resistance of the ceramic high voltage socket > 1014 . The Plexiglas cover on the back allows a view of the system Integrated sphere spark gap The measured value can also be read from the back

11150-00

Electrostatic voltmeter, 26 kV

Function and Applications For powerless measurement of direct and alternating voltages in the range of 1...7.5 kV AC/ DC or 3...26 kV DC and 3...18 kV AC (eff.). To measure charges in combination with a Faraday cup. Accuracy class: 1.5. Limit frequency: 100 kHz...1 MHz (for 1...3.5 kV). Response voltage of sphere gap:12 kV (crest value). Capacity: approx. 30 pF. Length of scale: 187 mm. Zero adjustment: with knurled screw. Dimensions: 260 x 100 x 350 mm. Electrostatic voltmeter, 26 kV 11151-00

excellence in science 964

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.2 Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity

Connecting cord, 30 kV, 1000 mm 07367-00 Connecting cord, 30 kV, 500 mm 07366-00 Faraday pail 06231-00

Demomultimeter, p, pH, T, U, I, R, f, RS232, 230 V

Work and power meter Function and Applications Modern multi-purpose device for measuring of voltage, current, resistance, frequency, temperature, pressure and pH. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

45 mm LED-display LED-matrix for display of the units Serial port for connecting PC Auto-range function

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications For AC and DC circuits Equipment and technical data Two 4-digit, 20 mm LED-displays, Display 1 for real and apparent power,current, voltage, phase difference and freqency, Display 2 for energy and time, Selector for serial display of all units, LED-Statusdisplay and automactic range selection, Power: max. 2400 W, Resolution: max. 0.001 W, Voltage: 0-30V AC/DC, 0-240, Veff- Current: 0...10A AC/DC, Phasen difference: 0...+/- 90 degree, Frequency: 0...10000 Hz, Energy: max. 9999 Wh or Ws, Resolution: max. 0.001 Ws, Analog output for all units of disp. 1, Mains: 110/230V, 50/60Hz, Shock-resistant plastic housing with carry handle and base 13715-93

Teslameter, digital

Voltage: ▪ ▪

4 ranges: 0 mV - 500V AC/ DC Resolution: 0.1 mV/ 10 mV/ 100 mV/ 1 V

Current: ▪ ▪

3 ranges: 0 mA - 10 A Resolution: 0.1 mA/ 10 mA/ 100 mA

Resistance: ▪ ▪

5 ranges: 0 Ohm - 10 MOhm Resolution (Ohm): 1/ 10/ 100/ 1000 /100.000

Frequency: ▪ ▪

4 ranges: 1 Hz - 100 kHz Resolution: 1 Hz/ 10 Hz/ 100 Hz

Temperature: ▪ ▪

2 ranges 200°C - 1370°C Resolution: 0.1°C/1°C

pH- Resolution: ▪ ▪

1 range: 0 - 14 pH Resolution: 0.01

pH- Pressure: ▪ ▪

2 ranges: 0 - 7000 hPa Resolution: 0.1 hPa/ 1 hPa

Dimensions (mm): 288 x 165 x 235

Function and Applications For the measurement of magnetic DC and AC fields. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Teslameter with 3 1/2 digit LED display, 20 mm high 3 measuring ranges: 20 - 200 - 1000 mT fsd Sensitivity: 10 µT For alternating and direct fields Calibrated analogue output

Teslameter, digital 13610-93 Hall probe, axial 13610-01 Hall probe, tangential, protection cap 13610-02

Demomultimeter p, pH, T, U, I, R; RS 232, 230 V 13721-93 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 pH-electrode,plastic body,gel,BNC 46266-10 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 965

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.2 Demonstration measurement instruments - electricity

Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Software Demomultimeter 14409-61 Pressure sensor, absolute press. 07136-01 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Pressure sensor 2, 500-7000 hPa 07136-02

Electric field meter

Large-scale display, digital, RS-232 port

Function and Applications For measurement of static electric fields without losses and with the correct sign as well as for electrostatic measurement of voltages in those cases in which normal static voltmeters are not sensitive enough. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Special four-digit large-format display for presenting the measurement data supplied by the new Cobra4 Mobile-Link with Cobra4 Display-Connect, the Cobra3 Com-Unit, the PHYWE hand-held measuring instruments and Sartorius or Scaltec balances equipped with data interfaces. Benefits Fit for the future: The large-format display can be updated and adapted to other measuring instruments which are not available on the market yet. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4-digit digital display with a digit height of 56 mm Matrix display (15 × 14) pixels for presenting the units Serial interface (RS 232) for connecting a measuring instrument. Second connector for the simultaneous presentation of another measuring quantity. Threaded connectors for connecting support stands or a clamp (to attach the display to various experimental setups).

07157-93

excellence in science 966

▪ ▪

Measuring ranges: 1/ 10/ 100 kV/m, 10/ 100/ 1000 V Steel sheet casing on a rod Push-button key for measuring range selection Rotating knob for electric zero adjustment two pair of 4 mm sockets to connect power supply and measuring instrument Gold plated measuring head with gold plated winged wheel Voltage measuring attachment gold plated with two 4 mm sockets to connect voltage which is to be measured. Power supply: 14...18 VDC (e.g. from universal power supply 13500-93). Data output (9-pin Sub-D jack) for connection to the serial interface (RS 232) of a computer via the special cable supplied. Dimensions (mm): 70 x 70 x 150 Accessory (not included): Software Electric Field Meter (14406-61)

Electric field meter 11500-10 Meas.slit x10 f.elec.field meter 11500-03 Software f. electrofieldmeter 14406-61

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.3 Oscilloscopes, recorders

Oscilloscope, 50 MHz, 2 channels

Jitterfree, superb trigger sensitivity, Internal compensation circuit for lowdrift, With calibrator output for testing the transmission quality from probe to monitor Equipment and technical data Band width (-3dB): DC 10 Hz to 30 MHz, Modes: CH 1/2, ADD, DUAL, CHOP, ALT, Input impedance: 1 MOhm // 30 pF, Input voltage: 400 V DC or ACpp, Accuracy: ± 3 % (± 5 % at x 5 MAG), Mains voltage: 115/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz manual, , spare fuse,, Powercord,, 2 probes 11459-95

Function and Applications Oscilloscope for the measurement & storage off a st periodical & non periodical voltage signals.

25 MHz Digital storage oscilloscope with colour display, 2 x BNC cables l =75 cm incl. 11456-99

Equipment and technical data Oparation modes:Ch1,Ch2;altern.,chop,xy,sum,diff.invert.Ch2. Vertic. deflect.(analog/digital) Band width 2xDC...50 MHz, Deflect.(1mV-20V)/cm,14-calibr.Positions & variable. Horizont. deflect.(analog/digit.)

Probe 10/1, cable length 1500 mm 17044-00 High voltage probe 40 kV, 1000:1 07029-20

Time base (50ns-0,5s)/cm,22-calibr.positions & variable,delay,x-extension & hold-off-time., Trigger (analog/digital)Ch1,Ch2;altern.,mains or external,, with LED-display., Coupling ACDC-HF-LF Digital storage: Refresh, Roll,Single, XY,Envelope, Average, Random-Sampl., Dot-jointfunction, Post-pre-trigger Storage/CH 2kx8 Bit. Handling/Display : Auto Set, , Save & Recall, Readout, Frequ.measurem., Component tester, Cursor measurement(analog/digit.) Delta(U,t,1/ t),Gain,Rise,Time,Ratio X&Y,, Phase angle (only digit.): Pulse count, search, Peak-Peak, avm, rms., Scaled Screen (8x10)cm, Accelaration voltage 2 kV, Connect. (100-240)V;50/60Hz;42 W, Mass 6 kg, Dimensions (285 x 125 x 380) mm 11458-99

Oscilloscope, 150 MHz, 2 channels, RS-232 11452-99

Oscilloscope, 30 MHz, 2 channels

Function and Applications Oscilloscope in modern design and technology, especially destined for education and laboratory. Benefits

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 967

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.4 Measuring amplifiers

Universal measuring amplifier

Measurement range: 0.1 mV...10 V in 6 decade ranges, Input resistance: 10 gOhm Charge measurement Measurement range: 0.1 nAs...0.001 mAs in 5 decade ranges, Accuracy: 3%, Input: BNC socket, Overload protection: 250 V, Power supply: 230 V, Housing dimensions: 230 x 236 x 168 mm, Modern plastic housing, impact resistant, with retractable carrying handle and stand 13620-93

LF amplifier, 220 V

Function and Applications Universal measuring amplifier for amplification of AC and DC voltages. Suitable for practical exercises. Equipment and technical data input impedance: electrometer: > 10 (13) Ohm low drift: 10 kOhm input voltage: -10 to + 10 V, output voltage: -10 to + 10 V frequency ranges: V=1 0...100 kHz, V=10 0... 75 kHz, V=10(2) 0... 10 kHz, V=10(3) 0... 6 kHz, V=10(4) 0...2.5 kHz, V=10(5) 0... 2 kHz, mains voltage: 230 V AC, dimensions: 194 x 140 x 126 mm 13626-93

DC measuring amplifier

Effective value output for display of the effective value of the signal output voltage. , Power amplifier 12.5 W for weak acoustic frequency signals to control low resistance loudspeakers., For signals from frequency generators or computer interfaces., Amplification is continuously adjustable. Equipment and technical data Ampl. factor: 0.1...10000, continuously adjustable, Input impedance: 50 kOhm/ AC, 100 kOhm/ D, Input voltage: -10 V...+10 V, Frequency range: 3.5 Hz....200 kHz,, Accuracy of amplification factor: < 5% amplification factor, Output voltage: 10 Veff, Nominal final res.: 8 Ohm signal output, 1 kOhm RMS output, Load capacity: Permanently shortcircuit proof, Offset: Voltage compensation with potentiometer, Mains supply 230 V AC/ 50...60 Hz, Casing dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 13625-93

Function and Applications Versatile measuring amplifier for measurement of very small direct currents, electrical charges and for quasi-static measurements of DC voltages.

Difference amplifier

Equipment and technical data 8 current measurement ranges with very low voltage drop, 6 voltage measurement ranges with extremely high input resistance, 5 charge measurement ranges, Analogue output for connection of demonstration measurement instruments/ pen recorders, button for reversing output voltage, Selection of measurement modes using push-button, Diode indicators for active measurement range, Zero point adjustment, discharge button, range selection buttons Current measurement Measurement range: 0.01 nA...0.1 mA in 8 decade ranges, Voltage drop: 1 mV Voltage measurement

excellence in science 968

Function and Applications

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.4 Measuring amplifiers

For the simultaneous potential-free measurement of two voltages when connected to the inputs of a two channel oscilloscope.

Power supply 12V AC/500 mA

Benefits The high resistance difference inputs can be connected to any point of a circuit, without influencing the electrical behaviour of the circuit. , Allows demonstration of the phase shift between voltage and current in alternating current circuits., Enables characteristics to be presented in the xy operation mode of an oscilloscope., Input voltages can be added. Equipment and technical data amplification 1 ± 3%, frequency range for UE 20 Vss 0. 15 kHz, for UE 6 Vss 0.70 kHz, for UE 2 Vss 0.100 kHz, inputs A and B: connection 4-mm-pair of sockets, impedance 1 M_/10 pF, overload capacity mains voltage proof, outputs A and B: connection BNC-sockets; , internal resistance 100 Ohm, external resistance 10 kOhm, overload capacity short-circuit proof, mains supply 230 V, 50.60Hz, casing dimensions (mm) 190×110×60 11444-93

Electrometer Amplifier

Function and Applications Operational amplifier with high resistance input for quasi-static voltage measurement respectively charge measurement in fail-safeplastic housing. Benefits Suited for experiments with electrostaticse.g. charge measurement, capacity measurement of sphere-capacitor, measurement of direct voltages,quasistatic measurements and measurement of small currents. Equipment and technical data Power supply via 4 mm sockets or wall power supply with hole socket., Operation temperature: 5...40°C, Relative humidity: < 80%, Gain/ amplification: 1.0, Input resistance: > 10000 GOhm, Input current: < 0.5 pA, Input capacitance: < 50 pF, Input voltage:, Amplifier (socket 1): ± 10 V-, 2. input (socket 2): 1 kV , Power supply: 12 V AC/25 mA hole socket: 2.1/5.5 mm or, External power source: 12 V AC25 mA 4 mm sockets, or: Cobra3 interface: ± 15 V RS232 socket, Output voltage: ± 10 V, Output current: 1 mA, Output resistance: < 500 Ohm, Dimensions H × W × D (mm):65 × 113 × 35, Mass: 150 g 13621-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 969

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.5 Time measuring instruments, counters

Timer 2-1 ▪ ▪ ▪

▪

Function and Applications The chronometer Timer 2-1 has a 4-digit digital display and has been specially designed for use in student experiments and demonstrative teacher experiments. Benefits The starting and stopping of the built-in timer piece, as well as counting, is effected by the opening and closing of electrical circuits, across light barriers or other TTL signal sources., Many and various experimental requirements can be fullfilled with the 4 different operating modes that the Timer 2-1 makes available for track experiments, for the measurement of the time, of revolution, of a turning movement, for the direct measurement of the period of a full swing, of a mechanical pendulum and for the counting of events Equipment and technicla data (typical for 25°C) Operating temperature range: 5...40°C, Relative humidity: < 80% Control: (Start/ Stop) by electricalcircuits (contact closure/ contact opening or level ACC to TTL-Norm), Digital display: 4-Digit LED display, digit height 19 mm, Time measurement: Measuring range 0.000...9.999 s, resolution 1 ms, Pulse counting:Measurement range 0...9999 pulses, Limiting frequency 1 kHz,, shading period > 500 µs, Operating voltage: (Stabilized) 5 V ± 5 %, (suitable power supply 5 VDC/ 2.4 A, 13900-99, standardly supplied), Power consumption: 1.8 VA, Supply connector: connecting socket for hollow plug, diam. 2.1 mm at the back of the instrument, 5 VDC/ 350 mA, Overvoltage and reverse polarity protection: up to max. 12 V, Housing dimensions (mm): 190 × 130 × 140 (W, H, D), Weight: approx. 920 g 13607-99

Universal Counter

▪

▪ ▪

al specifics of how it specifically arise from the requirements of science teaching practice. For the scientifically correct representation of each measurement is shown in principle with the associated unit. With the overflow of the display is automatically switched into the next area. Before the measurement starts it can be manually adjusted to a maximum of 6 decades defined range, eg to suppress is not physically meaningful digits on the display. A special jack for direct connection of a GM counter tube is available for radioactivity experiments. The required voltage can be changed manually to determine the characteristics of a counter tubes to. The stopwatch function can be entered by means of electrical contacts, sensors, or manually in the various types of triggers for the precise starting and stopping for time measurement. The measured values are represented by six red 20mm highcontrast 7-segment displays. An additional three-digit display is used to display the unit (ms, s, Hz, kHz, MHz, I / s, RPM, Imp, V, m / s). The various operating states are indicated by LEDs. Range switching in all modes manually (before measurement) and automatically when an overflow.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Operating temperature range 5th .. 40 ° C Relative humidity <80% Digital display: Measurement reading LED 6-digit, 7-segment, 20 mm Units LED 3-digit, 5x7 dot matrix Units ms, s, Hz, kHz, MHz, I / s, RPM, Imp, V, m / s Signal Input: Signal bandwidth 0.1 Hz .. 10 MHz Counter Tube Input voltage 150 V. .. 660 V (factory setting: 500V) with manual adjustment Photoelectric output for power supply of 5 V sat. max 1 A Stopwatch 0.000 ... 99,999.9 s, resolution 1 ms Timer 0.000 ms ... 3999.99 s, resolution1µs Velocity 0.000 m/s...9999, 9 m / s, resolution 0.001 m / s Period measurement 0.000 ms ... 99.9999 s, resolution 1µs Frequency measurement 0.00 Hz .. 9.99999 MHz, resolution 10 mHz Speed measurement 6. .. 99,999 RPM, 1 RPM resolution Pulse counting 0. .. 999,999 Imp Pulse rate measurement 0.0 ... 99,999.9 I / s Mains supply: Mains voltage 110 .. 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA Housing dimensions (W, H, D) 370 x 168 x 236 (mm) Mass of 2.9 kilograms

Universal Counter 13601-99 Software Universal counter 14412-61

Timer 4-4 with USB-interface

Function and Applications The universal counter is used for measuring time, frequency, pulse rates, pulse counting, periodic times, speeds and velocities. Benefits ▪

The device has all the qualities that are expected of a modern universal counter and is also equipped with a number of technic-

excellence in science 970

Function and Applications

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.5 Time measuring instruments, counters

Measures up to 4 times simultaneously. Multiple time measuring instrument for a variety of applications in teaching, wherever times are to be accurately measured. The timer unit has four 4 digit displays. The starting and stopping of the four built-in independent timers is actuated by the opening or closing of electrical circuits, or by means of light barriers or other TTL signal sources (e.g. a microphone).

Timer meas.modes: single, add., auto& double , Display: 6 digit, LED, 20 mm highf or measured values, diode matrix 3 digit,20 mm for all units, Loudspeaker can be turned off., Modern plastic casing, shock-proofeasy to service, light & stackablewith retractable carrying handle and set-up foot. , Dimensions:230 x 236 x 234 mm

Benefits The 6 different operating modes allow the timer unit to be adjusted to suit almost any experimental requirement. Three different operating modes are suitable for track experiments (distance-time law for four tracks, measurement of speed at four positions, principles of collisions), and in each case all four displays are utilized. Two further operating modes allow, for example, the measurement of the orbiting time of a rotary movement and the direct measurement of the duration of a complete swing of a mechanical pendulum. If required, two of the 4-digit displays can be combined to give an 8-digit display (0000.0000 to 9999.9999).

13603-93

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Timer / Counter

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Four 4-digit LED displays Digit height: 9 mm Number of timers: 4 Measuring range: 0.000...9.999 s or 0000.0000...9999.9999 s Resolution: 1 ms or 0.1 ms Control (start/ stop): By electrical circuits (contact closure / contact opening or level according to TTL norm) Integrated power supplies for lightbarriers 4 × 5 V, 1.5 A Mains supply: 100...240 V~, 50...60 Hz Power requirement: 18 VA Dimensions (mm): 184 × 140 × 130 USB - interface for PC-based experiments

Timer 4-4 with USB-interface 13604-99 Software Timer 4-4 14413-61

Digital counter, 6-decade

Function and Applications Sensor-Unit of the Cobra4 family. Interface-module with timer and counter functionality for up to four light barriers, one measuring microphone, movement sensor, falling sphere apparatus or other devices with TTLcompatible signals. Optionally anexternal trigger device can be used (switch, starter system for motion track, ...). The measured values of the sensor can be transmitted with the Cobra4 Wireless manager and the Cobra4 Wireless-Link by radio or with the USB-Link to the PC. All Cobra4 sensor-units are quickly connectable through a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection. Some applications: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

linear Motion incl. laws of collision with motion and air track free fall with picket fences or falling ball apparatus oscillations rotational motion frequency of acoustical signals

Benefis ▪ ▪ Function and Applications Microprocessor controlled universal counter for experiments in mechanics, acoustics, electricityelectronics and radioactivity. Equipment and technical data: Operating modes: Time: Stopwatch, additive & intermediate recording., 2 timers with 2time measurement possibiliteseach, one of which is storable., 8 triggering possibilites., Meas.range: 1000 s & 10000 s, Frequency: 3 ranges 10kHz to10MegaHz, Rate: Measuring range:10000 Imp/s, 8 triggering alternatives:1 s to100 s, Period: 0.1 s to 10 s, RPM: 100000 RPM/min, gate times: 1 s / 10 s, Impulse: max.100000Imp , selectable display of impulses, meas. time,or impulse rate, Inputs:4 mm pair of sockets for frequency, start/stop & stop for timer 1 & timer 2., Outputs: BNC for counting tubes electable between 200V & 500V; 4mm pair of sockets f.light barriers (5V/1A,short circuit proof)& f.analog output (5V/500 Imp/s)

▪ ▪ ▪

Accessories ▪ ▪

Light barrier, compact (up to 4 lightbarriers) Cobra4 adapter for Sensor-Unit Timer/Counter to connect a light barrier

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Timer/Counter 12651-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 971

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.5 Time measuring instruments, counters

160 x 25 x 105M6 , Threaded holes in casing: 7, Stem included: 100 mm, M6 thread

Cobra4 Junior-Link 12610-00

11207-30

Light barrier, compact PHYGATE USB interface for light barriers + software

Function and Applications Universal fork-type light barrier to measure short and long shadowing periods. Benefits ▪

An incremental wheel with a string groove which can be attached to the fork of the light barrier, which allows to measure distances by counting the ribs of the incremental wheel.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Dimensions: 40 x 40 mm Supply voltage: 5 V Incl. incremental wheel

Light barrier, compact 11207-20 Incremental wheel 11207-21 Adapter plate for Light barrier compact 11207-22

Light barrier with counter

Function and Applications With the function of an electronic time measuring and counting device. Benefits: 4 figureluminous display, selection switch for 4 operating modes, RESET key, BNC jack for exterior starting and/ or stopping of time measurement, TTL output to control peripheral devices, power supply connector (4 mm jacks) Equipment and technical Data: Fork width: 70 mm, Usable barrier depth: 65 mm, Sensitivity adjustable, Max. working frequency: 25 kHz, External dimensions (mm):

excellence in science 972

PHYGATE can be used to connect the"Compact" light barrier to the USBinterface of the PC. Measured data fromup to 5 light barriers can be recordeddirectly at the computer using the"measure" software PHYCON and berepresented in graphical formimmediately. PHYGATE can be used in manyexperiments, for demonstratingtranslation, rotation and movement, forexample. 11207-25

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.6 Meteorological instruments

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather: Humidity, Air pressure,Temperature, Light intensity, Altitude

Measurement of relative humidity (RH), absolute humidity and temperature with Cobra3 Basic-UNIT. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

12121-00

Weather station 04850-00 Weather station, wireless 04854-00 Weather monitor, 6 lines LCD 87997-10 Weather monitor with satellite-based data 87997-20 Demonstration barometer 02687-00

Cup anemometer for Cobra3

Equipment and technical data Relative Humidity: ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 100 % accuracy +/- 5 %

Air Pressure: ▪ ▪

measurement range 10 - 1100 mbar accuracy +/-5 %

Air Temperature: ▪ ▪

measurement range -40 - +125 °C accuracy +/- 0.5 °C

Brightness: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 10,000 lx accuracy +/- 5 % calculation using air pressure Data transfer rate for each sensor: 1 Hz Dimensions (L x B x H): 64 x 70 x 31 mm Weight: 60 g

12670-00

Humidity sensor for Cobra3

Operating temperature: o...+70°C Measuring range: 1...40m/s resp. 4....140km/h max. switching capacity: 0.6V weight: 0.3kg dimensions: 112 x 162 x 140 mm

12124-00

Function and Applications

Rainfall gauge, diem type 04855-00 Cup anemometer 03085-10 Maximum-minimum thermometer 04160-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 973

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Temperature, semiconductor -20...110 °C

Air Pressure: ▪ ▪

measurement range 10 - 1100 mbar accuracy +/-5 %

Air Temperature: ▪ ▪

measurement range -40 - +125 °C accuracy +/- 0.5 °C

Brightness:

Funktion and Applications

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 10,000 lx accuracy +/- 5 % calculation using air pressure Data transfer rate for each sensor: 1 Hz Dimensions (L x B x H): 64 x 70 x 31 mm Weight: 60 g

Cobra4 -20..110°C Sensor-Unit Temperature-semiconductor 12670-00

Benefits ▪

can be connected directly to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCr-Ni

12640-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather: Humidity, Air pressure,Temperature, Light intensity, Altitude Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH and 2 x temperature NiCr-Ni is a measuring recorder for pH, potential and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data Temperature: Function and Applications Depending on application type, the Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Weather can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/ lockable connection. Benefits ▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data Relative Humidity: ▪ ▪

measurement range 0 - 100 % accuracy +/- 5 %

excellence in science 974

▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -200..+1200 °C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used

pH: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0...14 Resolution 0.01K Measuring accuracy: ± 0,5%

Potential: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range -2000..+2000 mV Resolution: 0.1 mV Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5% Data flow rate: 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm, weight: 95 g

12630-00

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit 2 x Temperature, NiCr-Ni 12641-00

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity / Temperature (Pt1000)

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity /Temperature (Pt1000) is a measuring recorder for conductance measuring sensors with a cell constant of K = 1.00/cm and which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits: Function and applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics is a measuring recorder for pressure and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits ▪ ▪

It canbe fitted with two NiCr-Nithermoelements (type K), in order to measure up to two temperatures and one absolut pressure value simultaneously. The unit can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in/ lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -200...+1200°C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used

Pressure: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0...2000 hPa Resolution 0.1 hPa Measuring accuracy: ± 0,5% Data flow rate: max. 5 Hz

▪

The Cobra4 sensor may be connected directly to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data: Conductivity: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring

range 1:0.0 .. approx. 2,500.0 µS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.15 µS/cm range 2:0 .. approx. 45,000 µS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±3 µS/cm range 3:0.00 .. approx. 1,100 mS/cm accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.05 mS/cm

Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring accuracy:-20.0°C..150.0°C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: ±0.5K (in the range 0..100°C) Measuring cycle: 0.8...2s (adjusted automatically) Dimensions approx. 62 mm x 63 mm

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temperature (Pt1000) 12632-00 Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00

Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm x 35 mm. Weight: approx. 190 g

Cobra3, sensor -20..110 C Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics, pressure abs. 2 bar and 2 temperature NiCr-Ni 12638-00 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05

Function and Applications To be connected directly to the sensorports of the Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT. Equipment and techical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Sensor sheathing: stainless sationsteel Diameter: 6 mm Sensor length: 200 mm Measuring range: -20°C...+110°C Resolution: 0.2°C

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 975

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

▪

Total length incl. cable: 1.5 m

12120-00

Cobra3 Measuring module temperature, NiCr-Ni, 330°C

Surface temperature probe PT100, -20...+300°C 11759-02 Temp.probe, imm., PT100, -20...+300°C, teflon 11759-04

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB

Function and Applications Computer interface for measurement and control in naturalscience education (physics, chemistry and biology). Benefits Measuring module, Temperature NiCr-Ni, 330°C 12104-00 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05

Cobra3 Measuring module temperature PT100

▪ ▪

Operation either with PC (USB port) or with special operation unit (COM-Unit). Upgrade for measurement of non-electrical quantities by use of plug-in modules.

Equipment and technical data 3 analog input channels: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Module port: ± 10 V Connection type: 25-pole Sub-D Sensor port 1: ± 30/10 V Connection type: 4 mm socket 9-pole Sub-D Input: grounded Input resistance: 500 kOhm Sensor port 2:± 30/10/3/1/0.3/0.1 V Connection type: 4 mm sockets 9-pole Sub-D Difference potential input:Input resistance: 1 MOhm

For all analog inputs: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maximum sampling rate: 500 kHz Online sampling rate: 5 kHz Burst-mode: 5 Hz...500 kHz Resolution: 12 bit Voltage protection: 230 V AC Trigger: adjustable

Timer/Counter 1: ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 32 bit Resolution: 800 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets

Timer/Counter 2:

Measuring mod.,Temperature PT100 12102-00 Temp. probe, immersion type, Pt100, stainless steel, -20...+300°C 11759-01

excellence in science 976

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 40 bit Resolution: 200 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets Analog control output: ± 10 V Resolution: 12 bit Connection type: 9-pole Sub-D

General data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Supply voltage: 12 V DC/6 W Interface: USB Data transfer rate: 115200 bit/s Memory: 12000 values

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

▪ ▪

Dimensions (mm): 190 x 135 x 90 Fail-safe plastic housing with support feet, several fixation possibilities and lateral docking option for further units.

Includes accessories: ▪

USB Cable

Required accessoires: ▪

Cobra3 power supply 12150.99

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software COBRA3 Temperature 14503-61 Cobra3 Chem-Unit 12153-00 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00 ADAPTER COND.4MM SOCKET/DIN PLUG 13701-02 Temp. probe Pt-1000, 10m cable 07139-01 Temperature probe Pt-1000 13702-01 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Converter USB - RS232, active 14602-10 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2 LED displays, 4-digit , height 20 mm Plotter output Differential temperature measurement Calibration function (set 0.00) Automatic comparison of sensor differentials (adjust) Can be switched between °C and K display modes

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Meauring range: -50...+300°C Resolution: 0.1°C/( 0.01°C if 0.00 set) Pt 100 probes Connectors: 4 diode plugs, 5-pin Dimensions: 270 x 236 x 168 mm RS 232 C, 9600 baud

Temperature meter digital, 4-2 13617-90 Softw. temperature meter 4-2 14405-61 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00

Temperature immersion probe Pt100, stainless steel -20...+300°C Function and Applications Temperature probes Pt100 for temperature measuring device 4-2 (13617-93) in protective conduit of stainless steel and Teflon, or in movable gilded silver lamina in bent stainless steel tubing (11759-02). Precision of the absolute temperature: 0.1 K at 0°C to 0.2 K at 100°C. Connection cable with four isolated copper lines for the impedance measurement according to four-conductor method, 5-pole diode insert.

Temp. probe, immersion type, Pt100, stainless steel, -20...+300°C 11759-01 Surface temperature probe PT100, -20...+300°C 11759-02 Temp.probe, imm., PT100, -20...+300°C, teflon 11759-04

Digital thermometer, NiCr-Ni, -50...+1300°C

Temperature meter digital, 4-2

07050-00

Digital Thermometer, 2 x NiCr-Ni 07050-01

Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed

Function and Applications The equipment is suitable for the simultaneous measurement of up to 4 temperatures. Benefits The device has the following advantages in particular:

Function and Applications Thermocouple with standard type-K 2-pin flat plug which makes no contribution to the thermovoltage.

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 977

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

Benefits ▪

Suitable for use with a digital thermometer, hand-held temperature meter, or any interfaces using type-K connectors (e.g. Cobra 4 Thermodynamics or NiCr-Ni thermocouple sensor units)

Other measurements: up to 400°C, Delay: < 10 s, Length: 70 cm approx. 07019-01

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Magnesium oxide powder insulation Stainless steel sheath Response time: <1 s Cable: 1 m

Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05

Meter, 10/30 mV, 200 deg.C

Accessories temperature measuring

Protective sleeves f.temp.probe,2 11762-05 Holder for thermometer/tube, 3 pieces 38002-01 Glass tube holder with tape measure clamp 05961-00 Heat conductive paste,50 g 03747-00 Heat sensitive paper 04260-00

Laboratory thermometer

Function and Applications Enclosed-scale thermometer with blue or red filling; scale support in frosted glass, fixing of the weighing scale support above with melted glass pin; button or ring for support; in protective sleeve. Depth of immersion = 50 mm.

Function and Applications Meter for measurements with thermocouples. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Meter 10/30 mV moving coil instrument for temperature determination with diff. thermocouples to 1700 °C class 1.5 input resitance 50/100 Ohm mV-scale and temperature scale for Fe/Cu-Ni-thermocouple

Thermometer -10...+30 C 05949-00 Thermometer -10...+50 C 38034-00 Lab thermometer,-10..+50C 38055-00 Lab thermometer,-10..+100C 38056-00 Lab thermometer,w.stem,+15..+40C 38057-00 Lab thermometer,-10..+150C 38058-00 Lab thermometer,-10..+250C 38065-00

07019-00

Laboratory thermometer with immersion shaft Thermocouple Fe-CuNi 2,2 Ohm Function and Applications Equipment and technical data Thermocouple leads individually spun with glass fibre and woven together with glass fibre, Measuring probes point/welded and insulated, Two 4-mm plugs, Temperature range: Measurement at a specific point (one probe only): up to 700°C

excellence in science 978

Implementation as laboratory thermometer, with blue filling, depth of immersion = 160 mm, in protective sleeve. Lab thermometer,w.stem,+15..+40C 38059-00

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

Lab thermometer,w.stem,-10..+110C 38060-00 Lab thermometer,w.stem,-10..+250C 38061-01

Student thermometer

Function and applications Enclosed-scale thermometer with red toluene filling. Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪

Normal glass 16/III Measuring range: -100...+30 °C Can be calibrated

38151-00 Function and Applications Enclosed-scale thermometer with red filling; scale support in pasteboard; ring for support; in protective sleeve. Diameter 8 mm. Depth of immersion = length of the immersion shaft (rejuvenation of the glass tube). Students thermometer,-10...+110°C, l = 180 mm 38005-02 Students thermometer, -10...+110°C, l = 230 mm 38005-10

All-use thermometer 1°C subdivision (without Hg filling) Function and Applications Mercury-free, upright thermometer. Complete-immersion adjusted enclosed-scale thermometer with red or blue filling. Prismatic capillary tube, free, with protective sleeve. Lab thermom. -50...+50°C,w/o Hg 47038-00 Lab thermom. -10...+50°C,w/o Hg 47039-00 Lab thermom.-10...+100°C,w/o Hg 47040-00 Lab thermom.-10...+150°C,w/o Hg 47041-00 Lab thermom.-10...+200°C,w/o Hg 47042-00 Lab thermom.-10...+250°C,w/o Hg 47043-00

Lab thermometer, with stem, -10..+360°C, d = 6 mm Thermometer with a green ecologicallysafe (mercury-free) filling:* measuring range: -10...+360°C* division: 2°C* depth of immersion: 76 mm* diameter: 6 mm* length: 300 mm,* white background with a black skale* holding ring* delivery takes place inprotection-tube out of plastic 38069-00

All-use thermometer with Hg Function and Applications Mercury-content enclosed-scale thermometer, for daily laboratory use. Complete-immersion adjusted, prismatic capillary tube , free, with protective sleeve. Chemical thermometer,-10...+360 C 38008-00 Lab therm.-10...+200°C, grad.1° 47047-00

Precision thermometer with Hg, division <1°C Function and Applications Mercury-content precision thermometers with high resolution, calibratable, complete-immersion adjusted. For improved readability, blue-illuminated, prismatic measuring capillary tube, including protective sleeve. Thermometer, -10...+360 C 38029-00 Thermometer, -10...+ 50 C 38033-00

Laboratory straight enclosed-scale thermometer

Function and Applications Enclosed-scale thermometer with blue filling, measuring capillary tube prismatic, yellow background, scale support in frosted glass, in protective sleeve; upper diameter: approx. 17 mm; upright diameter: approx. 8 mm; depth of immersion = upright length. Lab thermometer,stem,-35..+50C 38062-00 Lab thermometer,stem,0..+100C 38063-00 Lab thermometer,stem,0..+250C 38064-00

Thermometer,-100....+30 C Clinical thermometer,+35...+42 C

Function and applications

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 979

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.7 Temperature measuring instruments, thermometers

Clinical thermometer for measuring maximum temperature, calibrated and mercury-free. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: +35...+42 °C Precision: +/- 0.1°C Complete with protective case

Function and applications The thermometer can be used to measure soil temperature simply by inserting it into the soil using the handles. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

04165-00

Clinical thermometer, digital

Temperature sensor made of normal glass in sturdy metal frame with a piercing tip, scale backing made of frosted glass Measuring range: -38°C ... +50°C Scale divisions: 1°C Penetration depth: up to 300 mm

64219-00

Non-graduated thermometer for thermal expansion Function and applications Calibrated electronic thermometer with digital display and alarm when final temperature reading is attained. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -32...+42°C Precision: 0.1°C Automatic cut-off: after 10 mins.

04166-00

Demonstration thermometer

Function and applications Demonstration thermometer with coloured filling. Advantages Thanks to its coloured scale, which can be seen well from a distance, this thermometer is well suited for use in demonstration experiments Equipment and technical data Measuring range: -60...+160°C, Scale divisions: 1°C, Total length: 500 mm.

This non-graduated thermometer is used for the preparation of the temperature scale through marking of the 2 fundamental points, melting point of ice 0°C and boiling point of water 100°C at an ambient pressure of 1013 hPa. Agitation thermometer, non-graduated With red alcohol filling, round capillary tube, white background, in glass rod, length 240 mm, diameter 8 mm. Non-graduated thermometer Thermometer with blue alcohol filling, prismatic capillary tube, attached on metal plate 330 mm x 35 mm. Demonstration thermometer, non-graduated With blue-colored alcohol filling which is readable from a distance, round capillary tube, attached on angled Al profile section so that the capillary is protected against mechanical damage to a large extent, Al profile section with bore and support bracket, 700 x 80 x 1.5 mm.

Stirring thermometer non-graduat. 38003-00 Thermometer, non-graduated 04256-00 Thermometer, ungraduated 04136-00

04135-00

Soil thermometer

excellence in science 980

Function and Applications

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCr-Ni

pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connector

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH and 2 x temperature NiCr-Ni is a measuring recorder for pH, potential and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits: ▪ ▪

It can be fitted with two NiCr-Ni thermoelements (type K) and a pH probe or Redox measuring chain, in order to measure up to two temperatures and one pH or potential value simultaneously. The unit can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technical data: Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -200..+1200 °C Resolution: 0.1 K Measuring accuracy: equal to the accuracy of the gauges used Measuring range: 0...14 Resolution 0.01K Measuring accuracy: ± 0,5%

Potential: ▪ ▪ ▪

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connection is a measuring recorder for pH and potential measurements, which is controlled by microcontroller. Benefits: ▪ ▪

pH: ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications

Measuring range -2000..+2000 mV Resolution: 0.1 mV Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5%

It canbe fitted with a pH probe or Redoxmeasuring chain, in order to measure pH or potential values. The unit can be connected to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Equipment and technicla data: pH: ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0...14pH Resolution: 0.01K Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5%

Potential: ▪ ▪ ▪

Data flow rate: 5 Hz Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Weight: 95 g

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Chemistry, pH and 2 x Temperature NiCr-Ni 12630-00 Cobra4 Mobile-Link set, incl. rechargeable batteries, SD memory card, USB cable and software "measure" 12620-55 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04

▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: -2000...+2000 mV Resolution: 0.1 mV Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5%

Data flow rate: 5 Hz, Dimensions: approx. 62 mm x 63 mm, Weight: 70 g Cobra4 Sensor-Unit pH, BNC connector 12631-00 pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 981

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temperature (Pt1000)

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity, with stainless steel electrodes

Function and Applications

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity /Temperature (Pt1000) is a measuring recorder for conductance measuring sensors with a cell constant of K = 1.00/cm and which is controlled by micro-controller.

The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity/Temperature with stainless steel electrodes can be connected directly to the Cobra4 Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Benefits: The Cobra4 sensor may be connected directly to the Cobra4 WirelessLink, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4USB-Link using a secure and reliable plug-in / lockable connection.

Benefits

Equipment and technical data:

Equipment and technical data

Conductivity:

▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range 1: 0.0 .. approx. 2,500.0 µS/cm, Measuring accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.15 µS/cm Measuring range 2: 0 .. approx. 45,000 µS/cm, Measuring accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±3 µS/cm Measuring range 3: 0.00 .. approx. 1,100 mS/cm, Measuring accuracy: 4% of the measuring value ±0.05 mS/cm

Temperature: Measuring accuracy:-20.0°C..150.0°C, Resolution: 0.1 K, Measuring accuracy: ±0.5K (in the range 0..100°C) Measuring cycle: 0.8...2s (adjusted automatically), Dimensions approx. 62 mm x 63 mm Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Conductivity+, Conductivity/ Temperature (Pt1000) 12632-00 Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 13701-01 Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00

▪

▪ ▪ ▪

Particularly good application for school and outdoor experimentation, as the measuring gauge is already firmly connected.

Measuring range: 0.2 µS/cm...200 mS/cm Measuring accuracy: 6% of the measuringvalue ± 0,2µS/cm Resolution: 0.1 µS/cm, 1 µS/cm, 10µS/cm, 100 µS/cm

Temperature: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

12633-00

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB

Function and Applications Computer interface for measurement and control in naturalscience education (physics, chemistry and biology).

excellence in science 982

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

Benefits ▪ ▪

Operation either with PC (USB port) or with special operation unit (COM-Unit). Upgrade for measurement of non-electrical quantities by use of plug-in modules.

Equipment and technical data 3 analog input channels: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Module port: ± 10 V Connection type: 25-pole Sub-D Sensor port 1: ± 30/10 V Connection type: 4 mm socket 9-pole Sub-D Input: grounded Input resistance: 500 kOhm Sensor port 2:± 30/10/3/1/0.3/0.1 V Connection type: 4 mm sockets 9-pole Sub-D Difference potential input:Input resistance: 1 MOhm

For all analog inputs: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Maximum sampling rate: 500 kHz Online sampling rate: 5 kHz Burst-mode: 5 Hz...500 kHz Resolution: 12 bit Voltage protection: 230 V AC Trigger: adjustable

Timer/Counter 1: ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 32 bit Resolution: 800 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets

Timer/Counter 2: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of counts: 40 bit Resolution: 200 ns Connection type: 4 mm sockets Analog control output: ± 10 V Resolution: 12 bit Connection type: 9-pole Sub-D

General data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Supply voltage: 12 V DC/6 W Interface: USB Data transfer rate: 115200 bit/s Memory: 12000 values Dimensions (mm): 190 x 135 x 90 Fail-safe plastic housing with support feet, several fixation possibilities and lateral docking option for further units.

Includes accessories: ▪

USB Cable

Required accessoires: ▪

Cobra3 power supply 12150.99

Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Measuring module pH/potential 12101-00 pH-electrode, polythene sheathed 18450-00 pH-electrode, shock resistant 18452-00 Reference electrode, AgCl 18475-00 Platin.electrode in prot.tube,8mm 45206-00

Software Cobra3 Universal recorder 14504-61 Measuring module Conductivity 12108-00 Conductivity probe K1 18151-02 Software Cobra3 Conductivity 14508-61 Cobra3, sensor -20..110 C 12120-00 Cobra3 Chem-Unit 12153-00 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Redox electrode, BNC 46267-10 Temp. probe Pt-1000, 10m cable 07139-01 Temp. probe, imm. type, Pt1000, Cobra3 12123-00 Temperature probe Pt-1000 13702-01 Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 13701-01 Conductivity probe K1 18151-02 ADAPTER COND.4MM SOCKET/DIN PLUG 13701-02 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Converter USB - RS232, active 14602-10 Power supply 12V / 2A 12151-99 Software Cobra3 Chem-Unit 14520-61

Demomultimeter, p, pH, T, U, I, R, f, RS232, 230 V

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 983

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

Funktion und Verwendung

Digital pH-meter

Modern multi-purpose device for measuring of voltage, current, resistance, frequency, temperature, pressure and pH Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

45 mm LED-display LED-matrix for display of the units serial port for connecting PC Auto-range function

Equipment and technical data: Voltage: ▪ ▪

4 ranges 0mV - 500V ACDC Resolution: 0.1mV/10mV/100mV/1V

Current: ▪ ▪

3 ranges 0mA - 10A Resolution: 0.1mA/10mA/100mA

Resistance: ▪ ▪

Function and Applications

5 ranges 0Ohm - 10MOhm Resolution (Ohm): 1/10/100/1000/100.000

Frequency: ▪ ▪

4 ranges1Hz - 100kHz Resolution: 1Hz/10Hz/100Hz

Temperature: ▪ ▪

2 ranges 200°C - 1370°C Resolution: 0.1°C/1°C 1 range : 0 - 14pH Resolution: 0.01

▪

2 ranges 0 - 7000hPa Resolution: 0.1hPa/1hPa

Dimensions (mm): 288x165x235 Demomultimeter p, pH, T, U, I, R; RS 232, 230 V 13721-93 pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode,plastic body,gel,BNC 46266-10 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 Pressure sensor, absolute press. 07136-01 Pressure sensor 2, 500-7000 hPa 07136-02 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, -50...500°C 13615-02 Thermocouple NiCr-Ni, sheathed 13615-01 Immersion probe NiCr-Ni, steel, -50...400°C 13615-03 Immers. probe NiCr-Ni, teflon, 200°C 13615-05 Surface probe NiCr-Ni 13615-04 Data cable, plug/ socket, 9 pole 14602-00 Software Demomultimeter 14409-61

excellence in science 984

▪ ▪ ▪

▪

pH- Pressure: ▪ ▪

Benefits

▪

pH- Resolution: ▪ ▪

with clear, easy to operate and splashproof film keyboard; for demonstration classes and practicals. Due to the installed RS-232 interface and the available software, it is possible to transfer data to the computer for storage and analysis.

▪ ▪

demonstrative 4-digit display with a character-height of 20 mm automatic display of the units belonging to the measured values manual, or for connected Pt-1000temperature probe, automatic temperature compensation of the measured values to calibrate the pH-probe, free selection of the buffer solutions (anypH-value) 20 storage spaces for measured data;remain stored even after the measuringdevice has been switched off storage of the pH-probe calibration retained even after the device has been switched off, analogue for pX-probes with the appropriate probes, enablesion selective measurements (pX), e.g.X=Cl- ; NO3- ; Na+- due to high input resistance, ideally used as an mV-meter for the measurement of electronic potentials Display of the electrode steepness modern plastic casing, impactproof,easily serviced, light and stackable,with handle for carrying that can belowered into the case afterwards and feet for working position

Equipment and technical data pH ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0 - 14 pH Accuracy: 0.01 pH Resolution: 0.01 pH

pX ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0 - 14 pX Accuracy: 0.01 pX Resolution: 0.01 pX VoltageMeasuring range: -2000 - +2000 mV Accuracy: 0.1% Resolution: 1 mV

Temperature ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range: 0 - 100°C Accuracy: 0.5°C Resolution: 0.1°C Mains supply: 230 V / 50-60 Hz

Dimensions (mm): 230 x 236 x 168 Digital pH-meter 13702-93 Temperature probe Pt-1000 13702-01

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

pH-electrode, shock resistant 18452-00 pH-electrode, polythene sheathed 18450-00 pH electrode, f.surface measurem. 18453-00 pH electrode, sterilisable 18456-00 Software pH meter DEMO 14408-61 PC-CABLE 25P.PLUG-25/9P.SOCKET 14601-00

Digital conductivity meter

Software Conductivity Meter Demo 14400-61 PC-CABLE 25P.PLUG-25/9P.SOCKET 14601-00 Stand.solu.1413 Stand.solu.1413æS/cm(25 S/cm(25øC), C), 460ml 47070-02

pH-elektrodes with DIN plug pH-electrode, polythene sheathed 18450-00 pH-electrode, shock resistant 18452-00 pH electrode, f.surface measurem. 18453-00 pH electrode, sterilisable 18456-00

pH-elektrodes with BNC plug

Function and Application For measurement of conductivity, specific resistance, concentration and temperature Benefits: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

The clearly arranged keyboard allows easy operation of the instrument, which is distinguished by not only being capable of displaying conductivity, but also derived quantities. Cell connection via a 5 pin diode socket The following quantities are displayed: conductivity, specific resistance, concentration, temperature 4 digit demonstrative display, height of digits 20 mm Automatic temperature compensation Standard value of cell constants manually changeable or automatic calibration with standard calibration solution RS 232 interface and software for data transfer to a computer for storage Automatic selection of measuring range and display of the units: µS/cm or mS/cm, Ωcm or kΩcm, mg/l or g/l, °C.

pH-electrode, plastic body, gel, BNC 46265-15 pH-electrode,plastic body,gel,BNC 46266-10 pH-electrode, plastic, refill., BNC 46266-15 pH-electrode, glass, refill., BNC 46268-10 Potassium chloride,sol. 3M 100ml 48203-10

Redox electrode, BNC

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Conductivity measuring range: 0.001 µS...200 mS Concentration measuring range: 1 μg/l...1 kg/l Specific resistance measuring range: 1 mΩcm...1 MΩcm Temperature measuring range: -30...+100°C Interface RS232 Mains supply 230 V/ 50...60 Hz.

Digital conductivity meter 13701-93 Conductivity temperature probe Pt1000 13701-01 ADAPTER COND.4MM SOCKET/DIN PLUG 13701-02 Data cable RS 232, SUB-D/USB 07157-01 Conductivity probe K1 18151-02

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 985

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.8 pH and conductivity measuring instruments

Function and Applications

Reference electrode, AgCl

For measuring of electrochemical potentials with plastic shaft and BNC plug. Benefits ▪ ▪

low- maintenance because of gel electrolyte. robust design

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

electrode with plastic shaft and a platinum rod measurement chain made of platinum electrode and Ag / AgCl reference electrode temperature range: 0 ... +80 ° C dimensions of the shaft (mm): 120 x 12 cable length: 1m

Function and applications Recommended accessories for the measurement of electrochemical potentials in pH/potential measurements.

46267-10

Benefits

Platin.electrodes

Equipped with refillable Ag/AgCl electrolyte, Suitable for use in conjunction with measuring electrodes (e.g. 45206-00) for pH, redox potential and ion-selective measurements Equipment and technical data Electrode with glass shaft and ceramic diaphragm, Shaft diameter: 12 mm, Shaft length: 120 mm, Temperature range: -5 ... +80°C, Cable length: 1 m

Function and Applications

18475-00

Special electrodes with 4mm plug. Equipment and technical data Platinum electrode in protective tube, d=8mm Platin.electrode in prot.tube,8mm 45206-00 Electrode platinum,short 45207-00

Antimony electrode

Function and Application Measuring electrode from antimony;together with a silver chloride reference electrode for measuring of pH values in the range from pH 2.0 to pH 9.5 Equipment and technical data: diameter: 10 mm, lenght: 120 mm, fixed cable of 1 m lenght with a 4 mm plug 18477-01

excellence in science 986

Storage of pH electrodes Storage flask for pH electrodes,filled with 250 ml 3.0 M KCl solution 18481-20 Protection sleeve for electrode with a diameter of 12 mm 37651-15

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.9 Oxygen, lux and pressure measuring instruments

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics, pressure abs. 2 bar and 2 temperature NiCr-Ni

Plug-in module for measuring the illuminance. Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪

Measuring range selectable with the aid of the software. Measuring Range, resolution: 300 Lx 0.15 Lx; 3 kLx1.5 Lx; 30 kLx 15 Lx; 300 kLx 150 Lx

Measuring module lux 12107-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50

Luxmeter, digital display 47672-01

Cobra3 pressure sensors

Function and Applications The Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics is a measuring recorder for pressure and temperature measurements, which is controlled by micro-controller. Benefits It canbe fitted with two NiCr-Nithermoelements (type K), in order to measure up to two temperatures and one absolut pressure value simultaneously. The unit can be connected to the Cobra4Wireless-Link, the Cobra4 Mobile-Link or the Cobra4 USB-Link using a secure and reliable plugin / lockable connection.

Benefits ▪

Cobra4 Sensor-Unit Thermodynamics, pressure abs. 2 bar and 2 temperature NiCr-Ni 12638-00 Cobra4 Mobile-Link set, incl. rechargeable batteries, SD memory card, USB cable and software "measure" 12620-55

Measuring module lux

▪

With hose connector and hose section for connecting the module to any type of peripheral equipment. Including data cable for Cobra3 sensors.

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Cobra3 press. sensor 2.0 bar abs. 12128-00 Cobra3 press. sensor 2.0 bar diff. 12129-00 Cobra3 press. sensor 80 mbar diff. 12130-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50 Software Cobra3, Pressure 14510-61

Lux meter, hand-held, RS232 interface, data logger Function and Applications For determining light intensities of up to 300 klx in air and water bodies. Benefits ▪ ▪

2 four-digit LCD Display with 15 or 7.5 mm digit height Analog bar display with good resolution (2% of measuring range)

Function and Applications

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 987

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.9 Oxygen, lux and pressure measuring instruments

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

RS232 interface to transmit the measurements to a computer or on a large display built-in data logger for storing max.250 measurements Representation of the minima, maxima and averages of a series of measurements Battery, accu or external power supply automatic shut-down water protected keyboard Calibration manually or automatically

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4 measuring ranges 0,001 Lx-300 kLx resolution 0,1/1/10/100 Lx Accuracy 3/3/3/5 % 5pole probe connector jack Data interface type RS 232 (serial) Baudrate 9600 bit / s USB port connector

Softw. Luxmeter, hand-held 14417-61 Lux meter, hand-held 07137-00 Luxmeter probe 12107-01 Lux immersion probe, 10m cable 07137-01

excellence in science 988

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.10 Radioactivity, sound level and gas measuring instruments

Geiger-Müller-Counter

▪ ▪

Counter tube voltage: 500 V ± 5% Max. pulse frequency: 400,000 pulses per min

Counter tube module 12106-00 Cobra3 BASIC-UNIT, USB 12150-50

Gas detector for the quantitative determination of gas Function and Applications Function and Applications

For the determination of gaseous air pollution

Demonstration and student use unit in connection with Geiger Müller counting tubes for experiments on radioactivity.

Benefits

Equipment and technical data: ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

4-digit LED display, 20mm high. 4 standard measurement times 1/10/60/100 s Automatic measurement sequence with memory 10 s Freely selectable measuring time BNC-socket for counting tube 500V 4-mm-bushes for event counting with TTL signals Mains 100-230 V/50-60 Hz Shock proof casing with carrying handle Dimensions 190 x 140 x 130 mm

13606-99

Accessories for the measurement of radioactivity

Bellows pumps to be operated by hand for the suctioning of defined air quantities. With different test-tubes, gaseous air pollution can be determined quantitatively and qualitatively. Equipment and technical data Suction volume: 100 ml/stroke, automatic stroke counter to avoid faulty measurements, optical display signals that the necessary test air has been suctioned. Gas tester I, quantitat.analysis 64199-02 Accessory set for Gas Tester 64199-06

Oxygenmeter, hand-held Function and Applications

Counter tube, GM, 45 mm 09007-00 Counter tube, type B 09005-00 Counter tube, type A, BNC 09025-11 Screened cable, BNC, l 750 mm 07542-11

Counter tube module

For measurement of oxygen concentration or saturation of temperature and of atmospheric pressure. Benefits ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

2 four-digit LCD Display with 15 or 7.5 mm digit height Analog bar display with good resolution (2% of measuring range) RS232 interface to transmit the measurements to a computer or on a large display built-in data logger for storing max.250 measurements Representation of the minima, maxima and averages of a series of measurements Battery, accu or external power supply automatic shut-down water protected keyboard Automatic air pressure and temperature correction Manual salinity correction

Equipment and technical data Oxygen ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring ranges: Concentration 0,0...20,0 mg O2/l Saturation 0-120% Accuracy 1,5% of meas. value Salinity correct. 0...70 salinity Connection 5 pin diode socket

Temperature Function and Applications Plug-in module for measuring radioactive radiation with the aid of a Geiger Müller counter tube. Benefits ▪

The module also supplies the counter tube with the necessary supply voltage.

Equipment and technical data

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range 0...+45C Resolution 0.1C Accuracy +-( 0.1C + 1Digit) Type of probe Pt 1000

Atmospheric pressure ▪

Measuring range 500...1100 hPa (mbar)

Accessories

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 989

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.10 Radioactivity, sound level and gas measuring instruments

12105-01 Oxygen/Temperature probe Oxygenmeter, hand-held 07135-00 Oxygen/Temperature probe 12105-01 Softw. Oxygenmeter, hand-held 14415-61

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Speed measurement 6. .. 99,999 RPM, 1 RPM resolution Pulse counting 0. .. 999,999 Imp Pulse rate measurement 0.0 ... 99,999.9 I / s Mains supply: Mains voltage 110 .. 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA Housing dimensions (W, H, D) 370 x 168 x 236 (mm) Mass of 2.9 kilograms

13601-99

Geiger-Müller-Counter Gamma-Scout®

Universal Counter

13608-00

Sound level indicator 40-120dB Function and Applications Sound level indicator Equipment and technical data

Function and Applications The universal counter is used for measuring time, frequency, pulse rates, pulse counting, periodic times, speeds and velocities. Benefits ▪

▪ ▪ ▪

▪ ▪

Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

excellence in science 990

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Measuring range 54-126 dB Number Ranges 7 Resolution 2 dB Analogue output 0.7 Vrms / rms Frequency range 300 Hz-8 kHz Power supply 9-volt battery Dimensions 180x68x36 mm Weight 160 g

65969-00

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.11 Photometers, spectroscopes, polarimeters, refractometers

Spectrophotometer 190-1100 nm

Benefits The display shows the wavelength, the degree of absorption and transmission or the concentration respectively , it has RS232 resp. USB interfaces for connecting to a computer. Equipment and technical data Light source: Tungsten, Wavelength range: 335 ... 1000 nm, Wavelength precision: ± 2 nm, Wavelength repeatibility: ± 1 nm, Spectral bandwidth: 10 nm, Cuvette holder: for square cuvettes with external dimensions 12 mm x 12 mm, External dimensions (mm): 385 x 310 x190, Mains connection: 230 V, 50 Hz, Included: Two square cuvettes (glass), Data cable for connecting to PC, Two spare fuces (1 A)

Function and Applications Spectrophotometer 190-1100 nm Benefits The UV-VIS spectral photometer is characterised by its compact design and due to its wide range of possible uses, operation is via a clearly set out overlay keyboard on the screen dialogue, current wavelengths and measured values can be displayed in large format, alternatively, all measured values can also be presented graphically or in table format on the LCD screen with background lighting, strong light, high performance optics enable absorption and transmission measurements to be taken in the whole wavelength range of 200 to 1100 nm with automatic switching between the twolight sources , a high speed scanner minimises the susceptibility to errors during a wavelength changeover and thusenables very precise measurement, storage of measurement parameters, data, calibration curves, spectra, etc, spectral scanning of samples with freely selectable wavelength range, automatic baseline correction and band/ trough identification, production of a calibration curve withup to 10 concentration standards, details of the straight line formula, automatic correction against the zerosolution, the device can be connected to aprinter or computer with a serial port via an installed Centronix or RS232interface. Equipment and technical data Light sources: 1 Halogen lamp1 Deuterium lamp, Wavelength range: 190-1100 nm, Wavelength accuracy: ± 1 nm, Wavelength repeatability: ± 0.3 nm, Spectral bandwidth: 5 nm, Photometric range: - 0.3 to 3 Abs 0.0 to 200% Transmittance, Long-term stability: ± 0.005 Abs/h, Cuvette holder: for square cuvettes with external dimensions 12 mm × 12 mm, Outputs: serial RS232C, parallel Centronix, Dimensions (WxDxH): 420 x 380 x 275 mm, Mains: 230 V~ 35655-93

Software f. UV-Spectrophotometer 35655-01

Spectrophotometer, SPEC 5000, 335-1000 nm

35667-93

Compact photometer PF12

For evaluation of colorimetric tests on extinction measurement using a factor or value diagram; direct display of concentration Six-language user guidance via LEDdisplay , Data interface RS 232With rechargeable batteries for fielduse , The handy filter photometer fills thegap between colorimetric evaluations and laboratory analyses. The detailed manual provides information about the chemical and ecological significance of the individual parameters, explains statutory limiting values for drinking water, treated sewer sludge, waste water, etc. Extent of delivery: Filter photometer , Stabile case , 4 NC batteries including battery charger , 2 Round cuvettes , Plastic funnels Manual- Technical data: Digital display , LCD 9x56 mm, 8-digits , Light source: Tungsten bulb , Filter: Filter wheel with 6 coloured glass filters: 365 nm / 405 nm / 470nm / 520 nm / 605 nm / 720 nm , Round cuvettes with screw fitting; External diameter: 16 mm- Energy supply: 5-6 V, 4 NC batteries with battery charger; sufficient for approx. 1500 measurements , Data interface: RS 232, Languages: D, E, F, S, I, NL; is setin the works , Dimensions: length: 195 mm, width:100 mm height: 40 mm , Weight: approx. 0.52 kg incl. batteries 35608-00

Function and Applications The spectrophotometer is an easy to use device for measurement of the degree of absorption or transmission of liquid samples in the visible range (335...1000nm).

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 991

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.11 Photometers, spectroscopes, polarimeters, refractometers

Pocket spectroscope 1

Spectrometer/goniom. w. vernier

Function and applications Function and Apllications Simple spectroscope with fixed slit width without wavelength scale. Equipment and technical data: Slit width: 0.02 mm, Length: 92 mm, Focal length of the objective: 40 mm, External diameter: 18 mm, Incl. case.

Spectrometer/ goniometer with double vernier. Equipment and technical data With magnifying glasses , 60° glass prism, Illumination device and telescope 35635-02

35580-00

Half-shade polarimeter, 230 V AC Pocket spectroscope 4

Function and Applications Function and Applications

Half-shade polarimeter..

Spectroscope with variable slit widt hand superimposed wavelength scale.

Equipment and technical data

Equipment and technical data Slit width: 0...0.8 mm, Focal length of objective: 40 mm, Wavelength scale: 400...750 nm, Divisions: 10 nm, Dimensions (mm): 55 x 110 x 23, Incl. case. 35585-00

Spectroscope,Kirch.-Bunsen type

Function and applications For qualitative observation and measurement of emission and absorption spectra. Equipment and technical data Table unit with fixed optical flint prism, Swiveling observation telescope with ocular, Scale tube with 100 division scale, Flint glass prism 60°, height: 20 mm with removable cover , Adjustable stand, Total height: approx. 230 mm 35645-00

excellence in science 992

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Polarimeter support with built-inlight source and filters polarimeter tube length 100 and 200 mm 2 scales 0-180 degrees division 1 degree vernier reading 0.05degrees with nonius light source sodium lamp 589 nm

Half-shade polarimeter, 230 V AC 35906-93 Polarimeter tube, l=100 mm 35906-02 Polarimeter tube, l=200 mm 35906-03

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.11 Photometers, spectroscopes, polarimeters, refractometers

Abbe refractometer

Function and applications Abbe refractometer for measuring the refraction index of liquids and solids with light of 590nm wavelength (sodium D line) and determining average dispersion nC-nF. The refractive index scale also includes an additional scale indicating sugar content from 0 - 95%. The prism and scales can be illuminated by daylight or by a separate lighting unit. Equipment and technical data: Measurement range: refractive indices 1.3-1.7 , Sugar content scale: 0-95%, corresponding to refractive indices from 1.33 to 1.53, Precision: 0.0003, Prism box with nozzles for connecting thermostats, Protective storage box, Adjustable glass plates, 1 Bottle of immersion liquid (1-bromonaphthalene), Conversion and correction tables, Thermometer, 0-70掳C, with removable protective sleeve 35912-00

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 993

6.5 Measurement instruments 6.5.12 General - measurement instruments

Speed of Light Meter Set

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Number of timers: 4 Measuring range: 0.000...9.999 s or 0000.0000...9999.9999 s Resolution: 1 ms or 0.1 ms Control (start/ stop): By electrical circuits (contact closure / contact opening or level according to TTL norm) Integrated power supplies for lightbarriers 4 × 5 V, 1.5 A Mains supply: 100...240 V~, 50...60 Hz Power requirement: 18 VA Dimensions (mm): 184 × 140 × 130 USB - interface for PC-based experiments

13604-99

App.for determ.of melting point Function and Applications The complete set to measure the light velocity in air, transparent liquids and solids. Equipment and technical data Consists of 1x Light velocity measuring apparatus, 1 x Retroreflector with stem, 1x Power supply 12 V/ 2 A, 1x Slide mount for optical bench, 1x Optical bench, l = 1800 mm, 1 x Holder for speed of light measuring instrument, 1 x Acrylic glass cylinder with a holder, 1 x Tubular cell with a holder Speed of Light Meter Set 11226-88 Speed of Light Meter 11226-00

Timer 4-4 with USB-interface

Made of DURAN® glass, has a GL 18/8 threaded connector for holding a thermometer and two inclined side tubes for insertion of melting point tubes.Height: 160 mm 35910-15

Melting point determination tubes, 100 pcs. 39052-00

Lab thermometer,stem,0..+250C 38064-00

Function and applications: Measures up to 4 times simultaneously. Multiple time measuring instrument for a variety of applications in teaching, wherever times are to be accurately measured. The timer unit has four 4 digit displays. The starting and stopping of the four built-in independent timers is actuated by the opening or closing of electrical circuits, or by means of light barriers or other TTL signal sources (e.g. a microphone). Benefits: The 6 different operating modes allow the timer unit to be adjusted to suit almost any experimental requirement. Three different operating modes are suitable for track experiments (distance-time law for four tracks, measurement of speed at four positions, principles of collisions), and in each case all four displays are utilized. Two further operating modes allow, for example, the measurement of the orbiting time of a rotary movement and the direct measurement of the duration of a complete swing of a mechanical pendulum. If required, two of the 4-digit displays can be combined to give an 8-digit display (0000.0000 to 9999.9999). Technical data: ▪ ▪

Four 4-digit LED displays Digit height: 9 mm

excellence in science 994

6 Additional material 6.6 Microscopes

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG 路 www.phywe.com 995

6 Additional material 6.6 Microscopes

TESS Biology Set 4 Microscopy

TESS Biology manual Microscopy

Function and Applications

Specification

To perform 50 microscopy experiments on:

Experimental literature for TESS Biology 50 experiments with student worksheets and teacher informations.

microscopy basics, work techniques, microscopy reagents, cell components, seed plants, vertibrates, other animals, other plants, fungi, protists, procaryonts Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

50 microscopic slides 50 cover glasses 12 snap-cap vials 10 reagent bottles 10 dropping pipettes with bulbs tweezers dissecting needles, pointed and lancet-shaped scissors scalpelholder 10 scalpel blades 200 sterileblood lancets powder spatula 2 glassrods funnel 3 beakers (100 ml, PP) 3beakers (250 ml, PP) beaker (1000 ml,PP) graduated cylinder (100 ml, PP) graduated pipette (10 ml) bulb pipettor(3 valves) 6 petri dishes (PS) testtube holder magnifying glass 120 labels prepared microscopic slides foam insert wooden box

▪ ▪ ▪

literature: TESS Biology manual Microscopy (13290-02) CD-ROM for TESS Microscopy (13290-12) microscope set of chemicals (13290-10)

13290-88

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

basics of microscopy worktechniques cell components seed plants and ferns vertibrates invertibrates fungi protists prokaryotes

Contents Ring file with 200 pages and CD-ROM ▪ ▪ ▪

with black/white drawings for easy copying teacher's sheets with colored digitalmicroscopy images CD-ROM with master copies of color presentation files (PDF format) for 47 microscopy topics to print transparencies or to show directly via avideo beamer and PDF files of student worksheets andteacher's sheets

13290-02

Chemicals set for TESS Microscopy (for up to 10 workgroups) Function and Applications Chemicals set for TESS Microscopy (for up to 10 workgroups). Equipment and technical data

Required Accessories ▪

Range of topics

incl.

CD-ROM

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Acetic acid 99 %, 250 ml raw alcohol (96% and 70%) isopropanol, absolute, 250 ml rotihistol, 250 ml glycerol, 100 ml Canada balsam (malinol), 50 ml sodium cloride safranine solution 1%, 50 ml Lugol's solution, 100 ml modified azure eosine methylene blue solution (Giemsa), modified, 50 ml neutral red, 5 g carmineacetic acid solution, 50 ml methyl green, 10 g distilled water, 500 ml

13290-10

excellence in science 998

6 Additional material 6.6 Microscopes

Student microscope SFC-100F-LED

adapter plug. Delivered with a focusable macro lens which allows that the camera can be used without a microscope to image any object on the PC monitor. Benefits ▪

▪

With the included image editing software for PC and Macintosh OSX platforms, the images can be measured and analyzed. It also provides a variety of other tools for teachers, students and researchers. Equipped with all necessary accessories that fit cameras on virtually any microscope eyepiece and thus allows you to turn any microscope into a digital microscope.

Equipment and technical data Function and Applications The student microscope model that can not be missing in the basic configuration. Budget models - with the all-metal stands for robust school life very well equipped. High quality DIN objective and precise mechanical components ensure excellent optical properties. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Monocular inclined with prism, rotated by 360° wide-pointer eyepiece: 10x 3-position turret Objective: 4x, 10x, 40x Magnification: 40x, 100x, 400x Condenser n.a. 0.65 with iris diaphragm and filter holder Coarse and fine drives LED lighting installed in the stand with 20 mA, 3.5 V and 70 mW LED Charger Dust cover

Student microscope SFC-100F-LED 62421-93 Spare bulb 230V/20W for SFC-100FL 62417-01 Halogen lamp 12V/10W,spare M100 62170-13 Replacement-LED-Lamp for Motic-Series SFC/F11/18/ 28, 62170-16 Objective 60x,N.A. 0.85, achrom. 62170-08 Objektive 100x,N.A. 1.25 62170-09 Eyepiece, Huygenian 15x,Accessory 62448-00 Micrometer ocular WF 10x/18mm 62170-05 Mechanical stage f.SFC-100 a.F-11 62416-01

CCD cameras

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

CCD camera Moticam 352 for PC, 0.3 megapixels 88037-01 CCD camera Moticam 1000 for PC, 1.3 megapixels 88037-02

Stereo microscope ST-30C-6LED,2x/4x

Function and Applications Stereomicroscope. The ST-30 series is a unique transition to more powerful stereo microscopy. To provide proper optical alignment was a high value, and thereby ensures precision mechanics comfortable long term use. Equipment and technical data ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Function and Applications Digital cameras to be placed on microscope eyepieces of any diameter. The four included eyepiece adapter for eyepieces with a diameter of 28 mm, 30 mm, 34 mm and 35 mm can be adapted to any eyepieces, even if they differ from the mentioned diameter. Nor can you connect the camera to microscopes, which have a photo tube with C-mount

USB-cable with 16 mm CCD Clip 3 lux light sensitivity Ocularadapter for all microscopes (Oculars with 28mm, 30mm, 34mm and 35mm Diameter) Calibration slides Focusing lens for webcam use Macrotubus to view objects without a microscope Software Motic Image Plus 2.0, on Windows and MacOS X running

▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Binocular inclined tube Stereohead rotatable through 360° Stable stand with stage plate and 2 stage clips Height-adjustable binocular eyepiece unit Focussing by means of two coaxial focussing knobs with sliding clutch One pair of interchangeable wide-field eyepieces WF10×/20 with eyecups Rotatable nosepiece with 2 aligned pairs of objectives 2×/4× or 1×/3× for rapid magnification change Magnification:20×/40× or 10×/30× 5 LEDs for incident light and 1 LED for transmitted light Rechargeable so it can be used independent from a network Connection voltage 230 V,50...60Hz Complete with dust cover and battery charger

62466-93

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG · www.phywe.com 999

6 Additional material 6.6 Microscopes

excellence in science 1000

al Correction: Contrary to our expectations, the procedure for type approval of our X-ray apparatus „PHYWE X-ray XR 4.0 expert unit, Basic set“, carried out by the Bundesamt für Strahlenschutz (BFS) [Federal Office for Radiation Protection], is still not completed. The patent for our S-Lock safety system has been applied for, however, it is still pending. We hereby put right statements that say otherwise on various pages in this catalogue. Furthermore, we clarify that we are considered to be “one” of the world’s leading suppliers of integrated overall solutions for the area of scientific technical training in schools, universities and educational institutions. We correct our statement in this catalogue insofar as being “the” world’s leading supplier. Göttingen, den 15.09.2011 PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG

110610_umschlag_export.indd 4

10.06.11 16:34

Tel. +49 (0) 551 604 - 0 Fax +49 (0) 551 604 - 107

00001-02

info@phywe.com

Copyright by PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG. Subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Edition 06/2011

PHYWE Systeme GmbH & Co. KG Robert-Bosch-Breite 10 D-37079 Gรถttingen

In te rn

s n o i t u l o s s Worldclas : n o i t a c u d e r e t t e b r o f m o c . e w y h p . www

excellence in science

110610_umschlag_export.indd 1

10.06.11 16:34

Phy

Chem

Bio

Applied